JP7291414B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the problems described above, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state in the variation by the aspect of the variation icon corresponding to the variation,
In changing the aspect of the variable icon displayed in the variable area, the variable icon and the pending icon displayed in the pending area are changed to participant images indicating participants in a predetermined competition, and the participation perform a competition effect in which the participant of the person image performs the predetermined competition, and change the aspect of the variation icon based on the performance in the predetermined competition of the participant of the participant image corresponding to the variation icon ;
The predetermined competition is a race competition for ranking,
In the competition production, the degree of expectation indicated by the variable icon according to the number of times the participant of the participant image corresponding to the variable icon overtakes the participant of the participant image corresponding to the holding icon. The aspect of the variable icon changes so that the
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of a sub-display screen 64; It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern duplication movement production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design duplication movement production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design duplication movement production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern sequential fluctuation|variation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern sequential fluctuation|variation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern sequential fluctuation|variation production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design special production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design special production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design special production C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern alignment effect A; It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design alignment production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design alignment production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a temporary stop symbol movement effect A; It is a diagram for explaining a temporary stop symbol movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporary stop symbol movement production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display effect A through a transparent area; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display effect B through a transparent area; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display effect C through a transparent area; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a rhythmic win-lose notification effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a rhythmic win-lose notification effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a rhythmic win-lose notification effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design competition production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design competition production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design competition production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a logo movement contact effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a logo movement contact effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a logo movement contact effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern count continuous production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern count continuous production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern count continuous production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode pseudo-continuous effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode pseudo-continuous effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode pseudo-continuous effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation|variation straddling continuous production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation|variation straddle continuous production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation|variation straddle continuous production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon-linked effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon-linked effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon-linked effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the special holding|maintenance change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special holding|maintenance change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special holding|maintenance change production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a holding expectation level effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a holding expectation level effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a holding expectation level effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means operation state notification effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means operation state notification effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation device operation state notification effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the load provision production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the load provision production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the load provision production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state continuation suggestion production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state continuation suggestion production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state continuation suggestion production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change production|presentation A during a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change production|presentation B during a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change production|presentation C during a game. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a group forewarning effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a group forewarning effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a group forewarning effect C; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state transition production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state transition production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state transition production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining background voice effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining background voice effect B; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a voice setting effect; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a character effect sound output presentation A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character effect sound output presentation B; It is a figure for demonstrating the music selection production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the state transition fluctuation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the state transition fluctuation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the state transition fluctuation production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon change effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon change effect C;

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62, effect button 63, sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), sword member 65, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, A frame movable body 69 is provided. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, movable frame bodies 69 (also referred to as movable frame accessories 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60 . The movable frame body 69 normally rests at a retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and moves (extends) from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. ) and stop at a position where the handle 60 is touched. The movable frame body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate vertically and horizontally according to the effect. The sword member 65 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be capable of executing a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. As shown in FIG. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. , a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, and a big winning opening open A starting port 17, a general winning port 27 (ordinary winning port 27), an out port 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper part of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a suspended digested image display area (the suspended display area) in which the suspended digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The pending icon 9C may also be simply called a pending icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect" or "variation display". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("extraction of special figure suspension" described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. can rest in any advanced position in front of the The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom at the advanced position.

Above the image display device 7, a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed below the image display device 7 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which game balls flow in and an exit part from which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 that it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "lottery for special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the ``lottery of normal symbols'' means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big prize winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 has an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The large winning opening opening start opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes through. However, the gaming machine 1 does not have to include the big winning opening opening start opening 17 .

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize at the first start hole 20 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and win prizes in the second start hole 21, the first big prize hole 30, and the second big prize hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. If the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be used as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be used as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large winning opening opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the 2 major winning opening sensor 35a, V area sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a, 29a are illustrated. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17 a is provided inside the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball entering the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning opening sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning opening 29 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display device 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the production as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols are stored. etc. (including production patterns) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 , the second movable accessory 15 and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) for determining the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and according to the motion pattern data. It controls the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. A vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, and is driven according to a signal from the relay board 108, so that the effect button 63 can be vibrated. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. A sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been detected is also connected to the relay board 108 .

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A ceiling flag, a V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, and a time saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information described above do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Also, as the initial state of the counters, "500" is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-determination command, a pending ball number command, a variation start command, a variation A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Ceiling production counter, overnight production counter, probability variable production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight effect counter is maintained without being cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the late-night production counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The overnight performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the game machine 1, and 0 is set as an initial state. Information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is variably displayed remains. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. The “read-ahead effect random number” is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure pending by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number value is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined as "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, and it is determined as "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric tube 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H”, “15H”, “22H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, open It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34" when "15H" or "22H". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .
open the port.

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “big wins” and “losses” as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly classified into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, special figure stop symbol data 11H~14H, 21H big hits correspond to "V passage scheduled big hits (probability variable big hits)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big win that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage expected jackpot" includes "16RV expected passage jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed after the jackpot game is completed. It's becoming That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, after the time-saving game is finished, the game state becomes a low probability base state (normal state) in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" appears to be in a normal high probability low base state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state is A high-probability-low base state with a high probability becomes a latent state (variable latent probability state), and it is difficult for the player to discern the variable latent probability state. That is, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" Low probability time saving state (low probability high base state) and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” high-precision time-saving state (high-precision high-base state) after the jackpot game, and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” time-saving end The later low-probability-low base state and the high-probability-low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. Game control microcomputer 81, when in the time-saving state, variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning of the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game is in the high-probability-high base state is, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot”. "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are such that, in the high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. ends with "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high-probability-high base state, after the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) special symbol variable display is executed and a high-probability-low base state (latent probability variable state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes the low-probability base state is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” among the jackpot types shown in FIG. In this jackpot, in the low-probability base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and winning the first starting port 20 is easier than winning the second starting port 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. As for the initial value of the flag, the ceiling flag is "1", ie, "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", ie, "OFF". The initial value of status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal random number) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generating circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V area sensor detection process (step S106), reserved ball The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number in the first to normal symbol reservation storage areas 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random number value. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a table for a high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") out of the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric tube 22 is selected with reference to the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and finishes this process.

In the above step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6 pieces), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special Figure 2 big hit determination process (step S1402) and special figure 1 big hit determination process (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described collectively. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high probability state table in the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big hit is determined (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to make the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Variation pattern selection processing of special figure 2 (step S1403) and variation pattern selection processing of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

When the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a reach random number as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as a variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808) and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is entered again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, "100" is set to the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. In the game state designation command, information about the current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability variable state, probability variable counter value, time saving state, time saving counter value, etc.) include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of variations of special symbols executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the prescribed number of revolutions. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the prescribed number of rotations has passed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set to the time saving counter as the number of times of saving time (number of times given). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this processing ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time-saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, , the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passage scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process is finished.

In the above step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In addition, when the V opening and closing member 71 is short-circuited, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that wins the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period. set and finish this process.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns OFF the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "100" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and sets the ceiling counter to "500" as the prescribed number of rotations until b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the variable probability flag is OFF, when the game hits 500 times, it enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specifying command includes information about the set game state (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variable flag, probability variable counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1 to it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big win, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a reservation ball number command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets the fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot included in the opening command in a sub RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning hole or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, when receiving the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag , ceiling counter, etc.) are stored in the sub-RAM 94 . Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time reduction effect counter, probability variable effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated. For example, the number of remaining fluctuations (number of games) during time reduction is set in a time reduction performance counter, the number of remaining fluctuations in probability variation is set in the probability variation performance counter, and the remaining variation frequency until reaching the ceiling is set in the ceiling performance counter. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability variations, and the number of ceilings. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the prior determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot prior determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type prior determination result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and when the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, of the chance-up production pattern determination table T53, only the portion for determining the variable production pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs count effect pattern determination processing (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process is the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of probability change (number of games), the number of remaining fluctuations during time saving, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game This is a process for displaying the number of times of change and the like on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number of times on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation performance counter at the time of probability variation. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variable remaining number of times based on the value of the time saving effect counter during time saving.

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the overnight effect counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the overnight performance counter stores the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on. The effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations from power-on by, for example, incrementing an overnight effect counter each time a variable effect end command is received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 (eg, TH2=200) or less when the value of the effect counter is TH1 (eg, TH1=10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the RAM clear has not been performed. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Moreover, the effect control microcomputer 91 may turn off the display representing the value of the ceiling effect counter and the chance image again when the value of the overnight effect counter is TH4 (eg, TH4=100). Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter as described above based on the value of the overnight effect counter, or may determine based on the value of the ceiling effect counter. good too. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (eg, TH6=100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (eg, TH7=70). When , the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (eg, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number and stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R to be stopped and displayed. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not being executed (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. When the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-fluctuation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

9. Movement of Movable Body and Display Effect of Sub Display Screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. do In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like.

46A and 46B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying movement modes of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and the lower end thereof is located near the lower end of the image display device 7 . The upper end and lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). At the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored and the remaining part may be visible, or the whole may be stored and difficult to be seen. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 . It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be arbitrarily set. Also, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable accessory 14 may be formed with a decorative portion, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO" and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops in front of the image display device 7 (front surface) so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can stand still.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the frame movable accessory 69. As shown in FIG. The movable frame accessory 69 is composed of a pair of plate-like members arranged on both left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right direction. The two members are formed of flexible members, and are configured such that one main surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60 . As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the movable frame accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). . As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the movable frame accessory 69 move (advance) from the retracted position toward the direction of approaching the handle 60, i.e., move closer to each other. It can rest at the touching position (second aspect). The movable frame accessory 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position. The frame movable accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two members are separated from each other so as to change from the second mode to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory view showing an example of the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display an image. Moreover, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modified Examples, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display rendering example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or the like. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect example.

The pattern copy movement effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. This pattern duplication movement effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the pattern duplication movement effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pattern duplication movement effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the pattern duplication movement effect A. FIG. In the pattern duplication movement effect, after one pattern in a set of decorative patterns stops during the special pattern fluctuation, another pattern appears after being duplicated from the stopped pattern, and moves toward the stop position of the other pattern. It is a moving performance. In the symbol copy movement effect A, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special symbol variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. is stop-displayed in the second area A2. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the left decorative design 8L is changed, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the middle decorative design 8C. A second area A2 of the screen 7a is a stop position after the movement of the right decorative pattern 8R. Also, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low probability low base state) in the gaming state. Also, here, the display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 51(A). Here, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first area A1.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the right decorative design 8R appears from the left decorative design 8L stopped in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R of "3", which is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a translucent state. That is, here, an effect is executed in which "3" of the left decorative design 8L is duplicated to "3" of the right decorative design 8R.

As shown in FIG. 51(C), "3" of the right decorative design 8R duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is displayed in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. FIG. 51(C) shows a state in which "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward toward the second area A2 and passes through the third area A3. "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R maintains a translucent state while moving rightward.

As shown in FIG. 51(D), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving rightward does not stop at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second area A2, and is displayed on the display screen. Frame out from 7a. As a result, it is notified that the right decorative pattern 8R is not stopped at this "3".

A new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R of "4" different from the previous pattern "3" appears in a translucent state. That is, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative design 8R is duplicated one after another from "3" of the left decorative design 8L. In other words, a variable performance is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is generated from the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 and moves rightward one after another.

As shown in FIG. 51(E), "4" of the right decorative design 8R duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is displayed in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. FIG. 51(E) shows a state in which "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward toward the second area A2 and passes through the third area A3. "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R maintains a translucent state while moving rightward.

On the other hand, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R of "5" different from the previous pattern "4" appears in a translucent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative design 8R is duplicated one after another from the "3" of the left decorative design 8L, and the right decorative design 8R is generated from the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 and A variable production that moves in the direction one after another is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51(F), "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving to the right does not stop at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second area A2, and is displayed on the display screen. Frame out from 7a. As a result, it is notified that the right decorative pattern 8R is not stopped at this "4". "5" of the right decorative design 8R duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. FIG. 51(F) shows a state in which "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward toward the second area A2 and passes through the third area A3.

On the other hand, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R of "3" different from the previous pattern "5" appears in a translucent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative design 8R is duplicated one after another from the "3" of the left decorative design 8L, and the right decorative design 8R is generated from the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 and A variable production that moves in the direction one after another is executed. In this way, the right decorative pattern 8R appearing from the left decorative pattern 8L does not appear in accordance with the order of numbers set in advance such as "3", "4", "5", and "6", but in a random number order. may appear in .

As shown in FIG. 51(G), "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R that is moving rightward does not stop at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second area A2, and is displayed on the display screen. Frame out from 7a. As a result, it is notified that the right decorative pattern 8R is not stopped at this "5". The "3" of the right decorative design 8R copied from the "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. FIG. 51(G) shows a state in which "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward toward the second area A2 and passes through the third area A3.

On the other hand, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L still displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R of "6" different from the previous pattern "3" appears in a translucent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative design 8R is replicated one after another from the "3" of the left decorative design 8L, and the right decorative design 8R is generated from the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 and A variable production that moves in the direction one after another is executed. Also, in this way, the right decorative design 8R appearing from the left decorative design 8L may appear in random numerical order.

As shown in FIG. 51(H), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving rightward stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is determined and stopped at "3", and it is informed that the ready-to-win state has been reached. The "6" of the right decorative design 8R duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. FIG. 51(H) shows a state in which "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward toward the second area A2 and passes through the third area A3.

On the other hand, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R of "2" different from the previous pattern "6" appears in a translucent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative design 8R is duplicated one after another from the "3" of the left decorative design 8L, and the right decorative design 8R is generated from the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 and A variable production that moves in the direction one after another is executed. Also, in this way, the right decorative design 8R appearing from the left decorative design 8L may appear in random numerical order.

As shown in FIG. 51(I), in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, "3" of the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped, and "6" of the right decorative design 8R is moving rightward. does not stop at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second area A2, and frames out of the display screen 7a. Similarly, the "2" of the right decorative design 8R duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. , passes through the second area A2 and frames out from the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 51(J), the middle decorative design 8C appears from the left decorative design 8L stopped and displayed in the first area A1. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C of "3", which is the same design as the left decorative design 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is executed in which "3" of the left decorative design 8L to "3" of the middle decorative design 8C is duplicated.

As shown in FIG. 51(K), "3" of the middle decorative design 8C duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. Here, "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C moves rightward, passes through the third area A3, passes through the second area A2, and is out of the frame. "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8R maintains a translucent state while moving rightward.

On the other hand, a new middle decorative pattern 8C appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is still displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C of "4", which is different from the previous pattern "3", appears in a translucent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the middle decorative design 8C is duplicated one after another from "3" of the left decorative design 8L, and the middle decorative design 8C is generated from the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 and A variable production that moves in the direction one after another is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51(L), "4" of the middle decorative design 8C duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. It moves to the right and stops at the third area A3. As a result, it is notified that the middle decorative pattern 8C has been determined and stopped at "4". In addition, by the fixed stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped with the losing number of "343", and the win/fail result is notified. In addition, when "3" stops in the middle decorative pattern 8C, a big hit of "333" is reported.

[Pattern duplication movement effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the pattern duplication movement effect B. FIG. In the pattern duplication movement effect, after one pattern in a set of decorative patterns stops during the special pattern fluctuation, another pattern appears after being duplicated from the stopped pattern, and moves toward the stop position of the other pattern. It is a moving performance. In the symbol duplication movement effect B, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special symbol variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. is stop-displayed in the second area A2. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the left decorative design 8L is changed, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the middle decorative design 8C. A second area A2 of the screen 7a is a stop position after the movement of the right decorative pattern 8R. Also, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low probability low base state) in the gaming state. Also, here, the display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 52(A). Here, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first area A1.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the right decorative design 8R appears from the left decorative design 8L stopped in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative design 8L, the right decorative design 8R of "3", which is the same design as the left decorative design 8L, appears in a translucent state. That is, here, an effect is executed in which "3" of the left decorative design 8L is duplicated to "3" of the right decorative design 8R.

As shown in FIG. 52(C), "3" of the right decorative design 8R duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is displayed in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. As shown in FIGS. 52(C) to 52(E), "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R changes from "3" to another pattern (number) while rotating sideways. Here, the pattern (the number) changes each time it rotates horizontally. The right decorative pattern 8R rotates horizontally and changes the pattern in the order of "3", "2", "1", . That is, the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward while changing the pattern. The right decorative pattern 8R changes from translucent to normal color when it starts to move rightward, and maintains the normal color state while rotating (changing) horizontally.

As shown in FIG. 52(F), the right decorative pattern 8R moving rightward while rotating (fluctuation) stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R stops at (the number of) the pattern displayed when it stops in the second area A2. Here, it stops at "3". As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is determined and stopped at "3", and the ready-to-win state is notified.

As shown in FIG. 52(G), the middle decorative design 8C appears from the left decorative design 8L stopped in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C of "3", which is the same design as the left decorative design 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is executed in which "3" of the left decorative design 8L to "3" of the middle decorative design 8C is duplicated.

As shown in FIG. 52(H), "3" of the middle decorative design 8C duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. As shown in FIGS. 52(H) to 52(I), "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from "3" to another pattern (number) while rotating sideways. Here, the pattern (the number) changes each time it rotates horizontally. The middle decorative pattern 8C is horizontally rotated and randomly changed to "3", "8", "5", and so on, and moves to the third area A3. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves rightward while changing the pattern. In addition, when the middle decorative pattern 8C starts to move rightward, it changes from translucent to normal color, and maintains the normal color state while horizontally rotating (changing).

As shown in FIG. 52(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C moving rightward while rotating (moving) horizontally stops at the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C stops at (the number of) the pattern displayed when stopped in the third area A3. Here, it stops at "5". As a result, it is notified that the middle decorative pattern 8C has been determined and stopped at "5". In addition, by the fixed stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and displayed with a losing number of "353", and the win/fail result is notified. In addition, when "3" stops in the middle decorative pattern 8C, a big hit of "333" is announced.

FIGS. 52(K) to (L) are modifications of FIGS. 52(C) to (E). In FIGS. 52(C) to (E), the right decorative pattern 8R is assumed to change its pattern (number) from "3" to another pattern (number) while rotating sideways. However, the variation mode of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the above. In FIGS. 52(K)-(L), the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward and fluctuates in the vertical direction. Such a mode may be used.

[Pattern duplication movement effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the pattern duplication movement effect C. As shown in FIG. In the pattern duplication movement effect, after one pattern in a set of decorative patterns stops during the special pattern fluctuation, another pattern appears after being duplicated from the stopped pattern, and moves toward the stop position of the other pattern. It is a moving performance. In the symbol copy movement effect C, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special symbol variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. is stop-displayed in the second area A2. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the left decorative design 8L is changed, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the middle decorative design 8C. A second area A2 of the screen 7a is a stop position after the movement of the right decorative pattern 8R. Also, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low probability low base state) in the gaming state. Also, here, the display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 53(A). Here, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first area A1.

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the right decorative design 8R appears from the left decorative design 8L stopped in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative design 8L, the right decorative design 8R of "3", which is the same design as the left decorative design 8L, appears in a translucent state. That is, here, an effect is executed in which "3" of the left decorative design 8L is duplicated to "3" of the right decorative design 8R.

As shown in FIG. 53(C), "3" of the right decorative design 8R duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is displayed in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. FIG. 53(C) shows a state in which "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward toward the second area A2 and passes through the third area A3. "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R changes from translucent to normal color when it starts to move rightward, and moves while maintaining the normal color state.

As shown in FIG. 53(D), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving rightward stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. When the right decorative design 8R stops in the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed overlapping the stopped right decorative design 8R. The button image BTN is an image imitating the outer shape of the effect button 63 and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 .

When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 53(E), the button image BTN disappears and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed at "3" and stops, and FIG. 2, the button image BTN disappears, the right decorative pattern 8R rotates sideways, and there is a case where the pattern (number) other than "3" is fixed and stopped. FIGS. 53(J) to (K) show a state in which the right decorative pattern 8R rotates sideways and is fixed and stopped at "4". In FIG. 53(E), the right decorative symbol 8R is confirmed and stopped at "3", and it is informed that the ready-to-win state is reached.

After FIG. 53(E) or FIG. 53(K), as shown in FIG. 53(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the left decorative pattern 8L stopped in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. . Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C of "3", which is the same design as the left decorative design 8L, appears in a translucent state. That is, here, an effect is executed in which "3" of the left decorative design 8L to "3" of the middle decorative design 8C is duplicated.

As shown in FIG. 53(G), "3" of the middle decorative design 8C duplicated from "3" of the left decorative design 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from translucent to normal color when it starts to move rightward, and moves while maintaining the normal color state.

As shown in FIG. 53(H), the moving middle decorative symbol 8C "3" stops at the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. When the middle decorative design 8C stops in the third area A3, the button image BTN is displayed overlapping the stopped middle decorative design 8C. The button image BTN is an image imitating the outer shape of the effect button 63 and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 .

When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 53(I), the button image BTN disappears and the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3", and as shown in FIG. 53(L). , the button image BTN disappears, the middle decorative pattern 8C rotates sideways, and there is a case where the pattern (number) other than "3" is fixed and stopped. In FIG. 53(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is determined and stopped at "3", and a big win is notified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53(L), the button image BTN disappears, the middle decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally, and when the pattern (number) other than "3" is fixed and stopped, a failure is reported.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pattern duplication movement effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51A, the left decorative pattern 8L, which is one of the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, is displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. 51(F) to (H), after the first effect, the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the left decorative pattern 8L stopped in the first area A1 and is displayed. A second effect of moving toward the second area A2 of the screen 7a and stopping in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53 as well.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(L), after the second effect, the middle decorative symbol 8 stops in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L stops. , the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R can be used to notify the winner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53 as well.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the second effect, when the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the left decorative pattern 8L, it is the same as the stopped left decorative pattern 8L. represents a pattern. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, in the second effect, a plurality of right decorative symbols 8R appear continuously from the left decorative symbol 8L, and move toward the second area A2. , one stops at the second area A2 and the rest pass through the second area A2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, in the second effect, when the right decorative pattern 8R appearing from the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed and the game is played. When the player operates the production button 63, the pattern may be the same as when the right decorative pattern 8R appears, or the pattern may change. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, in the second effect, when the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the left decorative pattern 8L and moves toward the second area A2, the pattern changes. Move while moving. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the pattern copy movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pattern duplication moving effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C which are duplicated from the left decorative pattern 8L are assumed to have the patterns (numbers thereof) unchanged after duplication. However, after duplication, the symbol (number) may change and be variably displayed while moving to the right.
In the pattern duplication movement effects B and C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C duplicated from the left decorative pattern 8L are the same patterns (numbers) as the left decorative pattern 8L. However, the replicated right decorative design 8R and middle decorative design 8C may be different designs (numbers thereof) from the left decorative design 8L. For example, from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L to "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R may appear.

[Modification 2]
In the design duplication movement performances B and C, the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C are duplicated one by one from the left decorative design 8L, and one right decorative design 8R and one middle decorative design 8C are always It is assumed that the vehicle stops at the second area A2 and the third area A3. However, as in the pattern duplication movement effect A, from the left decorative design 8L, the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C may be duplicated respectively. For example, in the pattern duplication movement effect B, a plurality of right decorative patterns 8R appear continuously from the left decorative pattern 8L, each moves rightward while rotating horizontally, one stops in the second area A2, and the rest may pass through the second area A2 and frame out. The same applies to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

[Modification 3]
In the pattern duplicating movement effects A and C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C duplicated from the left decorative pattern 8L did not change their patterns (numbers) while moving rightward, but the pattern duplicating movement effects did not change. As in B, the symbol (number) may change during rightward movement.

[Modification 4]
In the pattern duplication movement effects A to C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are duplicated (appear) from the left decorative pattern 8L. However, other designs may be copied from other than the left decorative design 8L. For example, the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L may be duplicated from the right decorative design 8R, or the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R may be duplicated from the middle decorative design 8C.

[Modification 5]
In the pattern duplication movement effects A to C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C may be moved while maintaining translucency during the movement to the right, or their color, shape, and size may change. may

[Modification 6]
In the pattern duplication movement effects A and B, similarly to the pattern duplication movement effect C, when the right decorative design 8R appearing from the left decorative design 8L reaches the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed. ) may be changed. The same applies when the middle decorative pattern 8C appearing from the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the third area A3.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing the propriety,
a first effect in which a first pattern, which is one of the set of decorative patterns, stops in a first area of the display means;
After the first effect, a second pattern appears from the first pattern stopped in the first area, moves toward the second area of the display means, and moves to the second area of the display means. A second effect that stops in the area of
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
After the second effect, the third pattern stops in the third area of the display means, and the winning or not according to the stopped first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern. to inform
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
In the second effect, when the second symbol appears from the first symbol, it represents the same symbol as the stopped first symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
In the second effect, a plurality of the second symbols appear continuously from the first symbol, each move toward the second area, and one stops at the second area. and the remainder passes through the second region;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image imitating the appearance of the operation means;
In the second effect, when the second symbol appearing from the first symbol reaches the second area, the operation means image is displayed,
When the player operates the operation means, the pattern may be the same as when the second pattern appeared, or the pattern may change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
In the second effect, when the second pattern appears from the first pattern and moves toward the second area, the pattern moves while fluctuating.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol sequential variation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. This symbol sequential variation effect is executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a pattern sequential variation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). Also, the corresponding sound data is read from the ROM 103 and the sound is output from the speaker 67 .

[Pattern sequential variation effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect A. FIG. In the pattern sequential fluctuation performance, a set of decorative patterns is displayed with the previous stop pattern during the special pattern fluctuation, one of which is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining patterns maintain the stopped state with the previous stop pattern. After that, the remaining symbols start changing sequentially. In the symbol sequential variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. It is

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low probability low base state) in the gaming state.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special figure variation. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (retained icon) 9C is digested (disappeared). Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. And the next special figure variation is started. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "356" without changing the display position.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the "5" that had been stopped and displayed moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and other patterns (numbers) are framed in from above. The next production is executed. In addition, the variable display here means a display in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is moving at high speed can be visually recognized, a state in which the pattern cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the variable display cannot be visually recognized. also includes Here, it is assumed that the variable display cannot be visually recognized. The rest of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) maintain their stop display without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the displayed "6" moves downward and out of the frame without any change in color or shape, and other patterns (numbers) are framed in from above. The next production is executed. The variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R is also invisible. The rest of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) remain stationary without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the stopped display of "3" moves downward and out of the frame without any change in color or shape, and other patterns (numbers) are framed in from above. The next production is executed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is also invisible. As a result, the variable display of all decorative patterns cannot be visually recognized.

Thus, here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed in the order of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In general, the order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are stopped is the reverse order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C. Generally, when the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time or in the order of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. Even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R start to fluctuate in order, the right decorative pattern 8R always starts moving before the left decorative pattern 8L goes out of the frame. In this embodiment, when the first symbol is out of the frame, the rest of the symbols are kept stopped. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

As shown in FIG. 54(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special figure variation. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once in a stationary display mode of "689" from a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to variable display. This can surprise the player. As shown in FIGS. 54(F) and (G), the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappeared) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. And the next special figure variation is started. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "689" without changing the display position.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed as shown in FIG. 54(H). When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the displayed "9" moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and other patterns (numbers) are framed in from above. The next production is executed. In addition, the variable display here means a display in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is moving at high speed can be visually recognized, a state in which the pattern cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the variable display cannot be visually recognized. also includes Here, it is assumed that the variable display cannot be visually recognized. The rest of the decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C) maintain their stop display without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the stationary display "8" moves downward and out of the frame without changing the color or shape, and other patterns (numbers) are framed in from above. The next production is executed. The variable display of the middle decorative pattern 8C is also invisible. The rest of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) remain stationary without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, "6" which had been stopped and displayed moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and other patterns (numbers) are framed in from above. The next production is executed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is also invisible. As a result, the variable display of all decorative patterns cannot be visually recognized.

Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to be displayed in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L. Generally, when the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time or in the order of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols start to change is reversed from the general order. Also, generally, even if the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to change in order, the right decorative design is always displayed before the left decorative design 8L goes out of the frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when the first symbol is out of the frame, the rest of the symbols are kept stopped. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed for each change makes it impossible for the player to predict which pattern will disappear, and the player can enjoy the changing effect. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the first symbol is out of the frame and the remaining symbols are maintained in the stopped display, the timing at which the second symbol is out of the frame and the remaining symbols are maintained in the stopped display, and the last 1 The timing at which the two statically displayed symbols frame out is executed at a constant rhythm. Here, it is executed at regular intervals. A sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 at the start of variation of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As described above, in this embodiment, when the first symbol goes out of the frame, the rest of the symbols maintain their stop display. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each pattern is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, if a short sound is generated at the start timing of fluctuation of each symbol, the sound will be rhythmically generated three times, so that the player's attention can be more attracted.

As shown in FIG. 54(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special figure variation. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once in the stationary display mode of "234" from a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to variable display. This can surprise the player. As shown in FIGS. 54(K) and (L), the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. And the next special figure variation is started. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "234" without changing the display position.

[Pattern sequential fluctuation effect B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect B. FIG. In the pattern sequential fluctuation performance, a set of decorative patterns are displayed with the last stopped pattern during the special pattern fluctuation, one of which is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining patterns maintain the stopped state with the last stopped pattern. After that, the remaining symbols start changing sequentially. In the symbol sequential variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. It is

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low probability low base state) in the gaming state.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 55(A) and (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special figure variation. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (retained icon) 9C is digested (disappeared). Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. And the next special figure variation is started. After the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "356" while moving upward for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in a direction (upward) different from the variation direction (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed as shown in FIG. 55(C). When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the displayed "6" stopped moving upward without changing its color or shape, moved downward, and out of the frame. A production that comes in the frame is executed. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the right decorative pattern 8R is moving at high speed but also a state in which the pattern cannot be visually recognized. Here, it is assumed that patterns with different numbers can be visually recognized in a state in which they move at high speed from top to bottom. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the pattern (the number thereof) cannot be visually recognized, and only the vertical line due to the pattern moving from the top to the bottom at high speed can be visually recognized. The remaining decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) keep moving in a direction (upward) different from the changing direction (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R and stop displaying.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(D), the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the displayed "5" stopped moving upward without changing its color or shape, moved downward, and out of the frame. A production that comes in the frame is executed. Also in the variable display of the middle decorative pattern 8C, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the patterns with different numbers move at high speed from the top to the bottom. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the pattern (the number thereof) cannot be visually recognized, and only the vertical line due to the pattern moving from the top to the bottom at high speed can be visually recognized. The remaining decorative designs (left decorative design 8L) maintain movement and stop display in a direction (upward) different from the changing direction (downward) of the right decorative design 8R and middle decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the displayed "3" stopped moving upward without changing its color or shape, moved downward, and out of the frame. A production that comes in the frame is executed. Also in the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is assumed that patterns with different numbers can be visually recognized in a state of moving from top to bottom at high speed. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the pattern (the number thereof) cannot be visually recognized, and only the vertical line due to the pattern moving from the top to the bottom at high speed can be visually recognized. As a result, all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable display and can be visually recognized.

Thus, here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to be displayed in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. Generally, when the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time or in the order of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols start to change is reversed from the general order. Also, generally, even if the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to change in order, the right decorative design is always displayed before the left decorative design 8L goes out of the frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when the first symbol is out of the frame, the rest of the symbols are kept stopped. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

After the fluctuation for a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 55(F), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed at (the number of) the pattern of "9". The left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C continue to be variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(G), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed at (the number of) the pattern of "8". The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is continued. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed at (the number of) the pattern of "6". As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from being variably displayed to being stopped at "689".

As shown in FIGS. 55(H) and (I), the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappeared) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. And the next special figure variation is started. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continue to stop displaying "689" while moving downward. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in the same direction (downward) as the variation direction (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 55(J), the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are simultaneously variably displayed. When the variable display is started, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C move downward and out of the frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C, the stopped display "89" greatly accelerates the speed of downward movement and out of the frame without changing the color or shape, and other patterns ( ) is executed in the frame. It should be noted that the variable display here means that it is possible to visually recognize a state in which patterns with different numbers move from top to bottom at high speed. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the pattern (the number thereof) cannot be visually recognized, and only the vertical line due to the pattern moving from the top to the bottom at high speed can be visually recognized. The remaining decorative designs (left decorative design 8L) maintain movement and stop display in the same direction (downward) as the changing direction (downward) of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(K), the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the stationary display of "6" greatly accelerates the speed of downward movement without changing the color or shape and out of the frame. The production that comes in is executed. Also in the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is assumed that patterns with different numbers can be visually recognized in a state of moving from top to bottom at high speed. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the pattern (the number thereof) cannot be visually recognized, and only the vertical line due to the pattern moving from the top to the bottom at high speed can be visually recognized. As a result, all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable display and can be visually recognized.

Here, among the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R, the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C are variably displayed at the same time, and the left decorative design 8L is variably displayed thereafter. Generally, when the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time or in the order of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. In this embodiment, one symbol starts to change after a plurality of symbols have changed at the same time. Also, generally, even if the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to change in order, the right decorative design is always displayed before the left decorative design 8L goes out of the frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when two symbols are out of the frame, the rest of the symbols remain stopped. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the manner in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate changes for each fluctuation, the player cannot predict which symbols will disappear, and can enjoy the fluctuating performance. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which each symbol starts to move out of the frame is executed at a constant rhythm. Here, it is executed at regular intervals. A sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 at the start of variation of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As described above, in the present embodiment, when some of the symbols are out of the frame, the rest of the symbols are still displayed. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each pattern is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, when a short sound is generated at the start timing of fluctuation of each symbol, the sound is generated rhythmically, so that the player's attention can be more attracted.

As shown in FIG. 55(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special figure variation. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all appear in the stationary display mode of "234" from the variable display state. This can surprise the player. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (retained icon) 9C is digested (disappeared). Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. And the next special figure variation is started. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "234" without changing the display position.

[Pattern sequential fluctuation effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect C. As shown in FIG. In the pattern sequential fluctuation performance, a set of decorative patterns is displayed with the previous stop pattern during the special pattern fluctuation, one of which is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining patterns maintain the stopped state with the previous stop pattern. After that, the remaining symbols start changing sequentially. In the symbol sequential variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. It is

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 56(A) and (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special figure variation. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (retained icon) 9C is digested (disappeared). Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. And the next special figure variation is started. After the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "356" while moving upward for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in a direction (upward) different from the variation direction (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the displayed "6" stopped moving upward without changing its color or shape, moved downward, and out of the frame. A production that comes in the frame is executed. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the right decorative pattern 8R is moving at high speed but also a state in which the pattern cannot be visually recognized. Here, it is assumed that patterns with different numbers can be visually recognized in a state in which they move at high speed from top to bottom. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the pattern (the number thereof) cannot be visually recognized, and only the vertical line due to the pattern moving from the top to the bottom at high speed can be visually recognized. The remaining decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) keep moving in a direction (upward) different from the changing direction (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R and stop displaying.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(D), the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the displayed "5" stopped moving upward without changing its color or shape, moved downward, and out of the frame. An effect that does not come in frame is executed. The variable display of the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized. That is, here, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are configured to have different modes of variable display. The remaining decorative designs (left decorative design 8L) maintain movement and stop display in a direction (upward) different from the changing direction (downward) of the right decorative design 8R and middle decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the displayed "3" stopped moving upward without changing its color or shape, moved downward, and out of the frame. A production that comes in the frame is executed. In the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, similarly to the variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the patterns with different numbers move from top to bottom at high speed. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the pattern (the number thereof) cannot be visually recognized, and only the vertical line due to the pattern moving from the top to the bottom at high speed can be visually recognized. As a result, all decorative patterns are variably displayed.

Thus, here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to be displayed in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. Generally, when the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time or in the order of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols start to change is reversed from the general order. Also, generally, even if the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to change in order, the right decorative design is always displayed before the left decorative design 8L goes out of the frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when the first symbol is out of the frame, the rest of the symbols are kept stopped. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. Further, in this embodiment, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to have different modes of variable display. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

After the variation for a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in an effect in which the aspect of the variation display changes. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are switched from the variable display visible state to the non-visible state, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is switched from the variable display non-visible state to the visible state. Thus, in this embodiment, the mode of variable display changes during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the pattern of the variable display varies randomly with the lapse of time. As a result, the variable display is not monotonous, and the player can be entertained.

After the fluctuation for a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 56(G), the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C are stopped and displayed at the same time. Here, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed at (the number of) the "9" design, and the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed at the (the number of) the "8" design. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is continued. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed at (the number of) the pattern of "6". As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from being variably displayed to being stopped at "689".

As shown in FIG. 56(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the same positions without changing their positions for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after being stopped, and then displayed in FIG. 56(I). , the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "689" while moving downward. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in the same direction (downward) as the variation direction (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. This notifies the start of the pseudo-run.

After the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are moved downward for a predetermined period, the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C are simultaneously re-variably displayed as shown in FIG. 56(J). When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C move downward and out of the frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C, the stopped display "89" greatly accelerates the speed of downward movement and out of the frame without changing the color or shape, and other patterns ( ) will not come into the frame. In addition, the variable display here means a display in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is moving at high speed can be visually recognized, a state in which the pattern cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the variable display cannot be visually recognized. also includes Here, it is assumed that the variable display cannot be visually recognized. The remaining decorative designs (left decorative design 8L) maintain movement and stop display in the same direction (downward) as the changing direction (downward) of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(K), the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and out of the frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the stationary display of "6" greatly accelerates the speed of downward movement without changing the color or shape and out of the frame. The production that comes in is executed. Also in the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is assumed that patterns with different numbers can be visually recognized in a state of moving from top to bottom at high speed. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the pattern (the number thereof) cannot be visually recognized, and only the vertical line due to the pattern moving from the top to the bottom at high speed can be visually recognized. In accordance with the variable display of the left decorative design 8L, the variable display of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C changes in the same manner as the variable display of the left decorative design 8L. That is, the variable display of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C changes from being invisible to being visible like the left decorative design 8L. As a result, all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable display and can be visually recognized.

Here, among the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R, the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C are variably displayed at the same time, and the left decorative design 8L is variably displayed after that. Generally, when the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time or in the order of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. In this embodiment, one symbol starts to change after a plurality of symbols have changed at the same time. Also, generally, even if the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to change in order, the right decorative design is always displayed before the left decorative design 8L goes out of the frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when two symbols are out of the frame, the rest of the symbols remain stopped. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the manner in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate changes for each fluctuation, the player cannot predict which symbols will disappear, and the player can enjoy the fluctuating performance. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which each symbol starts to fluctuate and is out of the frame is executed at a constant rhythm. Here, it is executed at regular intervals. A sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 at the start of fluctuation of each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. As described above, in the present embodiment, when some of the symbols are out of the frame, the rest of the symbols are still displayed. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each pattern is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, when a short sound is generated at the start timing of fluctuation of each symbol, the sound is generated rhythmically, so that the player's attention can be more attracted.

As shown in FIG. 56(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special figure variation. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once from the variable display state in the stop display mode of "234". This can surprise the player. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (retained icon) 9C is digested (disappeared). Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. And the next special figure variation is started. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "234" without changing the display position.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the symbol sequential variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(A), the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. After the next variation of the special figure variation in which the production is executed is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed with the same pattern "356" as the pattern stopped and displayed in the first production are displayed. 2 effect and, as shown in FIG. 54(C), after the second effect, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, is variably displayed, and the remaining patterns ( A third effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are kept stopped can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(D), after the third effect, one of the symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) that are maintained to be stopped is displayed. , the right decorative pattern 8R is further variably displayed, and the remaining patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) are maintained in a stopped display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(E), after the fourth effect, the remaining symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L) that are still displayed in a still state are further variably displayed in the fifth effect. can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54(H) to 54(J), a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern. In the third production, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are maintained in stop display, and in the fourth production, the middle decorative pattern 8C is further included. is variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L maintains the stop display, and in the fifth effect, the left decorative design 8L is variably displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, in the second effect, the third effect, the fourth effect, and the fifth effect, one symbol that is stopped and displayed is variably displayed. , a corresponding sound is output from the speaker 67 . According to this configuration, it is possible to entertain the player visually and aurally by a novel production that has never existed before, and to improve interest. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed are in the first direction different from the variation direction (downward direction) of the symbols. direction (upward), and in the third effect, the remaining symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that maintain the stop display move in the first direction (upward). is continuing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the pattern sequential variation effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol sequential variation performances A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed even after the next variation starts after being stopped. However, it may be configured such that it disappears once at the start of variation and the previous stop symbol is displayed again during variation.

[Modification 2]
In the pattern sequential variation performances A to C, the order of starting variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is random. However, the order of starting variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be determined in advance.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol sequential variation performances A to C, a short sound is generated at the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Each short sound may have a different timbre and a different length. Also, the sound may be long and the sound may overlap.

[Modification 4]
In the symbol sequential variation performances B and C, the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are moved upward after the start of the special symbol variation, but the direction of movement can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may move rightward, leftward, or obliquely.

[Modification 5]
In the symbol sequential variation performance A, after the start of the special symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed do not move. However, it may be moved in the same manner as the pattern sequential variation effects B and C.

[Modification 6]
In the symbol sequential variation performances B and C, the symbols whose variable display is visually recognizable may not be visually recognizable.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing the propriety,
a first effect in which the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed;
After the next variation of the special figure variation in which the first performance is executed is started, the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed with the same symbols as the symbols stopped and displayed in the first performance are displayed. a second performance,
After the second effect, a third effect in which one symbol of the set of decorative symbols is variably displayed and the rest of the symbols are kept stationary,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
After the third effect, one of the symbols maintaining the stop display is further variably displayed, and a fourth effect in which the remaining symbols maintain the stop display can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the remaining symbols maintaining the stop display are further variably displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-3,
The set of decorative designs includes a left decorative design, a middle decorative design, and a right decorative design,
In the third effect, the right decorative design is variably displayed, the middle decorative design and the left decorative design are maintained to be displayed stationary,
In the fourth effect, further, the middle decorative pattern is variably displayed, the left decorative pattern maintains a stop display,
In the fifth effect, the left decorative pattern is further variably displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-3 or aspect A2-4 further comprises
A sound output means for outputting sound is provided,
In the second performance, the third performance, the fourth performance, and the fifth performance, the sound output means responds when one symbol that is stopped and displayed is switched to a variable display. sound is output
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the second effect, the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed moves in a first direction different from the direction of variation of the symbols,
In the third effect, the remaining symbols maintaining the stop display continue to move in the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol special effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative pattern special effect is executed during a special pattern variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special decorative design effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern special effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol special effect A is an effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative design special effect, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the decorative design variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the first decorative design group display area XAA, the second decorative design group display area XBB, the reserved icon XC1, the reserved icon XC2, the reserved icon XD1, the reserved icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed. The character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

The first decorative pattern group display area XAA includes three frames arranged horizontally continuously, and the decorative pattern XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative design XA is composed of a first decorative design XA1, a second decorative design XA2, and a third decorative design XA3. In the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the first decorative pattern XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative pattern XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative pattern XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. Each of the first decorative design XA1, the second decorative design XA2, and the third decorative design XA3 includes a number as an identifier capable of identifying whether a big win or a loss is made.

The second decorative pattern group display area XBB includes two frames arranged horizontally continuously, and decorative patterns XB are displayed in the respective frames. The decorative design XB is composed of a fourth decorative design XB1 and a fifth decorative design XB2. In the second decorative design group display area XBB, the fourth decorative design XB1 is displayed in the left frame, and the fifth decorative design XB2 is displayed in the right frame. Each of the fourth decorative design XB1 and the fifth decorative design XB2 includes a number as an identifier capable of identifying whether a big win or a loss is made.

The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are vertically displayed immediately to the right of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. be. The suspended icon XC1 corresponds to the suspended icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The reserved icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are vertically displayed immediately to the left of the second decorative design group display area XBB, that is, displayed in association with the second decorative design group display area XBB. The suspended icon XD1 corresponds to the suspended icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the pending icon XC1 and the pending icon XD1 represent the same pending number. For example, when the number of pending icons XC1 is two, the number of pending icons XD1 is also two. The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in circles, and the pending icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in rhombuses.
In the example of FIG. 57, four pending icons XC1 and four pending icons XD1 are displayed, indicating that the number of pending orders is four.

A first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative design group display area XAA, and a second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative design group display area XBB. A jackpot pattern or a losing pattern is formed on each of these reach lines.

In the decorative design variation effect, the decorative design XA in the first decorative design group display area XAA and the decorative design XB in the second decorative design group display area XBB are both being varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), a decorative symbol stop effect 1 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 1, the first decorative design XA1 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57(B), the first decorative symbol XA1 whose identifier is "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative design XA2, the third decorative design XA3, the fourth decorative design XB1, and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(C), decorative symbol stop effect 2 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 2, the second decorative design XA2 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57(C), the second decorative symbol XA2 whose identifier is "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative design XA3, the fourth decorative design XB1, and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(D), a decorative symbol stop effect 3 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 3, the third decorative design XA3 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57(D), the third decorative symbol XA3 whose identifier is "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative design XB1 and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating. At this time, the missing symbols "1", "7", and "5" are displayed on the first reach line LN1 by the decorative symbols XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(E), decorative symbol stop effect 4 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 4, the fourth decorative design XB1 and the fifth decorative design XB2 of the decorative design XB are stopped and displayed at the same time. In the example of FIG. 57(E), the fourth decorative symbol XB1 whose identifier is "1" and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 whose identifier is "7" are stopped and displayed. At this time, the missing symbols "1" and "7" are displayed on the second reach line LN2 by the decorative symbol XB. It should be noted that the first decorative design XA1 of the decorative design XA and the fourth decorative design XB1 of the decorative design XB always stop at the decorative design having the same identifier, and the second decorative design XA2 of the decorative design XA and the decorative design The fifth decorative symbol XB2 of XB is configured to stop at a decorative symbol having the same identifier.

[Decorative pattern special effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special effect B. FIG. The decorative pattern special production B is a production performed during one variation of the special pattern. In the decorative symbol special effect B, as shown in FIG. 58(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the first decorative design group display area XAA, the second decorative design group display area XBB, the reserved icon XC1, the reserved icon XC2, the reserved icon XD1, the reserved icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed.

The first decorative pattern group display area XAA includes three frames arranged horizontally continuously, and the decorative pattern XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative design XA is composed of a first decorative design XA1, a second decorative design XA2, and a third decorative design XA3. In the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the first decorative pattern XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative pattern XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative pattern XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. Each of the first decorative design XA1, the second decorative design XA2, and the third decorative design XA3 includes a number as an identifier capable of identifying whether a big win or a loss is made.

The second decorative pattern group display area XBB includes three frames arranged horizontally continuously, and a decorative pattern XB is displayed in each frame. The decorative design XB is composed of a fourth decorative design XB1, a fifth decorative design XB2, and a sixth decorative design XB3. In the second decorative design group display area XBB, the fourth decorative design XB1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the fifth decorative design XB2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the sixth decorative design XB3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. Each of the fourth decorative design XB1, the fifth decorative design XB2, and the sixth decorative design XB3 includes a number as an identifier capable of identifying whether the jackpot is won or not.

The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are vertically displayed immediately to the right of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. be. The suspended icon XC1 corresponds to the suspended icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The reserved icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are vertically displayed immediately to the left of the second decorative design group display area XBB, that is, displayed in association with the second decorative design group display area XBB. The suspended icon XD1 corresponds to the suspended icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the pending icon XC1 and the pending icon XD1 represent the same pending number. For example, when the number of pending icons XC1 is two, the number of pending icons XD1 is also two. The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in circles, and the pending icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in rhombuses.
In the example of FIG. 58, four pending icons XC1 and four pending icons XD1 are displayed, indicating that the number of pending orders is four.

A first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative design group display area XAA, and a second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative design group display area XBB. A jackpot pattern or a losing pattern is formed on each of these reach lines.

In the decorative design variation effect, the decorative design XA in the first decorative design group display area XAA and the decorative design XB in the second decorative design group display area XBB are both being varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(B), decorative symbol stop effect 1 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 1, the first decorative design XA1 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58(B), the first decorative symbol XA1 whose identifier is "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative design XA2, the third decorative design XA3, the fourth decorative design XB1, and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(C), decorative symbol stop effect 2 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 2, the second decorative design XA2 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58(C), the second decorative symbol XA2 whose identifier is "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative design XA3, the fourth decorative design XB1, and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(D), a decorative symbol stop effect 3 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 3, the third decorative design XA3 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58(D), the third decorative symbol XA3 whose identifier is "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative design XB1 and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating. At this time, the missing symbols "1", "7" and "5" are displayed on the first reach line LN1 by the decorative symbols XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(E), decorative symbol stop effect 4 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 4, the fourth decorative design XB1, the fifth decorative design XB2 and the sixth decorative design XB3 of the decorative design XB are stopped and displayed at the same time. In the example of FIG. 58(E), the fourth decorative symbol XB1 whose identifier is "1", the fifth decorative symbol XB2 whose identifier is "7", and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 whose identifier is "5" are stopped and displayed. It is At this time, the missing symbols "1", "7" and "5" are displayed on the second reach line LN2 by the decorative symbols XB. The first decorative design XA1 of the decorative design XA and the fourth decorative design XB1 of the decorative design XB always stop at the decorative design having the same identifier, and the second decorative design XA2 of the decorative design XA and the decorative design The fifth decorative design XB2 of XB stops at a decorative design having the same identifier, and the third decorative design XA3 of decorative design XA and the sixth decorative design XB3 of decorative design XB are decorative designs having the same identifier. It is configured to stop. That is, the identifier stop mode is the same between the decorative symbols XA and the decorative symbols XB.

[Decorative pattern special effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special effect C. FIG. The decorative symbol special effect C is an effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol special effect C, as shown in FIG. 59(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the first decorative design group display area XAA, the second decorative design group display area XBB, the reserved icon XC1, the reserved icon XC2, the reserved icon XD1, the reserved icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed.

The first decorative pattern group display area XAA includes three frames arranged horizontally continuously, and a decorative pattern XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative design XA is composed of a first decorative design XA1, a second decorative design XA2, and a third decorative design XA3. In the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the first decorative pattern XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative pattern XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative pattern XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The first decorative design XA1, the second decorative design XA2, and the third decorative design XA3 each include a number as an identifier capable of identifying a big win or a loss.

The second decorative pattern group display area XBB includes three frames arranged vertically continuously, and a decorative pattern XB is displayed in each frame. The decorative design XB is composed of a fourth decorative design XB1, a fifth decorative design XB2, and a sixth decorative design XB3. In the second decorative design group display area XBB, the fourth decorative design XB1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the fifth decorative design XB2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the sixth decorative design XB3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. Each of the fourth decorative design XB1, the fifth decorative design XB2, and the sixth decorative design XB3 includes a number as an identifier capable of identifying whether the jackpot is won or not.

The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are vertically displayed immediately to the right of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. be. The suspended icon XC1 corresponds to the suspended icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The reserved icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are horizontally displayed immediately below the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, that is, displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The suspended icon XD1 corresponds to the suspended icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the pending icon XC1 and the pending icon XD1 represent the same pending number. For example, when the number of pending icons XC1 is two, the number of pending icons XD1 is also two. The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in circles, and the pending icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in rhombuses.
In the example of FIG. 59, four pending icons XC1 and four pending icons XD1 are displayed, indicating that the number of pending orders is four.

A first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative design group display area XAA, and a second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative design group display area XBB. A jackpot pattern or a losing pattern is formed on each of these reach lines.

In the decorative design variation effect, the decorative design XA in the first decorative design group display area XAA and the decorative design XB in the second decorative design group display area XBB are both being varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), a decorative symbol stop effect 1 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 1, the first decorative design XA1 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59(B), the first decorative symbol XA1 whose identifier is "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative design XA2, the third decorative design XA3, the fourth decorative design XB1, and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), decorative symbol stop effect 2 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 2, the second decorative design XA2 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59(C), the second decorative symbol XA2 whose identifier is "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative design XA3, the fourth decorative design XB1, and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(D), a decorative pattern stop effect 3 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 3, the third decorative design XA3 of the decorative design XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59(D), the third decorative symbol XA3 whose identifier is "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative design XB1 and the fifth decorative design XB2 are fluctuating. At this time, the missing symbols "1", "7", and "5" are displayed on the first reach line LN1 by the decorative symbols XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), decorative symbol stop effect 4 is performed. In the decorative design stop effect 4, the fourth decorative design XB1, the fifth decorative design XB2 and the sixth decorative design XB3 of the decorative design XB are stopped and displayed at the same time. In the example of FIG. 59(E), the fourth decorative design XB1 with the identifier "1", the fifth decorative design XB2 with the identifier "7", and the sixth decorative design XB3 with the identifier "5" are stopped and displayed. It is At this time, the missing symbols "1", "7" and "5" are displayed on the second reach line LN2 by the decorative symbols XB. It should be noted that the first decorative design XA1 of the decorative design XA and the fourth decorative design XB1 of the decorative design XB always stop at the decorative design having the same identifier, and the second decorative design XA2 of the decorative design XA and the decorative design The fifth decorative design XB2 of XB stops at a decorative design having the same identifier, and the third decorative design XA3 of decorative design XA and the sixth decorative design XB3 of decorative design XB are decorative designs having the same identifier. It is configured to stop. That is, the identifier stop mode is the same between the decorative symbols XA and the decorative symbols XB.

[Modification]
In the decorative symbol special effect, the pending icon XC1 and the pending icon XD1 are in a corresponding relationship, and the number of pending icons indicates the number of pending icons. The icon XD1 may represent the number of pending icons in a manner other than the number of pending icons (for example, a number).

In the decorative symbol special effect, the pending icon XC1 is circular, and the pending icon XD1 is diamond-shaped. For example, the pending icon XD1 may be circular. The pending icon XC1 and the pending icon XD1 may be different in shape, color, and the like.

In the decorative symbol special effects 1 to 3, the decorative symbols XA (the first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3) are stopped and displayed with a time lag. However, it is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols of the decorative symbols XA may be stopped and displayed at the same time. After the decorative symbols of the decorative symbols XA are stopped simultaneously, the decorative symbols of the decorative symbols XB are stopped simultaneously. In this way, the stop effect in which the decorative symbols of the decorative symbols XA are simultaneously stopped and then the decorative symbols of the decorative symbols XB are simultaneously stopped is also called a decorative symbol special simultaneous stop effect.
In a predetermined situation, the decorative symbol special effect is performed to perform the decorative symbol stop display effect, and in a situation different from the predetermined condition, the decorative symbol special simultaneous stop effect may be performed. For example, when the game state is the normal game state, the decorative pattern special effect is performed to perform the decorative pattern stop display effect, and when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state, the decorative pattern special effect is performed. A simultaneous stop performance may be performed.

[Effect example]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effect, the decorative symbol stop effect 3 indicating whether or not a big win is made is performed by stopping the decorative symbol XA including the decorative symbols XA1, XA2, and XA3. By stopping the decorative patterns XB including the patterns XB1 and XB2, a decorative pattern stop performance 4 indicating whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when the decorative pattern XA in the decorative pattern stop performance 3 indicates a big win, the decorative pattern stop performance 4 is performed. The decorative pattern XB also represents a big win, and when the decorative pattern XA represents a loss, the decorative pattern XB is also configured to represent a loss. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the result of the lottery as to whether or not it is a big hit by using the two decorative patterns XA and XB, and further, the decorative patterns XA and XB are Since the same lottery result is notified respectively, the lottery result can be emphasized to the player without confusing the player, and the game can be played more efficiently than when the lottery result is displayed only by the decorative pattern XA (or the decorative pattern XB). It is possible to amplify a person's interest in the lottery result. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effect, the decorative symbol XA has the first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol stop effect 3. When XA stops, the first decorative symbol XA1 stops, then the second decorative symbol XA2 stops, and then the third decorative symbol XA3 stops. According to this configuration, by using the decorative symbols XA, it is possible to gradually disclose to the player the result of the lottery as to whether or not the game is a big win, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the result of the lottery. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effect A, the decorative symbol XB has the fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the decorative symbol XB is stopped in the decorative symbol stop effect 4. , the fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are simultaneously stopped. According to this configuration, in the decorative pattern XB, unlike the decorative pattern XA, the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are stopped at the same time. It can be culminated by the simultaneous stop of the decorative symbol XB. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effects B and C, the decorative symbol XB has the sixth decorative symbol XB3 in addition to the fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2. When the decorative design XB is stopped in the stop effect 4, the fourth decorative design XB1, the fifth decorative design XB2 and the sixth decorative design XB3 are simultaneously stopped. According to this configuration, it is possible to heighten the peak of anticipation due to the simultaneous stop of the decorative symbols XB, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effects B and C, the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols XA and XB each have an identifier (for example, a number), the decorative symbols XA and the decorative symbols. In XB, a combination of identifiers of a plurality of decorative patterns can suggest a big hit or a loss, and the first decorative pattern XA1 in the decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 in the decorative pattern XB are the same. The second decorative design XA2 in the decorative design XA and the fifth decorative design XB2 in the decorative design XB are constructed by the same identifier, the third decorative design XA3 in the decorative design XA and the sixth decorative design in the decorative design XB. It is configured with the same identifier as XB3. According to this configuration, since the decorative patterns XA and XB correspond to the same identifier, the decorative patterns XA and XB can represent the same jackpot mode or losing mode, and the decorative patterns XA1. and the decorative symbols XB are stopped at different timings, it is possible to provide the amusement of announcing the same big winning mode or losing mode with a time difference. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect indicating whether or not a big win is achieved by stopping a first symbol including a plurality of decorative symbols,
The second display effect is a display effect indicating whether or not a big win is achieved by stopping the second pattern, which is a second pattern different from the first pattern and includes a plurality of decorative patterns,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed, and when the first symbol in the first display effect indicates a big win, the second display effect is performed. The second symbol in the display effect also represents a big hit, and when the first symbol represents a loss, the second symbol also represents a loss.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
The first pattern has the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern,
In the combination effect, when the first pattern is stopped in the first display effect, the first decorative pattern is stopped, then the second decorative pattern is stopped, and then the second decorative pattern is stopped. 3 decorative patterns stop,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
The second pattern has a fourth decorative pattern and a fifth decorative pattern,
In the combination effect, when the second pattern stops in the second display effect, the fourth decorative pattern and the fifth decorative pattern stop simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
The second pattern further has a sixth decorative pattern,
In the combination effect, when the second pattern stops in the second display effect, the fourth decorative pattern, the fifth decorative pattern and the sixth decorative pattern stop simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
Each of the decorative designs included in the first design and the second design has an identifier,
In the first pattern and the second pattern, a combination of identifiers of a plurality of decorative patterns can suggest a big hit or a loss,
The first decorative pattern in the first pattern and the fourth decorative pattern in the second pattern are configured with the same identifier, and the second decorative pattern in the first pattern and the second decorative pattern in the second pattern The fifth decorative design in the design of is composed of the same identifier, and the third decorative design of the first design and the sixth decorative design of the second design are composed of the same identifier,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern alignment effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative pattern alignment effect is executed during special pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern alignment effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern alignment effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern alignment effect A. FIG. The decorative pattern alignment performance A is a performance performed during one variation of the special symbols. In the decorative pattern alignment effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varied. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big win or not. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R each having the same identifier (number) are stop-displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also called double eyes symbol. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet pattern, it becomes a lost pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), left and right decorative pattern arrangement effects are performed. In this left and right decorative pattern arrangement effect, a plurality of decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are arranged in the area on the left from the center of the screen on the display screen 7a, and a plurality of decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the area on the right from the center of the screen. be. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged such that five decorative patterns from number "4" to number "8" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter also referred to as first order). In addition, the decorative patterns 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are aligned slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) from the front side and overlapped. The decorative patterns 8R are arranged such that five decorative patterns from number "1" to number "5" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter also referred to as second order). The decorative patterns 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are aligned from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlapped. The first order and the second order are permutations, but the starting identifiers (numbers) are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), a decorative pattern selection effect 1 is performed. In this decorative design selection effect 1, the teammate character CRA appears between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R, and the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA displays the middle number "6" of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L and the middle number "6" of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R. 3" and the decorative pattern. The selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are rectangular frames, and their positions are manipulated by the ally character CRA. The ally character CRA randomly performs the action of arranging the selection frame XB1 so that one of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L is accommodated in the frame for the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L. Also, the ally character CRA randomly arranges the selection frame XB2 so that one of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R fits within the frame. Do. As a result, the ally character CRA randomly selects one of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L using the selection frame XB1, and decorates one of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R. It expresses a state in which the pattern is randomly selected using the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), decorative pattern selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, the ally character CRA stops for a predetermined time while selecting the same decorative symbol "4" in the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative pattern of the number "4" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative pattern of the number "4" selected in the selection frame XB2 form the ready-to-win state, and the button image BTNX and the allies A character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used as a chance-up, and displays the characters "Super Hot". The ally character CRA performs various movements to liven up the presentation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a big hit notification effect is performed. In this big hit notification performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are used to create double eyes to form a big win pattern.

[Decorative pattern alignment effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol alignment effect B. FIG. The decorative pattern alignment performance B is a performance performed during one variation of the special symbols. In the decorative pattern alignment effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varied. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big win or not. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R each having the same identifier (number) are stop-displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also called double eyes symbol. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet pattern, it becomes a lost pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), left and right decorative pattern arrangement effects are performed. In this left and right decorative pattern arrangement effect, a plurality of decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are arranged in the area on the left from the center of the screen on the display screen 7a, and a plurality of decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the area on the right from the center of the screen. be. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged such that five decorative patterns from number "4" to number "8" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter also referred to as first order). In addition, the decorative patterns 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are aligned slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) from the front side and overlapped. The decorative patterns 8R are arranged such that five decorative patterns from number "4" to number "8" are arranged in descending order of numbers (hereinafter, also referred to as third order). The decorative patterns 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are aligned from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlapped. The first order is the permutation and the third order is the inverse. The first order and the third order have different starting identifiers (numbers).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), a decorative pattern selection effect 1 is performed. In this decorative design selection effect 1, the teammate character CRA appears between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R, and the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, the ally character CRA is between the decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a, and the frontmost decorative symbol of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L, the number "4", It appears between the decoration pattern of the number "8" in front of the five decoration patterns of the decoration pattern 8R, and then moves to the depth side (from the bottom to the top on the display screen 7a). The ally character CRA is decorated with the frontmost number "4" of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L and the frontmost number "8" of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R. , the selection frame XB1 selects the frontmost number "4" of the decorative pattern 8L, and the selection frame XB2 selects the frontmost number "8" of the decorative pattern 8R. Select the decorative pattern of As the ally character CRA moves to the depth side (from the bottom to the top on the display screen 7a), the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 select the decoration pattern at the position corresponding to the ally character CRA. In the example of FIG. 61(C), the ally character CRA is positioned between the decorative pattern of the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern of the number "7" in the decorative pattern 8R, so the selection frame is XB1 represents a state in which the decorative design of number "5" in the decorative design 8L is selected, and the selection frame XB2 represents the state in which the decorative design of number "7" in the decorative design 8R is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), decorative pattern selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, the ally character CRA moves and stops for a predetermined time while selecting the same decorative symbol "6" by the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative pattern of the number "6" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative pattern of the number "6" selected in the selection frame XB2 form the ready-to-win state, and the button image BTNX and the allies A character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used as a chance-up, and displays the characters "Super Hot". The ally character CRA performs various movements to liven up the presentation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(F), a big hit notification effect is performed. In this big hit notification performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are used to create double eyes to form a big win pattern.

[Decorative pattern alignment effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol alignment effect C. FIG. The decorative pattern alignment performance C is a performance performed during one variation of the special symbols. In the decorative symbol alignment effect C, as shown in FIG. 62(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varied. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big win or not. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R each having the same identifier (number) are stop-displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also called double eyes symbol. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet pattern, it becomes a lost pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), left and right decorative pattern arrangement effects are performed. In this left and right decorative pattern arrangement effect, a plurality of decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are arranged in the area on the left from the center of the screen on the display screen 7a, and a plurality of decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the area on the right from the center of the screen. be. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged so that the five decorative patterns of numbers "4", "5", "5", "5", and "8" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter also referred to as fourth order). In addition, the decorative patterns 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are aligned slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) from the front side and overlapped. The decorative patterns 8R are arranged so that the five decorative patterns of numbers "4", "5", "5", "5", and "8" are arranged in order of the largest numbers (hereinafter also referred to as fifth order). The decorative patterns 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are aligned from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlapped. In this way, the arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R includes sections in which the same numbers are continuously arranged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), a decorative symbol selection effect 1 is performed. In this decorative design selection effect 1, the teammate character CRA appears between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R, and the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, the ally character CRA is between the decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a, and the frontmost decorative symbol of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L, the number "4", It appears between the decoration pattern of the number "8" in front of the five decoration patterns of the decoration pattern 8R, and then moves to the depth side (from the bottom to the top on the display screen 7a). The ally character CRA is decorated with the frontmost number "4" of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L and the frontmost number "8" of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R. , the selection frame XB1 selects the frontmost number "4" of the decorative pattern 8L, and the selection frame XB2 selects the frontmost number "8" of the decorative pattern 8R. Select the decorative pattern of Then, as the ally character CRA moves to the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a), the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 select the decoration pattern at the position corresponding to the ally character CRA. In the example of FIG. 62(C), since the ally character CRA is positioned between the decorative pattern of the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern of the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8R, the selection frame is displayed. XB1 represents a state in which the decorative design of number "5" in the decorative design 8L is selected, and the selection frame XB2 represents the state in which the decorative design of number "5" in the decorative design 8R is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), decorative pattern selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, the ally character CRA moves and stops for a predetermined time while selecting the same decorative symbol "5" by the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative pattern of the number "5" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative pattern of the number "5" selected in the selection frame XB2 form the ready-to-win state, and the button image BTNX and the allies A character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used as a chance-up, and displays the characters "Super Hot". The ally character CRA performs various movements to liven up the presentation. Thus, in the decorative pattern selection effect of the decorative pattern alignment effect C, the decorative patterns selected in the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are more likely to have the same number than in the decorative pattern selection effect of the decorative pattern alignment effect B. , the reach state is likely to occur. This functions as a chance increase, and the decorative pattern alignment effect C has a higher expectation for a big hit than the decorative pattern alignment effect B. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a big hit notification effect is performed. In this big hit notification performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are used to create double eyes to form a big win pattern.

[Modification]
In the above-described decorative symbol alignment effects B and C, the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are moved along with the movement of the ally character CRA, and the selected decorative symbol is changed. Instead of the CRA, the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 may also move along with the movement of the predetermined object or the predetermined image, and the decoration pattern to be selected may be changed.
Also, in the decorative pattern alignment effects B and C, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, but is not limited to this, and moves so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. may be moved behind the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, or may be moved beside the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In this case as well, the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 move with the movement of the ally character CRA.

In the above-mentioned decorative design alignment effect, the arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in the left and right decorative design arrangement effect may be arranged in random numbers. Further, in the right and left decorative design arrangement effect, the number of each decorative design of the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R may be six or more instead of five. Further, in the right and left decorative pattern arrangement performance, when the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are all decorative patterns with the same number, the performance may be premium performance, that is, the big win fixed performance that always makes a big hit.

In the decorative pattern alignment effects B and C, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stops in the decorative pattern 8L is displayed by the selection frame XB1. In the selected decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stops is selected by the selection frame XB2, and when the selected decorative patterns have the same number, the reach state is set. Not limited to this, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and in the decorative symbols 8L, a decorative symbol at a position different from the position where the ally character CRA stops is selected by the selection frame XB1, In the decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stops may be selected by the selection frame XB2, and the ready-to-win state may be set when the selected decorative patterns have the same number.

[Effect example]
In the above game machine 1, in the decorative pattern alignment effect, a left and right decorative pattern arrangement effect is performed in which a decorative pattern 8L having a plurality of decorative patterns and a decorative pattern 8R having a plurality of decorative patterns are arranged, and then the decorative pattern 8L. Decorative pattern selection performances 1 and 2 for simultaneously selecting a predetermined decorative pattern from among the decorative patterns and a predetermined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern 8R are performed. According to this constitution, the two decorative pattern groups are arranged in a visible state, and predetermined decorative patterns are simultaneously selected from them, so that the process of reaching the ready-to-win state can be visually appealing to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1, in the decorative pattern alignment effect, in the decorative pattern selection effects 1 and 2, when the decorative pattern selected from the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern selected from the decorative pattern 8R are the same (in other words, the same identifier), it is in a reach state. According to this configuration, the ready-to-win state can be visually appealing to the player, and the expectation for the big win from the ready-to-win effect can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above game machine 1, in the decorative pattern alignment effect A, the decorative patterns 8L in the decorative pattern selection effects 1 and 2 are arranged in order from the decorative pattern with the identifier "4" to the decorative pattern with the identifier "8". The decorative patterns 8R are arranged in the second order in which the decorative patterns with identifiers from "1" to "5" are arranged in order. According to this configuration, predetermined decorative patterns are simultaneously selected from two groups of decorative patterns having different orders of decorative patterns, so that the process of reaching the ready-to-win state can be more visually appealing to the player. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above game machine 1, in the decorative pattern alignment effect B, the decorative patterns 8L in the decorative pattern selection effects 1 and 2 are arranged in order from the decorative pattern with the identifier "4" to the decorative pattern with the identifier "8". The decorative designs 8R are arranged in the third order in which the decorative designs from the decorative design with the identifier "8" to the decorative design with the identifier "4" are arranged in order. According to this configuration, predetermined decorative patterns are simultaneously selected from two groups of decorative patterns in which the order of the decorative patterns is reversed, so that the process of reaching the ready-to-win state is more visually appealing to the player. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above game machine 1, in the decorative pattern alignment effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are arranged from the front side to the depth direction of the display screen 7a in the left and right decorative pattern arrangement effects. According to this configuration, the two decorative pattern groups (decorative pattern 8L, decorative pattern 8R) can be three-dimensionally expressed, and the decorative pattern alignment effect can be acrobatic. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect in which a first decorative pattern group having a plurality of decorative patterns and a second decorative pattern group having a plurality of decorative patterns are arranged,
The second display effect is a display effect for simultaneously selecting a decorative pattern in the first decorative pattern group and a decorative pattern in the second decorative pattern group,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
In the second display effect, when the decorative pattern selected from the first decorative pattern group and the decorative pattern selected from the second decorative pattern group are the same, a ready-to-win state is entered.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
In the first display effect, the decorative designs of the first decorative design group are arranged in the first order, and the decorative designs of the second decorative design group are arranged in the first order. arranged and arranged in a different second order,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
In the first display effect, the decorative designs of the first decorative design group are arranged in the first order, and the decorative designs of the second decorative design group are arranged in the first order. are arranged in said second order which is in reverse order,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the first display effect, the first decorative pattern group and the second decorative pattern group are respectively arranged from the front direction to the depth direction of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Temporary stop symbol movement effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. FIG. This temporary stop symbol movement effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the temporary stop symbol movement effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Note that the temporary stop symbol movement effect C will be described assuming that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Although the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be displayed after the start of the variation, they are displayed (variably displayed) by moving in a specific direction at least when the variation is started and when the variation is stopped. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, in particular, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R move in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the variation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are shown to be moved to the lower right direction. Also, here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern, which are new patterns different from the temporarily stopped "1" pattern of the left effect pattern 8L and the "2" pattern of the right effect pattern 8R, are framed on the display device 7a. are in. The "5" and "6" symbols that have entered the frame are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z in the same manner as the "1" and "2" symbols.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(D) to (F), a frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect patterns 8L and 8R and the effect patterns that have entered the frame are moved and displayed to be out of the frame.

In FIG. 63(D), part of the "1" symbol and "2" symbol, which are the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R, are shown moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and out of the frame. . At this time, the new symbols "5" and "6" are also moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed.

In FIG. 63(E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. As a result, a part of the "6" pattern is out of the frame. Further, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbols "4" and "9" are framed in and similarly moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Is displayed.

In FIG. 63(F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are completely out of the frame, and the new symbols "4" and "9" are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. It is Here, a state is shown in which part of the "9" pattern is out of the frame. After that, the "9" symbol is followed by the "4" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to temporarily stop the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R in the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which left and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. Note that the direction of change in this case is the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Although the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be displayed after the start of the variation, they are displayed (variably displayed) by moving in a specific direction at least when the variation is started and when the variation is stopped. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, in particular, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R move in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is the "1" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is the "NEXT" symbol. The "NEXT" symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol that announces the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the variation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "NEXT" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are shown to be moved to the lower right direction. Also, here, the "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "NEXT" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped, are different from the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol which are new symbols displayed on the display device 7a. are in. The "5" and "6" symbols that have entered the frame are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z in the same manner as the "1" and "NEXT" symbols.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64(D) to (F), a frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect patterns 8L and 8R and the effect patterns that have entered the frame are moved and displayed to be out of the frame.

FIG. 64(D) shows a state in which part of the "1" symbol and "NEXT" symbol, which are the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R, are moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed out of the frame. . At this time, the new symbols "5" and "6" are also moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed.

In FIG. 64(E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. As a result, a part of the "6" pattern is out of the frame. Further, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbol "NEXT" large symbol is framed in and similarly moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. This "NEXT" large symbol is a horizontally elongated symbol composed of an image different from the temporarily stopped "NEXT" symbol. The "NEXT" large symbol is also a pseudo-continuous symbol that announces the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

In FIG. 64(F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are out of the frame, and the new symbol "NEXT" large symbol is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. Here, a state in which a part of the "NEXT" large pattern is out of the frame is shown. After this, the "NEXT" large pattern is completely out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the temporarily stopped effect pattern starts to fluctuate again, and is an effect included in the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Although the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be displayed after the start of the variation, they are displayed (variably displayed) by moving in a specific direction at least when the variation is started and when the variation is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 64(G), the re-variation effect is executed, but after the frame-out effect, the effect is continued assuming that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have already changed again. Such a pseudo-continuous performance is also possible. In this case, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the reach formation effect may be executed following the frame-out effect without executing the re-variation effect.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect C. FIG. Here, it is assumed that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.
First, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, on the display screen 7a, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move in a specific direction indicated by an arrow Y. Although the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be displayed after the start of the variation, they are displayed (variably displayed) by moving in a specific direction at least when the variation is started and when the variation is stopped. On the display screen 7b, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, in particular, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R move in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C that were displayed on the display screen 7b at the start of the variation are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are moved to the lower right direction, part of the "1" symbol is out of the frame, and the "2" symbol is It is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the "2" pattern is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in another display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, part of the "2" pattern is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. Also, here, the "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R which are temporarily stopped are framed in with "5" symbol and "6" symbol which are new symbols. . The "5" and "6" symbols that have entered the frame are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z in the same manner as the "1" and "2" symbols.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65(D) to 65(F), a frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect patterns 8L, 8R and the effect patterns that have entered the frame are moved and displayed to be out of the frame.

In FIG. 65(D), the "1" symbol, which is the temporarily stopped effect symbol 8L, is displayed out of the frame, the "2" symbol is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, and part of the "2" symbol is out of the frame. ing. At this time, the new symbols "5" and "6" are also moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed.

In FIG. 65(E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. As a result, part of the "5" pattern and part of the "6" pattern are out of the frame. In particular, part of the "6" pattern is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, part of the "6" pattern is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. In addition, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbols "4" and "9" are framed in and similarly moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Is displayed.

In FIG. 65(F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are completely out of the frame, and the new symbols "4" and "9" are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. It is Here, part of the "4" symbols and part of the "9" symbols are out of the frame. In particular, part of the "9" pattern is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, part of the "9" pattern is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. After this, the "4" and "9" symbols are completely out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to temporarily stop the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R in the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which left and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. Note that the direction of change in this case is the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the temporary stop symbol movement effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the performance symbols 8L, 8R out of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped, the direction of the variation of the performance symbols 8L, 8R (the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y) is different. Moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z (FIGS. 63(C)(D)(E)(F), FIGS. 64(C)(D)(E)(F), FIGS. 65(C)(D) ( E) (F)). According to this configuration, the temporarily stopped performance symbols 8L and 8R move in a direction different from the changing direction (specific direction), so that the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, fluctuation start effect (Fig. 63 (A), Fig. 64 (A), Fig. 65 (A)), pattern temporary stop effect (Fig. 63 (B), Fig. 64 (B), Fig. 65 (B)), reach Formation effect (Fig. 63 (G), Fig. 65 (G)) and re-variation effect (Fig. 64 (G)) correspond to "symbol change effect", and symbol movement effect (Fig. 63 (C), Fig. 64 ( C), FIG. 65(C)), frame-out effects (FIGS. 63(D)-(F), FIGS. 64(D)-(F), FIGS. 65(D)-(F)) are "symbol movement display effects. Equivalent to

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, new symbols ("5" symbol, "6" symbol, "4" symbol, "9" symbol, "NEXT" large symbol) other than the temporary stop symbols 8L and 8R are displayed. pattern) is framed in the display screen 7a (Figs. 63(C)(E), Figs. 64(C)(E), Figs. 65(C)(E)). According to this configuration, since a new symbol different from the temporary stop symbol comes in the frame, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the new symbols (“5” symbol, “6” symbol, “4” symbol, “9” symbol, and “NEXT” large symbol) are framed in the display screen 7a, they are temporarily stopped. It is moved and displayed in the same direction as the pattern (the direction indicated by the arrow Z) (FIGS. 63(C)-(F), FIGS. 64(C)-(F), and FIGS. 65(C)-(F)). According to this configuration, the new symbols that have entered the frame are also moved and displayed in the same direction as the temporarily stopped symbols.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance symbols 8L and 8R, which are temporary stop symbols, and the new symbols (“5” symbol, “6” symbol, “4” symbol, “9” symbol, “NEXT” large symbol) ) is moved and displayed, and then framed out of the display screen 7a (7b) (FIGS. 64(D)-(F), FIGS. 64(D)-(F), FIGS. 65(D)-(F)). . According to this configuration, the temporarily stopped symbols and the new symbols disappear out of the screen after the movement display.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, part of the temporarily stopped symbols "2", part of the new symbols "6", and part of the "9" symbols are framed out from the display screen 7a. , is framed in the display screen 7b (FIGS. 65(C), (E), and (F)). According to this configuration, the moving effect of the symbols becomes more powerful by the effect of straddling the display screens 7a and 7b, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, part of the "2" symbols framed in the display screen 7b, part of the new "6" symbols, and part of the "9" symbols are also displayed on the display screen 7b. It is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. According to this configuration, the effect of moving the symbols across the display screens 7a and 7b becomes more powerful, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol, which foretells the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, is temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect symbol 8R (FIGS. 64(B) to (D)). Also, as a new symbol, a large "NEXT" symbol that foretells execution of a pseudo continuous effect is moved and displayed (FIGS. 64(E) and (F)). According to this configuration, for example, the notice of the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect becomes powerful, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the "NEXT" symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) as the temporary stop symbol is moved and displayed and out of the frame (FIGS. 64(B) to (D)), the "NEXT" symbol as the new symbol is displayed. A large pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern) is moved and displayed, enters and exits the frame (FIGS. 64(E) and (F)). According to this configuration, after the "NEXT" symbol is out of the frame, the "NEXT" large symbol is framed in, so that the notice of the pseudo-continuous effect becomes conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the temporary stop symbol movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol and the "NEXT" large symbol are used as symbols to announce the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, but for example, the "NEXT" large symbol is used as the symbol to notify that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. can be considered. Specifically, instead of executing the re-variation effect of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (the effect that the temporarily stopped effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to fluctuate again), the "NEXT" large pattern is framed and framed. It is a condition to make it out.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the configuration provided with the display screens 7a and 7b was mentioned, but the configuration may be provided with three or more display screens. In this case, by arranging the three display screens on a straight line and moving the temporary stop pattern and the new pattern in the direction in which the display screens are arranged, the moving display of the temporary stop pattern and the new pattern becomes powerful. , can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b. By using the sub-display screen 64, the moving display of the temporarily stopped symbols and the new symbols becomes more powerful, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and are moved and displayed in a direction (direction indicated by arrow Z) different from the changing direction (direction indicated by arrow Y). rice field. In this respect, the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed to move is not particularly limited. For example, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C may be temporarily stopped and displayed to move, or the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped and displayed to move. Alternatively, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed temporarily and moved.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the direction in which the temporarily stopped symbols and the new symbols are moved and displayed is the lower right direction (the direction indicated by the arrow Z) of the display screen 7a (7b). On the other hand, the direction of moving display is not particularly limited. For example, if the direction of change is the vertical direction, the display may be made to move in the horizontal direction.

[Modification 6]
In the above-described embodiment, the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are moved and displayed in the same direction (the direction indicated by the arrow Z). On the other hand, the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol may be moved and displayed in different directions.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the temporarily stopped symbols and the new symbols are moved and displayed at the same speed. Alternatively, the temporarily stopped symbols and the new symbols may be moved and displayed at different speeds.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
Equipped with a display screen for displaying images,
A gaming machine capable of executing a symbol variation effect in which a plurality of symbol rows are varied in a specific direction on the display screen,
After the symbols in a predetermined row out of the plurality of symbol rows are temporarily stopped, a symbol movement display effect is executed in which the temporarily stopped symbols, which are the symbols in the temporarily stopped predetermined row, are moved and displayed in a direction different from the specific direction. is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the symbol movement display effect, a new symbol different from the temporary stop symbol is framed in the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the symbol movement display effect, after the new symbol is framed in the display screen, the new symbol is moved and displayed in the same direction as the temporarily stopped symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2 or aspect A5-3,
The temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are framed out from the display screen after being moved and displayed on the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
The temporary stop pattern and the new pattern are framed out from the display screen and then framed in a separate display screen different from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-5,
The temporary stop pattern and the new pattern are moved and displayed on the separate display screen after being framed in the separate display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
At least one of the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol includes a pseudo-continuous symbol related to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-7,
After the pseudo consecutive symbols as the temporarily stopped symbols frame out of the display screen, the pseudo consecutive symbols as the new symbols frame in the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable display effects A to C through the transparent area will be described below with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66 to 68, the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawings. In addition, when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are activated, the variation effect ( After the variable display) is completed (that is, after a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed), it suggests to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is high, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 are suggested to the player. When the accessory 15 is activated while a plurality of decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern and the temporary stop display is being performed, a plurality of hits are present compared to when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated. It suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that the player will be awarded a profit among the above types. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 .

The variable display effect through the transparent area is performed by the image display device 7 after starting the variable effect (variable display) of the plurality of decorative patterns and before ending (stop display) (that is, during the variable effect of the decorative patterns). The display screen 7a is darkened, and a part of at least one decorative pattern or a part of each of at least two decorative patterns among a plurality of decorative patterns are made visible together with a background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. It is possible to execute a variable display effect. In other words, the area other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape is darkened, and only through this transparent area, at least a part of the decorative pattern (a part of one decorative pattern or two decorative patterns) being variably displayed together with the background image It is possible to execute a variable display effect that makes each part of the pattern visible. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a variable display effect through the transparent area, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Also, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the variable display effect through the transparent area is included, the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 The position and light emission mode of are changed. The variable display effect through the transparent area is not performed as one effect of the so-called look-ahead effect, but whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect through the transparent area during the effect. is determined by lottery.

Various background images for the variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols include, for example, background images such as city images, forest images, sea images, seabed images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or moving images. In this case, the background image is an underground image of a moving image.

Here, the variable display effect A through the transparent area will be described first, the variable display effect B through the transparent area, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area will be described in order.

[Variation display effect A through the transparent area]
First, the variable display effect A through the transparent area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the variable display effect A through the transparent area. In the variable display effect A through the transparent area, after the variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative patterns is started and before the end (stop display) (that is, during the variable effect of the decorative patterns), the image display device 7 is displayed. The display screen 7a is darkened, and at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns can be partially displayed through a transparent region having a predetermined shape to be visible together with the background image. be. In other words, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, the area other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape is darkened, and only through this transparent area is part of at least one decorative pattern being variably displayed together with the background image. It is possible to execute a variable display effect that makes visible.

The variable display effect A through the transparent area in the present embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the image "Right shot" does not change at all and can be visually recognized. It should be noted that if the image "Right-handed" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be left until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes) after the game state of Right-handed is started. or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, as the game state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, by arranging the sub-variation area so that it is on the front side, the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of the fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. In addition, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variation area (the content displayed in the sub-variation area, which is an opaque small size The display mode of the left decorative pattern, the display mode of the opaque small medium decorative pattern, the display mode of the opaque small right decorative pattern) can be visually recognized without any change. A background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area. In this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that in the sub-variation area, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque middle decorative pattern, Only the variable effect (variable display) of the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and the same size is displayed at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be varied (variable display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small middle decorative pattern is the number "2", the small right decorative pattern is the number "3", the small left decorative pattern is the number "5", and the small medium decoration is displayed. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icon and the reserved icon, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently fluctuating as digestion of the second special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 66B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the front side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not blocked by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd does not change at all and can be visually recognized. It is possible.

Here, white spherical suspension icons 9B are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical pending icons that have not been digested and are stocked. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols. In addition to the holding icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the frontmost) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it is always visible even in the variable display effect A through the transparent area. In addition, even if a transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the color of the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 ( Blue numbers), the color of the second special figure reservation number (red numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21) can be visually recognized without any change.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon will make the difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red sphere icon, a blue sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 will be briefly described. ”) is three-dimensionally formed, and has a character area 15a in which a character graphic is formed and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, there are a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multi-color light for causing the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and for causing the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. A decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light and mounted on the surface side is accommodated. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface mount type electronic components, and are soldered to the surface side of the decoration substrate. In other words, the surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED mounting surface. A dedicated LED driving IC (not shown) for gradation control of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs is mounted on the back side of the decoration substrate (the surface opposite to the front side of the decoration substrate). ), resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), and connectors (not shown) are mounted. The LED driving IC, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mount type electronic components, and are soldered to the back side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the back side of the decorative substrate is the non-mounted surface of the LEDs. The LED driving IC is controlled by the control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are lit up in gradation (lighting, blinking, gradation) to emit light, thereby generating a character area. 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and the rectangular area 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode.

The second movable accessory 15 can normally stand still at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and stands still at the retracted position (home position). From the state, it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at the advanced position (deployed position) (second mode). The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the second movable accessory 15 starts operating from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can suggest to the player that there is a high expectation of winning. In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 66(A), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is completed, the left The decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and accordingly, the variation icon 9C is displayed. It will be in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern ends. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in white. When the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko game machine, is powered on, the character area 15a of the second movable role 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role 15 is turned on. is lit in white. In other words, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit white. .

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a white lighting state. As shown in 66(B), the variable performance (variable display) of decorative symbols is started. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R change from the opaque state to the translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the variable display effect A through the transparent area is started, and in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, While changing from a brightly displayed state to a gradually darkened state, a transparent closed specific region in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C) has a planar shape and a colorless circular shape. The display mode is such that the transparent region HR, which is a transparent region, gradually appears. The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It's becoming In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode that shines clearly from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect A through the transparent area is started, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary. While the character area 15a of the role object 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 changes from a white lighting state to a blue lighting state. . At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits blue light.

In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, the same brightness as that at the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is maintained. In other words, when the variable display effect A through the transparent area is started, the background image THG1 as the background image except for the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR gradually darkens, and then the display screen 7a turns dark. .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(D), when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a becomes darkened, the background image THG1 (moving underground image) is moved to the inside of the transparent region HR. Through the area HRa, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which fluctuates at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be seen through the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR. At this time, since the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR excluding the boundary line HRc are darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being lit up, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being illuminated in blue. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the fast-changing middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from a translucent state during the predetermined period of time. A part of the middle decorative pattern 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the middle part and the upper part can be seen gradually from the lower part of the number "2", and the number The lower portion of the number "3" following the "2" is visible).

Even if the background image THG1 as the background image gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is turned black, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. It is possible to visually recognize without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and it is possible to visually recognize it without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern. There is no change to the number color (blue numbers) of the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry and the color (red number) of the number of the number of the second special figure reservation (red number) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 It can be visually recognized without causing any change, and the change in the display mode of the image "Right shot" does not occur at all and can be visually recognized. As described above, this is the first special figure suspension based on the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9B, the suspension display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. , the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" is arranged so as to be the most front side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. On the front side, a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a pending icon 9B, a pending display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of the first special pending based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second This is because the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the display screen 7a is darkened, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) elapses, the background image is changed from the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually brightened and reappears, and the transparent area HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from bright to dark. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the blue brightness at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the blue brightness gradually changes from the bright state to the dark state indistinctly. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is illuminated in a predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc. It is blue, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

From the state where the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly as the background image and reappears. When the transparent area HR to be displayed changes from a bright state to a dark state gradually, all the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), the middle Decorative pattern 8C (here, number "2" and number "3" following number "2"), right decorative pattern 8R (here, number "9" and number "1" following number "9") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before the temporary stop display on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(F), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is again brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and then, The left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in blue from the state in which it is originally lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the normal light emitting mode.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(G), when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is displayed as the background image. (Here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b is maintained in a blue lighting state. , the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. The icon 9B starts to move toward 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B is not placed at the third holding display position 9Bd and the fourth holding display position. As a result, two pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(H), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright display state to a dark display state. At the same time, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape, gradually appears as a transparent closed specific area near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L). It becomes a display mode that appears. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from the shape of the transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. 66(C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It's becoming In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode that shines clearly from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state. On the other hand, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from a white lighting state to a red lighting state. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. In other words, the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which it glows red and emits light.

In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, the same brightness as that at the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is maintained. In other words, the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image except for the area HRa inside the transparent area HR, and then the display screen 7a turns dark.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(I), when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a turns dark, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is placed inside the transparent region HR. The left decorative pattern 8L, which moves rapidly in front of the background image THG1, can be seen through the area HRa through the area HRa inside the transparent area HR. At this time, since the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR excluding the boundary line HRc are darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a red lighting state. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows red and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened in this way is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the left decorative pattern 8L, which fluctuates at high speed, decelerates from a translucent state during this predetermined period. A portion of the left decorative pattern 8L that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the lower part of the number "2", the central part, and the upper part can be seen gradually. The lower portion of the number "3" following the "2" is visible).

Even if the background image THG1 as the background image gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is turned black, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd are maintained as described above. It can be visually recognized without any change to the small decorative pattern, and can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and the first start port 20 The color of the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The color of the number of the second special figure reservation (red number) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 Also, the display mode of the image "Right shot" can be visually recognized without any change at all. As described above, this is the first special figure suspension based on the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9B, the suspension display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. , the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" is arranged so as to be the most front side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. On the front side, a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a pending icon 9B, a pending display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of the first special pending based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second This is because the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(J), the display screen 7a is turned dark, and just before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the background image is displayed as a background image from the state where the display screen 7a is turned dark. An image THG1 (in this case, an underground image of a moving image) is gradually displayed brightly and reappears, and a transparent area HR displayed near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the red brightness at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the red brightness gradually changes from the bright state to the dark state and becomes unclear. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary (first state) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in red, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 is lit in a predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc. It is red, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows red and emits light is continued.

The background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly as the background image from the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened and reappears. ) becomes a display mode in which the transparent region HR displayed in ) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number “2” and the number “3” following the number “2”) are displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9"), the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") ) has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before temporary stop display on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(K), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is again displayed brightly on the display screen 7a as the background image. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in red from the state in which it is originally lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the normal light emitting mode. As a result, the variable display effect A through the transparent area performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K) is completed.

After completion of the variable display effect A through the transparent area, as shown in FIG. 66(L), the user moves to the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd. When the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 starts to move toward it, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state in a state in which the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a. While the rectangular area 15b is maintained in a white lighting state, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is started. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. It starts to move toward 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B is not placed at the second holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position. As a result, one pending icon is stocked.

A variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns is started, and thereafter, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is lost, and the decorative pattern is displayed. When the pattern variation effect (variation display) is completed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern. After the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is finished, the big win game (big win effect) is started.

Thus, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), and in FIGS. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), a transparent area HR which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape appears as a transparent closed specific area, and a boundary of the transparent area HR is shown. The display mode was such that the line HRc glowed red and emitted light. This is because, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless transparent area having a planar shape as a transparent closed specific area, is circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped in order. This is because it is set in advance so that the degree is high. As a result, the shape of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR is changed from a circular shape to a triangular shape by the progress of the variable display effect A through the transparent region, so that the player can be given a sense of anticipation for winning. , can contribute to reducing the monotony caused by variations in decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is hit in the order of white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color) and rainbow color (rainbow color (rich jackpot)). The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is preset with a high degree of expectation and has the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, is blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color). ) and rainbow color (rainbow color (rich jackpot)) are set in advance with high expectations for winning. As a result, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR is changed from blue to red by the progress of the variable display effect A through the transparent region, so that the player can be given a sense of anticipation for the win. It can contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the pattern.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K). A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a closed specific region, and is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. 66(H) to 66(J ), a transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific area, and is stationary at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a ( 1), the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in red, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 that is maintained in the first mode). In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the rectangular area of the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the second movable accessory 15b lights up, even if the second movable accessory 15 does not start moving, the second movable accessory 15 It is possible to provide the player with a degree of expectation for winning that matches (corresponds to) the degree of expectation for winning given to the operation of .

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K). A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a closed specific region, appeared in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C), whereas FIG. 66(H) to 66(J), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is located near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (that is, left decorative pattern). 8L variation region). This is because the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect A through the transparent area during the effect, so the variable display effect A through the transparent area is executed. The position at which the transparent region HR appears is also determined to be a random position. Therefore, there is no relationship between the position where the transparent region HR appears and the degree of expectation of winning. However, in this embodiment, since the position where the transparent region HR appears can be set at a random position, the player can find the expected degree of winning for the position where the transparent region HR appears based on his/her own idea. Therefore, in this point as well, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Further, when the power to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, as described above, and the second movable accessory is turned on. 15 rectangular areas 15b are lit in white. In the variable display effect A through the transparent area, although it is performed across the two variable displays of FIGS. 66B to 66K, in FIGS. The rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the white lighting state to the blue lighting state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the blue lighting state to the original white lighting state. 66(G) to 66(K), which are the next variations, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 changes from a white lighting state to a red lighting state, and then the second The rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the red lighting state to the original white lighting state. The variable display effect A through the transparent area is not performed as one effect of the so-called look-ahead effect, but whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect through the transparent area during the effect. is determined by lottery. In other words, in reality, only one lottery is performed, and the variable display effect A through the transparent area is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K). For each variation, the variable display effect A can be performed through the transparent area as if it were decided by lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can be made to think that there are a plurality of variations for the variable display effect A through the transparent area.

66(C) to 66(E), in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in the present embodiment, first, a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a circular shape is used as a transparent closed specific area. 66(B) to FIG. 66(B) to FIG. 66(B) to FIG. In 66(K), the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be changed while maintaining the planar and circular shape.

Also, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in this embodiment, in FIG. Although the color changes from blue, for example, the color may change from any one of red, green, and purple. 66(H) to 66(J), first, the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is changed from blue to other colors a plurality of times. (for example, blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.). While maintaining the color of the region HR in yellow (gold color) or iridescent (rainbow color (rich big win)), the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a transparent closed specific region, is changed (for example, circular, Triangular, square, then star; circular, triangular, then square; circular, then triangular; triangular, square, then star; triangular, square, etc.) , the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a specific closed transparent region, is maintained (for example, a circular shape, a triangular shape, a rectangular shape, or a star shape) is maintained. may

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in the present embodiment, although it is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. Instead, the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect A through the transparent area during the effect. However, the variable display effect A through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the look-ahead effects. In this case, since the variable display effect A through the transparent area was performed across the two variable displays of FIGS. Although the shape and color of the pending icon 9B as the result of prefetching for the pending icon 9B to be placed is actually the blue spherical pending icon 9B as the prefetching result, it matches (corresponds to) the degree of expectation of the blue spherical pending icon 9B. 66(B) to 66(K), which are shown in FIG. 66(B) to FIG. 66(K). , can be dared to be a white spherical pending icon 9B.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in the present embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in the sub-variation area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. It was a variable production (variable display). However, the player misunderstands that the numbers of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are the countdown started by the variable display effect A through the transparent area, and the countdown wins. Since there is a possibility that the player expects that the highly anticipated performance will be executed after that, the sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R to reduce the size. The left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be variably produced (variably displayed).

Also, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in the present embodiment, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the number of the second start port 21 The number of second special figure reservations (red numerals) based on the number of game balls entered was always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. However, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the number of second special reservation reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 The player misunderstands (red numbers) as the countdown started by the variable display performance A through the transparent area, and the player expects that the countdown will cause a performance with a high probability of winning to be executed thereafter. Because there is a risk, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of pending (red numerals) may be arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. appears in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the transparent area HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. In FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape as a transparent closed specific area, is located near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a ( That is, when it appeared in the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L), the transparent region HR was fixed at this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR may be repeatedly moved up and down in small steps (vertical vibration), or may be repeatedly moved left and right in small steps (horizontal vibration). ), or a display mode in which it repeatedly rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode in which these are combined. In this way, since the visible area changes through the transparent area HR, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation by the transparent area HR, which contributes to reducing the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern. be able to.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in this embodiment, for example, in FIGS. A transparent region HR, which is a clear region, appeared in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of the colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as the transparent closed specific region, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C is replaced as a transparent region HR that is a planar shape and a colorless and transparent region. good too. In other words, the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R gradually change from bright to dark, the display screen 7a turns dark, and finally only the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes to a bright state. By maintaining this, the background image and the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed in front of the background image may be visible only through the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the transparent area HR, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the variable display effect A through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 2, a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region. , the boundary line HRc shines red and emits light. This is because, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area as a transparent closed specific area, has a circular shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, and a star shape, in that order. This is because it is set in advance as follows. Instead of the colorless and transparent transparent region HR appearing as a transparent closed specific region in the form of a circle, a triangle, a square, and a star, the silhouette of character 1, the silhouette of character 2, and the silhouette of character 3 are displayed. The silhouettes of different characters may appear one after another in the order of the silhouette of the character 4 and the silhouette of the character 4 . The outline of each character's silhouette becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-described transparent area HR, the inner area of each character's silhouette becomes the above-described inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, and the outer area of the outline of each character's silhouette becomes the above-described area. It becomes an outer area HRb of the transparent area HR. In this case, the character 1 silhouette, the character 2 silhouette, the character 3 silhouette, and the character 4 silhouette are set in advance so that the degree of winning expectation increases in this order. In addition, instead of the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area, appearing as a circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped transparent closed specific area, the posture of the silhouette of a single specific character ( pose) may appear so as to change gradually. For example, it is possible to make the silhouettes of a series of actions until a specific character holds a sword appear in order. In this case, it is set in advance so that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the silhouette of a series of actions until the specific character takes up the sword and holds it up.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 2, a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region. , the boundary line HRc shines red and emits light. This is because, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area as a transparent closed specific area, has a circular shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, and a star shape, in that order. This is because it is set in advance as follows. Instead of the colorless and transparent transparent region HR appearing as a transparent closed specific region in the form of a circle, triangle, square, and star, it may be counted down using a numerical image. The contour of the numeric image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, the inner region of the numeric image becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the outer region of the contour of the numeric image becomes the outside of the transparent region HR. It becomes the region HRb. In this case, the number images are counted down in the order of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)". It is set in advance so that when the countdown by the number images progresses in the order of the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1" and the image of the number "0 (zero)", the expectation of winning increases.

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in this embodiment, in FIGS. 66(D) and 66(I), when the background image visible through the transparent region HR is darkened It was a background image THG1 (here, an underground image of a moving image) which is a background image. However, in FIGS. 66(D) and 66(I), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent region HR is switched (changed) from the background image before it is darkened to another background image. can be In this way, the background image can be switched before and after FIGS. 66(D) and 66(I). The relationship (regularity) can be discovered by the player himself, which can contribute to suppressing the decrease in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to any one of the city image, forest image, sea image, undersea image, and underground image described above. Alternatively, one of a plurality of dedicated background images A1, A2, A3, . . . may be switched (changed). In this case, the plurality of images dedicated background images A1, A2, A3, . .

[Variation display effect B through the transparent area]
Next, the variable display effect B through the transparent area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the variable display effect B through the transparent area. In the variable display effect B through the transparent area, after starting the variable effect (variable display) of the plurality of decorative patterns, before ending (stop display) (that is, during the variable effect of the decorative patterns), the image display device 7 is displayed. The display screen 7a is darkened, and at least two of the plurality of decorative patterns are partly visible through a transparent region having a predetermined shape, along with a background image. be. In other words, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, the areas other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape are darkened, and only through this transparent area are part of the at least two decorative patterns being variably displayed together with the background image. It is possible to execute a variable display effect that makes visible.

The variable display effect B through the transparent area in the present embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the image "Right shot" does not change at all and can be visually recognized. It should be noted that if the image "Right-handed" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be left until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes) after the game state of Right-handed is started. or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, as the gaming state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number “8” → number “9” → number “1” → number “2” → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is changed to a display mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, by arranging the sub-variation area so that it is on the front side, the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of the fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. In addition, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variation area (the content displayed in the sub-variation area, which is an opaque small size The display mode of the left decorative pattern, the display mode of the opaque small medium decorative pattern, the display mode of the opaque small right decorative pattern) can be visually recognized without any change. A background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area. In this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that in the sub-variation area, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque middle decorative pattern, Only the variable effect (variable display) of the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and are the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. More specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern is continuously displayed (variably displayed), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small middle decorative pattern is the number "2", the small right decorative pattern is the number "3", the small left decorative pattern is the number "5", and the small medium decoration is displayed. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, a brief description of the variable icon and the reserved icon will be given. As shown in FIG. 67(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently fluctuating as digestion of the second special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 67B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the front side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not blocked by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd does not change at all and can be visually recognized. It is possible.

Here, white spherical suspension icons 9B are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical pending icons that have not been digested and are stocked. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the frontmost) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it is always visible even in the variable display effect B through the transparent area. In addition, even if a transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the color of the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 ( Blue numbers), the color of the second special figure reservation number (red numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21) can be visually recognized without any change.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon will make the difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red sphere icon, a blue sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 will be briefly described. ”) is three-dimensionally formed, and has a character area 15a in which a character graphic is formed and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, there are a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multi-color light for causing the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and for causing the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. A decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light and mounted on the surface side is accommodated. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface mount type electronic components, and are soldered to the surface side of the decoration substrate. In other words, the surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED mounting surface. A dedicated LED driving IC (not shown) for gradation control of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs is mounted on the back side of the decoration substrate (the surface opposite to the front side of the decoration substrate). ), resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), and connectors (not shown) are mounted. The LED driving IC, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mount type electronic components, and are soldered to the back side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the back side of the decorative substrate is the non-mounted surface of the LEDs. The LED driving IC is controlled by the control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are illuminated (lighting, blinking, gradation) in gradation to emit light, thereby generating a character area. 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and the rectangular area 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode.

The second movable accessory 15 can normally stand still at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and stands still at the retracted position (home position). From the state, it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at the advanced position (deployed position) (second mode). The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the second movable accessory 15 starts operating from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can suggest to the player that there is a high degree of expectation for winning. In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 67(A), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is completed, the left The decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and accordingly, the variation icon 9C is displayed. It will be in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern ends. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in white. When the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko game machine, is powered on, the character area 15a of the second movable role 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role 15 is turned on. is lit in white. In other words, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit white. .

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a white lighting state. As shown in 67(B), the variable performance (variable display) of decorative symbols is started. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R change from the opaque state to the translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the variable display effect B through the transparent area is started, and in the state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, While changing from a brightly displayed state to a gradually darkened state, the range from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar and oblong rectangular shape, gradually appears as a transparent closed specific region in the range extending over the variable region of . The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It's becoming In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode that shines clearly from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect B through the transparent area is started, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary. While the character area 15a of the role object 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 changes from a white lighting state to a blue lighting state. . At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits blue light.

In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, the same brightness as that at the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is maintained. In other words, when the variable display effect B through the transparent area is started, the background image THG1 as the background image except for the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR gradually darkens, and then the display screen 7a turns dark. .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(D), when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a turns dark, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is placed inside the transparent region HR. A state in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be visually recognized through the region HRa, and can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. Become. At this time, since the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR excluding the boundary line HRc are darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuates at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being lit up, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being illuminated in blue. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 2 seconds), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate during the predetermined period. A part of the left decorative pattern 8L that changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and slows down (here, the lower part of the number "1", the central part, and the upper part can be seen gradually, and the number " The lower part of the number "2" following the number "1" can be seen) and part of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen (here, the lower part of the number "2" and the central part can be seen gradually) Then the upper part is visible and the lower part of the number "3" following the number "2" is visible).

Even if the background image THG1 as the background image gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is turned black, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. It is possible to visually recognize without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and it is possible to visually recognize it without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern. There is no change to the number color (blue numbers) of the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry and the color (red number) of the number of the number of the second special figure reservation (red number) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 It can be visually recognized without causing any change, and the change in the display mode of the image "Right shot" does not occur at all and can be visually recognized. As described above, this is the first special figure suspension based on the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9B, the suspension display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. , the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" is arranged so as to be the most front side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. On the front side, a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a pending icon 9B, a pending display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of the first special pending based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second This is because the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the display screen 7a is darkened, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the background image is changed from the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly and reappears, and the range extending from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L). The transparent area HR displayed in the area extending over the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes a display mode that gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the blue brightness at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the blue brightness gradually changes from the bright state to the dark state indistinctly. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is illuminated in a predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc. It is blue, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

The background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly as the background image from the state in which the display screen 7a has been darkened and reappears, and from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a. (that is, the range spanning the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). Decorative pattern 8L (here, number "1" and number "2" following number "1"), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, number "2" and number "3" following number "2") , the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") have already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the display screen 7a displays the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is again brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and then, The left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in blue from the state in which it is originally lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the normal light emitting mode.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(G), when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is displayed as the background image. (Here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b is maintained in a blue lighting state. , the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. The icon 9B starts to move toward 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B is not placed at the third holding display position 9Bd and the fourth holding display position. As a result, two pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(H), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright display state to a dark display state. At the same time, a transparent closed area extends from the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to the slightly left side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range spanning the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). As the specific region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a laterally long rectangular shape, gradually appears again. The shape of the transparent region HR here is the same shape as the transparent region HR shown in FIG. are). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It's becoming In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode that shines clearly from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state. On the other hand, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from a white lighting state to a red lighting state. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. In other words, the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which it glows red and emits light.

In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, the same brightness as that at the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is maintained. In other words, the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image except for the area HRa inside the transparent area HR, and then the display screen 7a turns dark.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(I), when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a turns dark, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is placed inside the transparent region HR. A state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be visually recognized through the region HRa through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. Become. At this time, since the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR and the outer area HRb of the transparent area HR, which is an area excluding the boundary line HRc, is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L, which fluctuates at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed in yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being lit up, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being illuminated in red. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows red and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate during the predetermined period. A part of the middle decorative pattern 8C that changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and slows down (here, the lower part of the number "9", the central part and the upper part can be seen gradually, and the number " The lower part of the number "1" following the number 9 can be seen) and part of the right decorative pattern 8R can be seen (here, from the lower part of the number "1" to the central part and The upper part is visible and the lower part of the number "2" following the number "1" is visible).

Even if the background image THG1 as the background image gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is turned black, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd are maintained as described above. It can be visually recognized without any change to the small decorative pattern, and can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and the first start port 20 The color of the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The color of the number of the second special figure reservation (red number) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 Also, the display mode of the image "Right shot" can be visually recognized without any change at all. As described above, this is the first special figure suspension based on the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9B, the suspension display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. , the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" is arranged so as to be the most front side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. On the front side, a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a pending icon 9B, a pending display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of the first special pending based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second This is because the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(J), the display screen 7a is turned dark, and just before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the background image is displayed as a background image from the state where the display screen 7a is turned dark. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly and reappears, and the range extending from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R). The transparent area HR displayed in the area extending over the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes a display mode that gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the red brightness at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the red brightness gradually changes from the bright state to the dark state and becomes unclear. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary (first state) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in red, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 is lit in a predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc. It is red, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows red and emits light is continued.

The background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly as the background image from the darkened state of the display screen 7a and reappears, and from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a. (that is, the range spanning the variation area of the right decorative design 8R and the variation area of the middle decorative design 8C). Decorative pattern 8L (here, number "2" and number "3" following number "2"), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, number "9" and number "1" following number "9") , the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") have already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(K), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is again brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in red from the state in which it is originally lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the normal light emitting mode. As a result, the variable display effect B through the transparent area performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K) is completed.

The variable display effect B through the transparent area is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 67(L), the user moves to the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd. When the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 starts to move toward it, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state in a state in which the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a. While the rectangular area 15b is maintained in a white lighting state, the decorative pattern variation effect (variation display) is started. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. It starts to move toward 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B is not placed at the second holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position. As a result, one pending icon is stocked.

A variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, and thereafter, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the decoration is lost. When the pattern variation effect (variation display) is completed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern. After the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is finished, the big win game (big win effect) is started.

In this way, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), and in FIGS. A transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific area, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), transparent regions HR (see FIG. 67 ( C) to FIG. 67E.) appeared, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR appeared in a display mode in which red light was emitted. In the variable display effect B through the transparent area, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (gold). The probability of winning is set in advance in the order of rainbow color (rich jackpot)), and the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable role 15, is also blue. , red, green, purple, yellow (gold color) and rainbow color (rainbow color (rich jackpot)) are set in advance with a high degree of expectation for winning. As a result, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR is changed from blue to red by the progress of the variable display effect B through the transparent region, so that the player can be given a sense of anticipation for the win. It can contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the pattern.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K). A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a closed specific region, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), whereas in FIGS. A transparent region HR (same as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E)), which is a colorless and transparent region having a horizontal rectangular shape, appears from the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. It appeared in the range extending slightly to the left of the center of 7a (that is, the range spanning the variation area of the right decorative design 8R and the variation area of the middle decorative design 8C). This is because the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect B through the transparent area during the effect, so the variable display effect B through the transparent area is executed. The position at which the transparent region HR appears is also determined to be a random position. Therefore, there is no relationship between the position where the transparent region HR appears and the degree of expectation of winning. However, in this embodiment, since the position where the transparent region HR appears can be set at a random position, the player can find the expected degree of winning for the position where the transparent region HR appears based on his or her own idea. Therefore, in this point as well, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), and in FIGS. A transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a closed specific area, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), and is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the object 15, and emits light. A transparent area HR (same as the transparent area HR appearing in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E)), which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a laterally long rectangular shape as a closed specific area, is displayed on the display screen. Appears in the range from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to the center and slightly left of the display screen 7a (that is, the range spanning the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), and retreats to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b in the second movable role object 15 maintained in the stationary state (first mode) at the position (home position). It was in a display mode that emits light. In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the rectangular area of the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the second movable accessory 15b lights up, even if the second movable accessory 15 does not start moving, the second movable accessory 15 It is possible to provide the player with a degree of expectation for winning that matches (corresponds to) the degree of expectation for winning given to the operation of .

Further, when the power to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, as described above, and the second movable accessory is turned on. 15 rectangular areas 15b are lit in white. 67(B) to 67(K) are straddled in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, the second variable display in FIGS. The rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the white lighting state to the blue lighting state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the blue lighting state to the original white lighting state. 67(G) to 67(K), which are the next variations, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 changes from a white lighting state to a red lighting state, and then the second The rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the red lighting state to the original white lighting state. The variable display effect B through the transparent area is not performed as one effect of the so-called look-ahead effect, but whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect through the transparent area during the effect. is determined by lottery. In other words, in reality, only one lottery is performed, and the variable display effect B through the transparent area is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K). For each variation, the variable display effect B can be performed through the transparent area as if it were decided by lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can be made to feel as if there are a plurality of variations for the variable display effect B through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent region in this embodiment, in FIGS. In the range where the transparent region HR, which is a clear region, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range spanning the variation region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variation region of the middle decorative pattern 8C) In contrast, in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), transparent regions HR ( 67(C) to 67(E)) extends from the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to the slightly left side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R). and the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). However, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific area, is a range that straddles the variation area of the left decorative design 8L and the variation area of the right decorative design 8R. You may make it so. In this case, the left side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and the right side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a. ) can be expressed as

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIG. 67(C), first, as a transparent closed specific area, the transparent area is a colorless transparent area having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape. Although the color of HR is changed from blue, for example, it may be changed from any one of red, green, and purple. ) or in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), first, the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a laterally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is changed from blue to other colors. The color may be changed a plurality of times (for example, blue→red, blue→red→green, blue→red→green→purple, etc.). ), the color of the transparent region HR may be maintained in yellow (gold color) or iridescent (rainbow color (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in the present embodiment, although it is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. Instead, the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect B through the transparent area during the effect. However, the variable display effect B through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the look-ahead effects. In this case, since the variable display effect B through the transparent area was performed straddling the two variable displays of FIGS. Although the shape and color of the pending icon 9B as the result of prefetching for the pending icon 9B to be placed is actually the blue spherical pending icon 9B as the prefetching result, it matches (corresponds to) the degree of expectation of the blue spherical pending icon 9B. 67(B) to 67(K), which are shown in FIG. 67(B) to FIG. 67(K), are performed through a transparent area to perform a variable display effect B, thereby changing the suspended icon 9B placed at the second suspended display position 9Bd. , can be dared to be a white spherical pending icon 9B.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in the present embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in the sub-variation area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. It was a variable production (variable display). However, the player misunderstands that the numbers of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are the countdown started by the variable display effect B through the transparent area, and the countdown wins. Since there is a possibility that the player expects that the highly anticipated performance will be executed thereafter, the sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R to reduce the size. The left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be variably produced (variably displayed).

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the second start port 21 The number of second special figure reservations (red numerals) based on the number of game balls entered was always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. However, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the number of second special reservation reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 The player misunderstands (red numbers) as the countdown started by the variable display performance B through the transparent area, and the player expects that the countdown will cause a performance with a high probability of winning to be executed thereafter. Because there is a risk, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of pending (red numerals) may be arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E), the transparent closed specific area has a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape. In the range where the transparent region HR, which is a clear region, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range spanning the variation region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variation region of the middle decorative pattern 8C) When it appeared, at this position the transparent region HR was fixed without any movement or rotation. In FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), transparent regions HR (FIGS. 67(C) to 67(C) to 67(J)), which are colorless and transparent regions having a planar shape and a laterally long rectangular shape, are transparent closed specific regions. 67(E)) extends from the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to the slightly left side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). ), the transparent region HR was fixed at this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR may be repeatedly moved up and down in small steps (vertical vibration), or may be repeatedly moved left and right in small steps (horizontal vibration). ), or a display mode in which it repeatedly rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode in which these are combined. In this way, since the visible area changes through the transparent area HR, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation by the transparent area HR, which contributes to reducing the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern. be able to.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, for example, in FIGS. The transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range spanning the variation region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variation region of the middle decorative pattern 8C). ). However, instead of the colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as the transparent closed specific region, the range that spans the variation region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variation region of the middle decorative pattern 8C is a plane It may be a transparent region HR that has a shape and is a colorless and transparent region. In other words, the variable area of the right decorative design 8R gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display screen 7a turns dark, and finally the range straddles the variable area of the left decorative design 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative design 8C. By maintaining the only bright state, the background image and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decoration that variably display the background image and the front of the background image only through the range that straddles the variation region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variation region of the middle decorative pattern 8C. You may enable it to be able to visually recognize the pattern 8C. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the transparent area HR, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the variable display effect B through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 1, a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a laterally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, appeared at different positions. However, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a laterally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, may appear at a single predetermined position. As a single predetermined position, a position where a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized (that is, the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). position to straddle), position where part of the middle decorative pattern 8C and part of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized (that is, the range that straddles the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R) position), a position where a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R are visible (that is, a position that straddles the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R). A position where the left side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and the right side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a, in other words, except for the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C. position to be the region).

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. , transparent regions HR, which are colorless and transparent regions having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as specific transparent closed regions, appear at different positions, and transparent regions HR having the same shape and size that are commonly used. Region HR appeared. However, each variable display may change to a different shape (for example, triangular, square, or star-shaped), or may count down using a numerical image. The contour portion of the other shape becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-described transparent region HR, the inner region of the other shape becomes the inner region HRa of the above-described transparent region HR, and the outer region of the contour portion of the other shape becomes the above-described transparent region. It becomes the outer region HRb of HR. In this case, if the change to another shape progresses (for example, if the shape changes in the order of oblong rectangular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape), it is preset to increase the chance of winning. Further, the contour of the numeric image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, the inner region of the numeric image becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the outer region of the contour of the numeric image becomes the transparent region HR. outside region HRb. In this case, the number images are counted down in the order of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)". It is set in advance so that when the countdown by the number images progresses in the order of the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1" and the image of the number "0 (zero)", the expectation of winning increases.

Further, in the variable display effect B through the transparent region in this embodiment, in FIGS. 67(D) and 67(I), when the background image visible through the transparent region HR is darkened It was a background image THG1 (here, an underground image of a moving image) which is a background image. However, in FIGS. 67(D) and 67(I), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent region HR is switched (changed) from the background image before the darkening to another background image. can be In this way, the background image can be switched before and after FIGS. 67(D) and 67(I). The relationship (regularity) can be discovered by the player himself, which can contribute to suppressing the decrease in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to any one of the city image, forest image, sea image, seabed image, and underground image described above. Alternatively, one of a plurality of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3, . . . may be switched (changed). In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3, . .

[Variation display effect C through the transparent area]
Next, the variable display effect C through the transparent area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the variable display effect C through the transparent area. In the variable display effect C through the transparent area, after starting the variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative patterns and before ending (stop display) (that is, during the variable effect of the decorative patterns), the image display device 7 is displayed. The display screen 7a is darkened, and at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns can be partially displayed through a transparent region having a predetermined shape to be visible together with the background image. be. In other words, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the area other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape is darkened, and only through this transparent area is part of the at least one decorative pattern being variably displayed together with the background image. It is possible to execute a variable display effect that makes visible.

The variable display effect C through the transparent area in the present embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the image "Right shot" does not change at all and can be visually recognized. It should be noted that if the image "Right-handed" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be left until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes) after the game state of Right-handed is started. or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, as the gaming state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number “8” → number “9” → number “1” → number “2” → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern, in the temporary stop display state, has a display mode in which it slowly moves up and down in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, by arranging the sub-variation area so that it is on the front side, the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of the fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. In addition, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variation area (the content displayed in the sub-variation area, which is an opaque small size The display mode of the left decorative pattern, the display mode of the opaque small medium decorative pattern, the display mode of the opaque small right decorative pattern) can be visually recognized without any change. A background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area. In this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that in the sub-variation area, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque middle decorative pattern, Only the variable effect (variable display) of the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and are the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. More specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern is continuously displayed (variably displayed), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small middle decorative pattern is the number "2", the small right decorative pattern is the number "3", the small left decorative pattern is the number "5", and the small medium decoration is displayed. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, a brief description of the variable icon and the reserved icon will be given. As shown in FIG. 68(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the digestion of the second special figure reservation, are shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 68B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the front side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not blocked by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd does not change at all and can be visually recognized. It is possible.

Here, white spherical suspension icons 9B are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical pending icons that have not been digested and are stocked. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the frontmost) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it is always visible even in the variable display effect C through the transparent area. In addition, even if a transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the color of the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 ( Blue numbers), the color of the second special figure reservation number (red numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21) can be visually recognized without any change.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon will make the difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red sphere icon, a blue sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 will be briefly described. ”) is three-dimensionally formed, and has a character area 15a in which a character graphic is formed and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, there are a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multi-color light for causing the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and for causing the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. A decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light and mounted on the surface side is accommodated. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface mount type electronic components, and are soldered to the surface side of the decoration substrate. In other words, the surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED mounting surface. A dedicated LED driving IC (not shown) for gradation control of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs is mounted on the back side of the decoration substrate (the surface opposite to the front side of the decoration substrate). ), resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), and connectors (not shown) are mounted. The LED driving IC, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mount type electronic components, and are soldered to the back side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the back side of the decorative substrate is the non-mounted surface of the LEDs. The LED driving IC is controlled by the control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are illuminated (lighting, blinking, gradation) in gradation to emit light, thereby generating a character area. 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and the rectangular area 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode.

The second movable accessory 15 can normally stand still at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and stands still at the retracted position (home position). From the state, it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at the advanced position (deployed position) (second mode). The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the second movable accessory 15 starts operating from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can suggest to the player that there is a high degree of expectation for winning. In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 68(A), in a state where a background image THG1 (here, an underground image of a moving image) is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is completed, the left The decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and accordingly, the variation icon 9C is displayed. It will be in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern ends. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in white. When the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko game machine, is powered on, the character area 15a of the second movable role 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role 15 is turned on. is lit in white. In other words, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit white. .

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a white lighting state. As shown in 68(B), the variable performance (variable display) of decorative symbols is started. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R change from the opaque state to the translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the variable display effect C through the transparent area is started, and in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, While changing from a brightly displayed state to a gradually darkened state, a transparent closed specific region in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C) has a planar shape and a colorless circular shape. The display mode is such that the transparent region HR, which is a transparent region, gradually appears. The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It's becoming In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode that shines clearly from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect C through the transparent area is started, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary. While the character area 15a of the role object 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 changes from a white lighting state to a blue lighting state. . At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits blue light.

In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, the same brightness as that at the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is maintained. In other words, when the variable display effect C through the transparent area is started, the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image except for the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, and then the display screen 7a turns dark. .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(D), when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a becomes darkened, the background image THG1 (moving underground image) is moved inside the transparent region HR. Through the area HRa, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which fluctuates at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be seen through the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR. At this time, since the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR excluding the boundary line HRc are darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being lit up, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being illuminated in blue. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the fast-changing middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from a translucent state during the predetermined period of time. A part of the middle decorative pattern 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the middle part and the upper part can be seen gradually from the lower part of the number "2", and the number The lower portion of the number "3" following the "2" is visible).

Even if the background image THG1 as the background image gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is turned black, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. It is possible to visually recognize without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and it is possible to visually recognize it without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern. There is no change to the number color (blue numbers) of the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry and the color (red number) of the number of the number of the second special figure reservation (red number) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 It can be visually recognized without causing any change, and the change in the display mode of the image "Right shot" does not occur at all and can be visually recognized. As described above, this is the first special figure suspension based on the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9B, the suspension display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. , the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" is arranged so as to be the most front side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. On the front side, a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a pending icon 9B, a pending display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of the first special pending based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second This is because the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the display screen 7a is turned dark, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the background image is changed from the state in which the display screen 7a is turned dark. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually brightened and reappears, and the transparent area HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from bright to dark. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the blue brightness at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the blue brightness gradually changes from the bright state to the dark state indistinctly. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary (first state) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role object 15 is lit in a predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc. It is blue, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

The background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly as the background image from the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened and reappears. When the transparent area HR to be displayed changes from a bright state to a dark state gradually, all the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), the middle Decorative design 8C (here, number "2" and number "3" following number "2"), right decorative design 8R (here, number "9" and number "1" following number "9") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before temporary stop display on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is again brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and then, The left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in blue from the state in which it is originally lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the normal light emitting mode.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(G), when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is displayed as the background image. (Here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b is maintained in a blue lighting state. , the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. The icon 9B starts to move toward 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B is not placed at the third holding display position 9Bd and the fourth holding display position. As a result, two pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(H), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright display state to a dark display state. At the same time, a transparent closed area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is the same position as the transparent area HR that appeared in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E)). As the specific area, a transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape, gradually appears. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from the shape of the transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. 68(C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It's becoming In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode that shines clearly from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state. On the other hand, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from a white lighting state to a red lighting state. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. In other words, the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which it glows red and emits light.

In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, the same brightness as that at the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is maintained. In other words, the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image except for the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, and then the display screen 7a turns dark.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(I), when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a becomes darkened, the background image THG1 (moving underground image) is moved inside the transparent region HR. Through the area HRa, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which fluctuates at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be seen through the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR. At this time, since the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR excluding the boundary line HRc are darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a red lighting state. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows red and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened in this way is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), during this predetermined period, the fast-changing middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a translucent state. A part of the middle decorative pattern 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the middle part and the upper part can be seen gradually from the lower part of the number "9", and the number The lower portion of the digit "1" following the "9" is visible).

Even if the background image THG1 as the background image gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is turned black, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd are maintained as described above. It can be visually recognized without any change to the small decorative pattern, and can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and the first start port 20 The color of the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The color of the number of the second special figure reservation (red number) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 Also, the display mode of the image "Right shot" can be visually recognized without any change at all. As described above, this is the first special figure suspension based on the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9B, the suspension display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. , the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" is arranged so as to be the most front side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. On the front side, a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a pending icon 9B, a pending display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of the first special pending based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second This is because the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the display screen 7a is turned dark, and just before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the background image is displayed as a background image from the state where the display screen 7a is turned dark. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually brightened and reappears, and the transparent area HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from bright to dark. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the red brightness at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the red brightness gradually changes from the bright state to the dark state indistinctly. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a red-lighted state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is illuminated in a predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc. It is red, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows red and emits light is continued.

The background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly as the background image from the state in which the display screen 7a has been darkened and reappears. , the same position as the position of the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E)). Decorative pattern 8L (here, number "2" and number "3" following number "2"), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, number "9" and number "1" following number "9") , the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") have already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(K), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is again brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in red from the state in which it is originally lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the normal light emitting mode.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(L), when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is displayed as the background image. (Here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b is maintained in a blue lighting state. , the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. The icon 9B starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B is not placed at the second holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position. As a result, one pending icon is stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(M), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright display state to a dark display state. , and the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is the same position as the transparent area HR that appeared in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E), and further, 68(H) to 68(J)), which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a square shape as a transparent closed specific region. gradually appears. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. H) has a shape different from that of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a triangular planar shape. The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It's becoming In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode that shines clearly from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state. On the other hand, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from a white lighting state to a green lighting state. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is green, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. In other words, the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows green and emits light.

In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, the same brightness as that at the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is maintained. In other words, the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image except for the area HRa inside the transparent area HR, and then the display screen 7a turns dark.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(N), when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a turns dark, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is placed inside the transparent region HR. Through the area HRa, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which fluctuates at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be seen through the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR. At this time, since the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR excluding the boundary line HRc are darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a green lighting state. It is green, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows green and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened in this way is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), during this predetermined period, the fast-changing middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a translucent state. A part of the middle decorative pattern 8C that changes to an opaque state again and slows down can be seen (here, the lower part of the number "8", the middle part and the upper part can be seen gradually, and the number The lower portion of the digit "9" following the "8" is visible).

Even if the background image THG1 as the background image gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is turned black, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd are maintained as described above. It can be visually recognized without any change to the small decorative pattern, and can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and the first start port 20 The color of the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The color of the number of the second special figure reservation (red number) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 Also, the display mode of the image "Right shot" can be visually recognized without any change at all. As described above, this is the first special figure suspension based on the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9B, the suspension display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. , the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" is arranged so as to be the most front side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. On the front side, a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a pending icon 9B, a pending display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of the first special pending based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second This is because the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21, and the image "Right shot" are arranged.

Subsequently, although not shown, the display screen 7a is turned dark, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) elapses, the background image THG1 (here, Underground image of moving image) is gradually brightened and reappears, and the transparent area HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from bright to dark. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the green brightness at the boundary line HRc becomes a display mode in which the green brightness gradually changes from the bright state to the dark state indistinctly. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is kept stationary (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in green, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role product 15 is lit in a predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc. It is green, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc glows green and emits light is continued.

The background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly as the background image from the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened and reappears. , the same position as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E), and the same position as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. When the transparent area HR displayed at the position of ) gradually changes from bright to dark, all the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2 ”), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number “8” and the number “9” following the number “8”), right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number “9” and the number following the number “9” "1") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before temporary stop display on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, although not shown, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) as the background image returns to being brightly displayed on the display screen 7a again, and when the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and then the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed with the number. "2" is stopped and displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". display), the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated in green from the original white lighting. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the normal light emitting mode. As a result, the variable display effect C through the transparent area, which is started from FIG. 68B and performed across the three variable displays, ends.

When the variable display effect C through the transparent area is completed, and subsequently, although not shown, movement toward the variable display position 9Cd is started in order to consume the suspended icon 9B placed on the first suspended display position 9Bd. In a state where the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b is in a white lighting state. While the state is maintained, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B is placed at the first pending display position 9Bd to the fourth pending display position. It will be in the state of not As a result, no pending icon is stocked.

A variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns is started, and thereafter, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is lost, and the decorative pattern is displayed. When the pattern variation effect (variation display) is completed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern. After the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is finished, the big win game (big win effect) is started.

In this way, the variable display effect C through the transparent area starts from FIG. 68(B) and is performed across three variable displays. As the specific region, a transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape appears, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. ) to FIG. 68(J), a transparent area HR which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape appears as a transparent closed specific area, and a boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines in red. In FIG. 68(M), (N), etc., a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a square shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR was in a display mode in which green light was emitted. This is because, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape as a specific closed transparent area, is circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped in order. This is because it is set in advance so that the degree is high. As a result, the shape of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR is changed from circular to triangular to quadrangular in order by the progress of the variable display performance C through the transparent region, giving the player a sense of expectation for winning. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is hit in the order of white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color) and rainbow color (rainbow color (rich jackpot)). The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is preset with a high degree of expectation and has the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, is blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color). ) and rainbow color (rainbow color (rich jackpot)) are set in advance with high expectations for winning. As a result, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR changes from blue to red to green as the variable display effect C progresses through the transparent region, thereby making it possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of winning. , can contribute to reducing the monotony caused by variations in decorative patterns.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, it starts from FIG. 68B and is performed across three variable displays, and in FIGS. A transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as an area, and is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit, and the display mode is such that in FIGS. , a transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific area, and stands still at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode ), the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable role object 15 is lit. N), etc., a transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a rectangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific area, and stops at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits green light, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 maintained in the state (first mode). . In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the rectangular area of the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the second movable accessory 15b lights up, even if the second movable accessory 15 does not start moving, the second movable accessory 15 It is possible to provide the player with a degree of expectation for winning that matches (corresponds to) the degree of expectation for winning given to the operation of .

Further, when the power to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, as described above, and the second movable accessory is turned on. 15 rectangular areas 15b are lit in white. In the variable display effect C through the transparent area, it starts from FIG. 68(B) and is performed across three variable displays, but in FIGS. 68(B) to 68(F), the second movable accessory The rectangular area 15b of 15 changes from the white lighting state to the blue lighting state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the blue lighting state to the original white lighting state. 68(G) to 68(K), which are the next variations, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role 15 changes from a white lighting state to a red lighting state, and then the second movable role product The rectangular area 15b of 15 changes from the red lighting state to the original white lighting state. The rectangular area 15b changes from white lighting to green lighting, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from green lighting to the original white lighting state. . The variable display effect C through the transparent area is not performed as one effect of the so-called look-ahead effect, but whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect through the transparent area during the effect. is determined by lottery. That is, in fact, only one lottery is performed, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area is started from FIG. , the variable display effect C can be performed through the transparent area as if it were decided by lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Thereby, the player can be made to think that there are a plurality of variations for the variable display effect C through the transparent area.

68(C) to 68(E), in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in the present embodiment, first, a colorless transparent area having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific area. 68(B) to FIG. 68(B) to FIG. 68(B) to FIG. In 68(K), the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be changed while maintaining the planar and circular shape.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in this embodiment, in FIG. Although the color is changed from blue, for example, it may be changed from any one of red, green, and purple. In the variations, or in the variations in FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), or in the variations in FIGS. 68(M), (N), etc., first, a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region The color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a shape, changes from blue to other colors a plurality of times (for example, changes from blue to red, blue to red to green, blue to red to green to purple, etc.). ), or starting from FIG. 68(B), the color of the transparent region HR is maintained in yellow (gold color) or rainbow color (rainbow color (rich jackpot)) across the three variations. state, the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a transparent closed specific region, is changed (for example, in the order of circular, triangular, quadrangular and star shaped, in the order of circular, triangular and quadrangular, circular Then, the order of triangular, triangular, quadrangular and star-shaped, triangular and quadrangular, etc.), or maintaining the shape of the transparent region HR which is a transparent closed specific region (for example, circular shape). (maintains triangular, maintains square, maintains star).

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, it is started from FIG. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect C through the transparent area during the effect. However, the variable display effect C through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the look-ahead effects. In this case, since the variable display effect C through the transparent area is started from FIG. 68B and has been performed across three variable displays, it is placed at the third reserved display position 9Bd in FIG. 68A. Although the shape and color of the hold icon 9B as the prefetch result for the hold icon 9B is actually a red spherical hold icon 9B as the prefetch result, the figure shows an effect that matches (corresponds to) the degree of expectation of the red spherical hold icon 9B. Starting from 68(B), by performing the variable display effect C through the transparent area that straddles the three variable displays, the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd is changed to a white spherical hold. It can be an icon 9B.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in the present embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in the sub-variation region provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. It was a variable production (variable display). However, the player misunderstands that the numbers of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are the countdown started by the variable display effect C through the transparent area, and the countdown wins. Since there is a possibility that the player expects that the highly anticipated performance will be executed after that, the sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R to reduce the size. The left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be variably produced (variably displayed).

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the number of The number of second special figure reservations (red numerals) based on the number of game balls entered was always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. However, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20 and the number of second special reservation reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second start opening 21 The player misunderstands (red numbers) as the countdown started by the variable display performance C through the transparent area, and the player expects that the countdown will cause the performance with a high chance of winning to be executed thereafter. Because there is a risk, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of pending (red numerals) may be arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. appears in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the transparent area HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. In FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is the center (that is, the center) of the display screen 7a. When it appeared in the variable region of the decorative pattern 8C), the transparent region HR was fixed at this position without moving or rotating. In FIGS. 68M and 68N, etc., the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a square shape as a transparent closed specific region, is the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the middle decorative region). When it appeared in the variable area of the pattern 8C), the transparent area HR was fixed at this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR may be repeatedly moved up and down in small steps (vertical vibration), or may be repeatedly moved left and right in small steps (horizontal vibration). ), or a display mode in which it repeatedly rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode in which these are combined. In this way, since the visible area changes through the transparent area HR, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation by the transparent area HR, which contributes to reducing the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern. be able to.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in this embodiment, for example, in FIGS. A transparent region HR, which is a clear region, appeared in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of the colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as the transparent closed specific region, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C is replaced as a transparent region HR that is a planar shape and a colorless and transparent region. good too. In other words, the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R gradually change from bright to dark, the display screen 7a turns dark, and finally only the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes to a bright state. By maintaining this, the background image and the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed in front of the background image may be visible only through the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the transparent area HR, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the variable display effect C through the transparent area.

Also, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the variable display effect C through the transparent area starts from FIG. 68(E), a transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. In FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), a transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape appears as a transparent closed specific region, The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR is in a display mode in which red light is emitted. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appears, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines green and emits light. This is because, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area as a transparent closed specific area, has a circular shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, and a star shape in that order. This is because it is set in advance as follows. Instead of the colorless and transparent transparent region HR appearing as a transparent closed specific region in the form of a circle, a triangle, a square, and a star, the silhouette of character 1, the silhouette of character 2, and the silhouette of character 3 are displayed. The silhouettes of different characters may appear one after another in the order of the silhouette of the character 4 and the silhouette of the character 4 . The outline of each character's silhouette becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-described transparent area HR, the inner area of each character's silhouette becomes the above-described inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, and the outer area of the outline of each character's silhouette becomes the above-described area. It becomes an outer area HRb of the transparent area HR. In this case, the character 1 silhouette, the character 2 silhouette, the character 3 silhouette, and the character 4 silhouette are set in advance so that the degree of winning expectation increases in this order. In addition, instead of the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area, appearing as a circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped transparent closed specific area, the pose of the silhouette of a single specific character ( pose) may appear so as to change gradually. For example, it is possible to make the silhouettes of a series of actions until a specific character holds a sword appear in order. In this case, it is set in advance so that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the silhouette of a series of actions until the specific character takes up the sword and holds it up.

Also, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the variable display effect C through the transparent area starts from FIG. 68(E), a transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. In FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), a transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape appears as a transparent closed specific region, The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR is in a display mode in which red light is emitted. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appears, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines green and emits light. This is because, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area as a transparent closed specific area, has a circular shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, and a star shape in that order. This is because it is set in advance as follows. Instead of the colorless and transparent transparent region HR appearing as a transparent closed specific region in the form of a circle, triangle, square, and star, it may be counted down using a numerical image. The contour of the numeric image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, the inner region of the numeric image becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the outer region of the contour of the numeric image becomes the outside of the transparent region HR. It becomes the region HRb. In this case, the number images are counted down in the order of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)". It is set in advance so that when the countdown by the number images progresses in the order of the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1" and the image of the number "0 (zero)", the expectation of winning increases.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in this embodiment, in FIGS. 68D, 68I, and 68N, the background image visible through the transparent region HR when darkened was the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image), which is the background image before being darkened. However, in FIGS. 68(D), 68(I) and 68(N), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent region HR changes from the background image before darkening to another background image. It may be switched (changed). 68(D), 68(I), and 68(N). The relationship (regularity) between the image and the winning/losing result can be discovered by the player's body, which can contribute to suppressing the decrease in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to any one of the city image, forest image, sea image, undersea image, and underground image. Alternatively, one of a plurality of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3, . . . may be switched (changed). In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3, . .

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable display presentation through the transparent area is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. When an image forming the transparent closed specific region HR is displayed, the background image THG1 and the pattern image are displayed outside the image forming the specific region HR. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern are made invisible, and a part of the background image THG1 and a part of the pattern image are made visible through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR. (Figs. 66(D) and (I) for the variable display effect A through the transparent area, Figs. 67(D) and (I) for the variable display effect B through the transparent area, and Figure 68 for the variable display effect C through the transparent area. (D), (I), (N)) can be executed. According to this configuration, when an image forming the transparent closed specific region HR is displayed, outside the image forming the specific region HR are the background image THG1 and the pattern image capable of informing the winning result. Although the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are made invisible, inside the image forming the specific region HR, the background image THG1 can be seen through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR. Part and part of the pattern image (for example, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 66 (D), part of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 66 (I), transparent area In the variable display effect B through, part of the left decorative pattern 8L and part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 67(D), part of the middle decorative pattern 8C and part of the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 67(I) In the variable display effect C through the transparent area, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner, which contributes to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern, which are pattern images. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest by performing variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern, which are novel pattern images.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. When the image forming the specific region HR is displayed by darkening 7a, the outside of the image forming the specific region HR is darkened, and the inside of the image forming the specific region HR is maintained in a transparent state without being darkened. It is possible to do so. According to this configuration, the background image THG1 and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are the pattern images, are displayed outside the image forming the specific region HR by darkening the display screen 7a. becomes difficult to see, and the inside of the image forming the specific region HR maintains a transparent state regardless of whether or not the display screen 7a is darkened. Background image THG1 and pattern images (for example, left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 66(I) for variable display effect A through the transparent area, middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 67(I) for variable display effect B through the transparent area, and In the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 68(D), the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 68(I), and the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. It is possible to maintain a state of easy visibility.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. Even if the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B are displayed outside the image forming the HR and the display screen 7a is darkened, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B can be maintained without being hidden. It is possible. According to this configuration, when the display screen 7a is darkened, the outer side of the image forming the specific region HR is darkened. Since the icons 9B and 9B can be maintained in a state of being displayed without being hidden, the variation that continues to be displayed to the player during the variation display by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. It is possible to suggest the possibility that the icon 9C will change to another shape or another color to increase the expectation of winning, and it is displayed during the variable display with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. It is also possible to suggest the possibility that the pending icon 9B that continues to be played changes to another shape or another color to increase the expectation of winning.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C and a right decorative pattern 8R which are pattern images are arranged in front of THG1, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R which are pattern images are changed from an opaque state. When started, an image forming the specific region HR is displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images, are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and displayed in high speed fluctuation. Further, the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images, is slowed down to change from a translucent state to an opaque state. According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are the pattern images, are variably displayed at high speed in a translucent state. The decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R can be visually recognized through the specific region HR, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R which are pattern images in a translucent state. The background image THG1 behind is also visible through the pattern image and the specific region HR.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. A boundary line HRc between the outside and inside of the image forming the HR can be displayed in a predetermined color. According to this configuration, since the specific region HR is an image forming a transparent closed region, the boundary line HRc representing the outer shape of the specific region HR is displayed in a predetermined color to make the specific region HR easier to see, When the specific area HR is displayed, it can contribute to guiding the player's line of sight to the specific area HR and attracting the player's attention.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to move between the retracted position and the advanced position, and a plurality of first full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (plurality of light emitting means) are provided. 66, variable display effect B through the transparent region in FIG. 67, and variable display effect C through the transparent region in FIG. is a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position, a predetermined color for displaying the boundary line HRc, a plurality of first full-color LEDs and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (plurality of light emitting means). can be the same color as the light emitted by the second full-color LED (specific light emitting means). When the second movable accessory 15 starts to move from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can suggest to the player that the probability of winning is high. In the retracted state, the boundary line HRc can be displayed so as to be the same color as the color of the light emitted by the plurality of second full-color LEDs (specific light-emitting means) provided on the second movable accessory 15. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the second movable role 15 and the transparent region HR (that is, the boundary line HRc) are interlocked, and the second movable role 15 can be moved to the retracted position. Even in the retracted state, it is possible to suggest to the player that the probability of winning is high by using the transparent area HR (that is, the boundary line HRc). In addition, as described above, when the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position, the color of the light emitted by the plurality of second full-color LEDs (specific light emitting means) included in the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc can be displayed in the same color, the player can see that the second movable role 15 and the transparent region HR (that is, the boundary line HRc) are interlocked. Along with this, it is also possible to arouse the player's expectation that the second movable accessory 15 may start to operate.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. The formed image is a planar image (planar image), and variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and variable display through the transparent area in FIG. The effect in the effect C can be maintained without changing the posture and size of the planar image (planar image) from the time the planar image (planar image) is displayed until it is hidden. ing. According to this configuration, since the orientation and size of the planar image (planar image) that is the image formed in the specific region HR are not changed, the player's line of sight is directed not to the specific region HR itself. This can contribute to maintaining a state in which a portion of the background image THG1 and a portion of the pattern image that are visible through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR are directed.

[Modification]
A modification of the variable display effect through the transparent area is shown below.
[Modification 1]
66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. It was done based on In other words, it was performed in a so-called right-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called left-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. During the variable display by 8R, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B did not change to other shapes or colors for the player. However, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the variation icon 9 changes to another shape or another color during the variable display by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the degree of expectation for winning increases. Alternatively, during the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, there is a possibility that the pending icon 9B changes to another shape or another color and the probability of winning increases. You may enable it to suggest.

[Modification 3]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. 68, an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR is displayed. At this time, the background image THG1 and the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern are made difficult to see outside the image forming the specific region HR. Through the inside, it was possible to execute an effect in which a part of the background image THG1 and a part of the pattern image were visible. However, instead of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design as the design images, the variable icon 9 or the reserved icon 9B may be used. In this case, when the pattern image is the variable icon 9C, when the image forming the transparent closed specific region HR is displayed, the background image THG1 and the variable icon 9C are visible outside the image forming the specific region HR. Although it is difficult, inside the image forming the specific region HR, part of the background image THG1 and part or all of the design image (part or change of the variation icon 9C) pass through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR. All of the icons 9C) may be visible, or when the pattern image is the reserved icon 9B, the specific region HR may be formed when an image forming the transparent closed specific region HR is displayed. Although the background image THG1 and the reserved icon 9B are difficult to see outside the image that forms the specific region HR, inside the image that forms the specific region HR, a part of the background image THG1 is visible through the inside of the image that forms the specific region HR. A part or all of the pattern image (a part of the pending icon 9B or the whole of the pending icon 9B) may be visually recognized. In this way, since the player's line of sight can be directed to the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B change to other shapes and colors, increasing the expectation of winning. The player can be informed of the timing of suggesting the possibility.

[Modification 4]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. White (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color), and rainbow color (rainbow color (big hit)) are preset in order with high expectations for winning, and the second movable role. The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of 15, is also in the order of blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow color (rich big win)). Expectations were high and set in advance. However, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be the same color as that of the rectangular region 15b of the second movable role 15, followed by a color with a higher degree of winning expectation. For example, when the rectangular area 15 of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue, red, which is the color with which the degree of expectation for winning is one higher than blue, becomes the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR. The boundary line HRc of HR lights up in red. Further, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be the same color as that of the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, followed by a color with a higher degree of expectation of winning by two. For example, when the rectangular area 15 of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR is green, which is the color of the second highest expectation for winning following blue. The boundary line HRc of HR lights up in green.

[Modification 5]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. However, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having display means for displaying a plurality of types of images on a screen,
When an image forming a transparent closed specific area is displayed, the background image and the pattern image are made difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area, and the background image is displayed through the inside of the image forming the specific area. It is possible to execute an effect that makes a part of the pattern image and a part of the pattern image visible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
When the screen is darkened to display an image forming the specific area, the outside of the image forming the specific area is darkened, and the inside of the image forming the specific area is not darkened and is made transparent. maintain the state of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
The effect displays the variable icon and the suspended icon outside the image forming the specific area, and maintains the displayed state without hiding the variable icon and the suspended icon even when the screen is darkened. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
In the production, the pattern image is arranged in front of the background image, and when the pattern image starts to change from an opaque state, an image forming the specific area is displayed, and the pattern image is changed from an opaque state to a translucent state. After changing the pattern image to a high-speed variable display, the variable display of the pattern image is decelerated to change from a translucent state to an opaque state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
The effect displays a boundary line between the outside and the inside of the image forming the specific area in a predetermined color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-5,
Having a movable body capable of moving between a retracted position and an advanced position and provided with a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting multicolor light;
The rendering includes the predetermined color for displaying the boundary line and the emission color of light emitted by a specific light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means in a state in which the movable body is retracted at the retracted position. be of the same color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-6,
The image formed in the specific region is a planar image,
The presentation maintains the orientation and size of the planar image without changing from the time the planar image is displayed until the planar image is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The rhythmic hit/loss notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 to 71, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. There is Incidentally, when the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15 is operated during the variable performance (variable display) of the plurality of decorative symbols, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15 is not operated. Inform the player that the expectation of winning is higher after the variable performance (variable display) of the plurality of decorative patterns is completed (that is, after the plurality of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed) compared to when. When the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are operated while a plurality of decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern and the display is temporarily stopped, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. 15 is not activated, it is suggested to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that the player will be given a win among a plurality of types of wins. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 .

In this rhythmic winning/losing notification effect, a variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative patterns is started all at once (simultaneously), and after a predetermined time (a certain period of time) has elapsed, all at once (simultaneously) the stop display is performed to notify the winning/losing result. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of doing. In other words, by announcing the winning/losing result after a predetermined time (fixed time) has elapsed in the variable rendering (variable display) of the plurality of decorative patterns, the variable display rendering of rhythmically announcing the winning/losing result can be executed. . That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a rhythmic winning/losing notification effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 to display an image on the display screen 7a. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a rhythmic winning/losing notification effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory provided on the game board 2 The position of the movable accessory 15 is changed. The rhythmical win/lose notification effect is not performed as one effect of the so-called look-ahead effect, but the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the rhythmical win/loss notification effect during the effect. there is

Various background images for the variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols include, for example, background images such as city images, forest images, sea images, seabed images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or moving images.

Here, the rhythmic win-lose notification effect A will be described first, then the rhythmic win-lose notification effect B and the rhythmic win-lose notification effect C will be described in order.

[Rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A]
First, the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A. FIG. Rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A simultaneously (simultaneously) starts a variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative patterns, and after a predetermined time (constant time) elapses, stops and displays all at once (simultaneously) to notify the result of win/loss. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of doing. In other words, the rhythmic win-loss notification effect A is a variable display effect of notifying the win-loss result rhythmically by announcing the win-loss result after a predetermined time (fixed time) has elapsed with the variable effect (variable display) of the plurality of decorative symbols. can be executed.

The rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A in this embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It should be noted that the image "Right shot" is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, if the image "Right-handed" becomes an eyesore in the various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to wait until the game state of Right-handed is established and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, as the gaming state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is changed to a display mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, by arranging the sub-variation area so that it is on the front side, the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of the fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. Visibility is not hindered.In addition, the background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that an opaque small size Only the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and the same size is displayed at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be varied (variable display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "5" and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, a brief description of the variable icon and the reserved icon will be given. As shown in FIG. 69(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently fluctuating as the digestion of the second special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 69B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the front side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not blocked by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Note that the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. (disappears).

Here, white spherical suspension icons 9B are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical pending icons that have not been digested and are stocked. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 after this, and the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd is extinguished, and then the second When the game ball enters the 2 start hole 21, the state where the rhythmical win/loss notification effect A is started, that is, in the game state of hitting to the right, the state in which 3 to 4 reserved icons are always stocked is maintained. It is assumed that there is As a result, the period of the variable rendering (variable display) of the decorative symbols from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative symbols) of the variable rendering (variable display) of the decorative symbols is always set to a predetermined time (fixed time: 3). seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the frontmost) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, even in the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A, it is always visible.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in the shapes and colors of the icons can be used to determine the difference in the degree of expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As icons other than these, there are a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B have a white aura from the entire icon. The expectation level of winning for the icon of character A emitting a white aura is the same as the expectation level of winning for the icon of character B emitting a white aura. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to win in the order of white aura→green aura→red aura→gold (yellow) aura→seven-colored (rainbow) aura (rich jackpot). is set high.

Next, the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 will be briefly described. ”) is formed three-dimensionally. The second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). The second movable accessory 15 can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from a resting position (home position) and rest at an advanced position (deployed position). There is (second aspect). In other words, the second movable accessory 15 in the second mode is stationary so that the character graphic is in a horizontal state, and the second movable accessory 15 that has been stationary at the retracted position (home position) remains as it is. It simply moves downward in the posture of , and stops at the advanced position (deployed position). Furthermore, the second movable accessory 15 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise at the advanced position (deployed position), and can be stopped at any angle (third mode). .

It should be noted that the second movable accessory 15 is moved to a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position (deployed position) by a motor (for example, a stepping motor or a DC motor) for vertical movement (not shown), which is an electric drive source provided in the game board 2. Further, a rotation motor (for example, a stepping motor or a DC motor) (not shown), which is an electric drive source provided in the second movable accessory 15, rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. It is designed to be able to rotate around.

In the game state of hitting to the right, there is a case where the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A is started. In the state where the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A is started, as shown in FIG. When the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is completed, the left decorative design 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative design 8C (here, the number "2"), the right decorative design 8R (here, the number "3") ) are stopped all at once (at the same time), and along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the background image THG1 (here, the moving image underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the display screen 7a displays the background image for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, immediately before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". , and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". That is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical pending icon 9B is placed on the fourth pending display position 9Bd, and a total of four pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a state in which the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a. 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1", that is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design. 8C, the right decorative patterns 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) stop-displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbols 8L, the middle decorative symbols 8C, and the right decorative symbols 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the background image THG1 (here, the moving image underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is displayed for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". , and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". That is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical pending icon 9B is placed on the fourth pending display position 9Bd, and a total of four pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a state in which the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a. 8L is stop-displayed with the number "3", middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "1", and right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "2", that is, left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design. 8C, the right decorative patterns 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) stop-displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69(F), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the background image THG1 (here, the moving image underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the display screen 7a displays the background image for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and a win is announced. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", which is the same pattern, without forming reach and without developing into super reach. be. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. ), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and the deviation is notified, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C according to FIGS. 69(F) and (G) , and the timing at which the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the same pattern and the winning is notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69(H), a first premium background image THG3 (so-called “first rainbow background image THG3”) having seven colors as a background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, and the background image THG1 (here, , Underground image of moving image), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" which is the same pattern, are displayed. is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and the image "Right-handed" that has been arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd arranged below are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the win is confirmed.

When a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 69(I). advances (moves) from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward a central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and Stop for a period of time (eg, 15 seconds).

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. The number "1", which is the symbol, appears again and is temporarily stopped, and furthermore, the indicators are located below the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R and near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. A specific image composed of an image TB and a character CRC is displayed. To improve the visibility of a specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC, which is arranged and displayed so that the left part of the character CRC covers the right part of the indicator image TB so as to be in front. A background image THG4 for a specific image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium image THG3. When the indicator image TB and the character CRC are composed of bright colors, the specific image background image THG4 is dark in color (for example, in addition to gray and black, a color close to gray or black). It may be a single color, a combination of a plurality of dark colors, or an effect image arranged so as not to hinder the visibility of the specific image. may Further, when the indicator image TB and the character CRC are composed of dark colors, the specific image background image THG4 is mainly composed of bright colors (for example, colors close to white in addition to white). It may be composed of a single color, a combination of a plurality of bright colors, or an effect image arranged so as not to hinder the visibility of the specific image.

The indicator image TB that constitutes the specific image visually and intuitively displays the remaining time by shortening the length of the horizontal bar image. In this embodiment, the maximum remaining time is 40 seconds. That is, the state in which the length of the bar image is displayed the longest (the state shown in FIG. 69(J)) is the maximum remaining time (40 seconds), and the specific image (indicator image TB) is displayed. When the countdown is started (timing is started), the length of the bar image becomes shorter from right to left. The color of the bar image of the indicator image is bright when the remaining time is maximum (40 seconds), dark when the remaining time is minimum (zero seconds), and is maximum (40 seconds). The display mode (display mode by gradation) is such that the color tone changes gradually (or continuously) from the minimum (zero second) to the minimum (zero second). When the color of the bar image of the indicator image is changed in stages, the display mode is such that the color tone darkens every second (display mode by gradation). Further, when the color of the bar image of the indicator image changes continuously, the display mode (gradation display mode) is adopted in which the color tone changes smoothly.

A character CRC that forms the specific image is a character B that may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC forming the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(K), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed until the remaining time becomes the minimum (zero second) by the bar image of the indicator image TB that constitutes the specific image. are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, number "1"). Of course, the character CRC forming the specific image is also displayed.

Based on the fact that the bar image of the indicator image TB that constitutes the specific image makes the remaining time the minimum (zero second) (in other words, the remaining time is the minimum (zero second) by the bar image of the indicator image TB that constitutes the specific image. ), and after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) has passed for the purpose of teasing the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. is suddenly switched from the specific image background image THG4 and displayed on the display screen 7a, the indicator image TB and the character CRC, which constitute the specific image, are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the number " 1”, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a again, and the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the image display device 7. From a stationary state at an upper retracted position (home position), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) again toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a on the front side (front) of the display screen 7a and reverses. It rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees) and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

After a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the first premium image ( A second premium background image THG7 (a so-called “second rainbow background image THG7”) having seven colors different from the first rainbow background image THG3) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a after being switched from the promoted background image THG6, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number "7" in this case), then stopped and fixedly displayed, and the rhythmical winning/losing notification performance A is completed. Note that the second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the win is confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted pattern (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, The fourth pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Subsequently, when the player starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started. .

In FIG. 69(L), as the background image, the promotion background image THG6 dedicated to conveying confirmation of promotion is not switched from the specific image background image THG4, and the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is again changed to the specific image. The indicator image TB and the character CRC that constitute the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the number "1", which is the same pattern, is temporarily stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a again, and further, as shown in FIG. 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) again toward the central position (advancing position) of the display screen 7a in front of the display screen 7a. , may stop for a predetermined time (eg, 15 seconds).

In this case, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses and the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the first premium image ( The first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and then stopped and confirmed. Then, the rhythmical winning/losing notification effect A ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot") starts and ends, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the first reservation The display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the fluctuation. Subsequently, when the player starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started. .

In this way, in the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 69(B) and (C)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 69(D) and (E)), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. The timing at which the winning is notified (that is, the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 69(F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the results of winning and losing are reported. The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. Although it is the same as the time and the variable time in FIGS. 69 (D) and (E), and it is a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern. Actually, the variation time from FIG. 69(F) to FIG. 69(M) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds).

In addition, in the rhythmical win-lose notification effect A, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses after the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, the win-lose result is displayed without forming a reach. Since it can always be notified, when the second special figure reservation is digested one after another in the game state of hitting right, a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) ), the deviation is continuously reported. However, when the winning is continuously announced in such a rhythmic manner, the player is suddenly notified of the winning while making the player think that the variation is naturally a losing. It is possible to make it impossible to know for a moment whether something has happened (that is, by having an unexpected event occur), and it is possible to surprise and delight.

In addition, in the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect A, as shown in FIG. When "2", number "3", number "4", number "5", number "6", number "8" or number "9" is displayed and fixed, the above-mentioned "16R (substantially 13R) V passage expected jackpot” or “16R (actually 15R) V passage expected jackpot”. As described above, the "16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ) so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible. As described above, the "16R (substantially 15R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ) so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(M), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern and are stopped and confirmed with the number "7", the above-mentioned operation is performed. It will be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". As described above, the substantial total number of rounds for the "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: open pattern 31), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 69(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the numeral "1", then as shown in FIG. As shown in (I), when the second movable accessory 15 is operated, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the image display device. By advancing (moving) toward the center position (advancing position) of the display screen 7a in the front (front) of the display screen 7a of No. 7 and stopping, the player can feel the anticipation of "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot". can be given to At this time, even if the player is not informed of the "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are assumed to be the same pattern as shown in FIG. 69(M). Before the number "7" is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. The display screen 7a of the device 7 advances (moves) again toward the central position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees). By stopping the game in this state, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16RV passage scheduled big win". After that, as shown in FIG. 69(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7" as the same pattern, then stop-displayed and confirmed-displayed. , "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot" is announced to the player.

That is, in the rhythmic win-lose notification effect A, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 as the first stage to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) and advances (moves) toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a and stops, and the second movable accessory 15 moves to the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 as the second step. From the stationary state at , it advances (moves) again toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and rotates counterclockwise at a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees), and the second movable accessory 15 can operate in the first stage and the second stage. There is a high interest in the operation of the second movable role 15, and by the operation of the second movable role 15, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantial 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" to "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the game will be a big hit.

In addition, in the rhythmical win/loss notification effect A in this embodiment, reach is formed after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses after the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started. 69(F) to 69(M) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds). The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and the winning is notified is the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. It is the same as the variation time in E), and cannot be varied for a predetermined time (predetermined time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time (77 seconds (77000 milliseconds)) obtained by subtracting this time to FIGS. It is possible to increase the variation of performance after the winning is notified. Concretely, during the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90, each time to perform Figure 69 (H) to Figure 69 (M) will be allocated.

Further, in the rhythmical winning/losing notification effect A according to the present embodiment, in FIG. 69L, the promotion background image THG6 dedicated to conveying confirmation of promotion is not switched from the specific image background image THG4 as the background image, and the first premium image is displayed again. The (first rainbow background image THG3) is switched from the background image for specific image THG4 and displayed, and the indicator image TB and the character CRC that constitute the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a and have the same pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", are again hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and further, as shown in FIG. 69(I). , the second movable accessory 15 moves from the resting position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the center position (advance) of the display screen 7a. position), but remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, and a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses.

In this case, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed, the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in FIG. After the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "1"), it is stop-displayed and confirmed-displayed, and the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect A ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot") starts and ends, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the first reservation The display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the fluctuation. Subsequently, when the player starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started. .

In addition, in the rhythmical winning/losing notification effect A, before the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are confirmed and displayed in the winning mode, after the winning game state occurs. It is now possible to execute an effect of displaying a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state (a specific image composed of an indicator image TB and a character CRC in FIGS. 69(J) and (K)). there is According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are not fixedly displayed in the winning mode, the specific game is played after the winning game state occurs. Since a specific image that suggests the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that will be a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") is displayed, it is assumed that a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) As a result of being confirmed and displayed in a win mode, when a specific game state does not occur (a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" occurs), even if a plurality of decorative symbols are not confirmed and displayed in a win mode (That is, in a state in which a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a win mode), by displaying a specific image, the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") is triggered. A promotion effect of suggesting can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

Also, in the effects (FIGS. 69(J) and (K)) in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A, the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 suggesting a win in FIGS. 69(H) and (I), It is supposed to be done after the production that displays. According to this configuration, first, the effects shown in FIGS. Expectations for occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") can be aroused by promotion effects by the effects shown in FIGS. 69(J) and (K).

In addition, in the production (FIGS. 69(J), (K)) in the rhythmic win/loss notification production A, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a win mode. Even in this state, the display of the specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC can be continued. According to this configuration, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a win mode, the specific image is continuously displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling that the display mode of the decorative pattern may change to another display mode, and to incite the player's expectation for the change of the display mode of the plurality of decorative patterns. .

Further, after the effects (FIGS. 69(J) and (K)) in the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A, in FIG. 69(L), the indicator image TB and the character CRC forming the specific image are hidden from the display screen 7a. (disappears), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", which are the same patterns, are again hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. 2 From the state where the movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is in front (forward) and the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a. advances (moves) again toward , rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., about 30 degrees), stops for a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds), elapses a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds), When the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are the specific patterns of the number "7". ” is displayed to inform the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game of “16RV passage scheduled jackpot”). According to this configuration, when the specific image and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) displayed in the win mode disappear, the movable body suddenly retracts. Since it moves from the position to the advanced position and appears, it is possible to create an effect with an impact by the movable body. Since all of the multiple decorative patterns are displayed as fixed on the number "7", which is a pattern, the promotion effect due to the appearance of the movable body is successful (confirmation of occurrence of a specific game state ("16 RV passage scheduled jackpot") It is possible to emphatically convey to the player the confirmation of the occurrence of a big winning game)).

In addition, in the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect A, the specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC in FIGS. This is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the decorative pattern of ) is displayed in a winning manner. According to this configuration, the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a win mode. In other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time until (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), it is suitable for the timing when the promotion effect starts (approximate guideline for the promotion effect to start) can be displayed in

[Rhythmic win/loss notification production B]
Next, the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B. FIG. Rhythmic hit/loss notification effect B starts all at once (simultaneously) changing effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative patterns, and after a predetermined time (fixed time) elapses, all at once (simultaneously) stop-displays to notify the result of win/lose. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of doing. In other words, the rhythmic win-lose notification effect B is a variable display effect of notifying the win-lose result rhythmically by announcing the win-lose result after a predetermined time (fixed time) has elapsed with the variable effect (variable display) of the plurality of decorative symbols. can be executed.

The rhythmic hit/loss notification effect B in the present embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It should be noted that the image "Right shot" is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, if the image "Right-handed" is an eyesore in the various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to wait until the game state of Right-handed is established and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, as the gaming state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number “8” → number “9” → number “1” → number “2” → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is changed to a display mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern, in the temporary stop display state, has a display mode in which it slowly moves up and down in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, by arranging the sub-variation area so that it is on the front side, the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of the fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. Visibility is not hindered.In addition, the background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that an opaque small size Only the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and are the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. More specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern is continuously displayed (variably displayed), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small middle decorative pattern is the number "2", the small right decorative pattern is the number "3", the small left decorative pattern is the number "5", and the small medium decoration is displayed. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icon and the reserved icon, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently fluctuating as the digestion of the second special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 70B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the front side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not blocked by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Note that the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. (disappear).

Here, white spherical suspension icons 9B are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical pending icons that have not been digested and are stocked. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 after this, and the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd is extinguished, and then the second When the game ball enters the 2 start hole 21, the state where the rhythmical win/loss notification effect B is started, that is, in the game state of hitting to the right, the state in which 3 to 4 reserved icons are always stocked is maintained. It is assumed that there is As a result, the period of the variable rendering (variable display) of the decorative symbols from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative symbols) of the variable rendering (variable display) of the decorative symbols is always set to a predetermined time (fixed time: 3). seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the frontmost) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, even in the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect B, the player can always see it.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon will make the difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represent. For example, among six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red sphere icon, a blue sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As icons other than these, there are a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B have a white aura from the entire icon. The expectation level of winning for the icon of character A emitting a white aura is the same as the expectation level of winning for the icon of character B emitting a white aura. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to win in the order of white aura→green aura→red aura→gold (yellow) aura→seven-colored (rainbow) aura (rich jackpot). is set high.

Next, the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 will be briefly described. It is configured. The first movable accessory 14 can normally rest at a retracted position (home position, see FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). The first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position (home position) toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and stops at an arbitrary advanced position (deployed position) in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), or after moving from the retracted position (home position) to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, it can be stopped (third mode). Furthermore, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) and stops at an arbitrary advanced position (deployed position) in front of the display screen 7a ( (fourth mode), or after moving from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a to the retracted position (home position), the robot can stop (fifth mode). The first movable accessory 14 may be operated to the third mode after being operated to the second mode, or may be operated directly to the third mode without going through the second mode. may be Also, the first movable accessory 14 may be operated to the fourth mode after being operated to the third mode, or may be directly operated to the fifth mode without going through the fourth mode. may be Further, when the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a (that is, the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), another decorative member provided on the game board 2 A part of the first movable role product 14 may be covered by a part of the first movable role product 14 to make the part of the first movable role product 14 difficult to see. Almost the entire object 14 may be covered so that almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be difficult to see, or the first movable accessory 14 may be in a retracted position (home position). As in, almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be easily visually recognized.

In addition, the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the retracted position (home position) and the right side of the display screen 7a ( Right end) can be moved back and forth.

The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the image display device 7 in the vertical direction, and can cover a part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom in the advanced position (deployed position). It has become.

In the game state of hitting to the right, there is a case where the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect B is started. In the state where the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect B is started, as shown in FIG. When the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is completed, the left decorative design 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative design 8C (here, the number "2"), the right decorative design 8R (here, the number "3") ) are stopped all at once (at the same time), and along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the display screen 7a displays the background image for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, immediately before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". , and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". That is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical pending icon 9B is placed on the fourth pending display position 9Bd, and a total of four pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a state in which the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a. 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1", that is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design. 8C, the right decorative patterns 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) stop-displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 70(E), the background image THG1 (in this case, the moving image underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the display screen 7a is maintained for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". , and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". That is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical pending icon 9B is placed on the fourth pending display position 9Bd, and a total of four pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a state in which the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a. 8L is stop-displayed with the number "3", middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "1", and right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "2", that is, left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design. 8C, the right decorative patterns 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) stop-displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(F), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 70(G), the background image THG1 (here, the moving image underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is held for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and a win is announced. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", which is the same pattern, without forming reach and without developing into super reach. be. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. ), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and the deviation is notified, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C according to FIGS. 70(F) and (G). , and the timing at which the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the same pattern and the winning is notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70(H), a first premium background image THG3 (so-called “first rainbow background image THG3”) having seven colors as a background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, and the background image THG1 (here, , Underground image of moving image), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" which is the same pattern, are displayed. is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the image "Right-handed" that was arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd arranged below are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the win is confirmed.

When a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 is displayed on the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 70(I). It moves toward the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) from a resting position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, when the first movable accessory 14 is completely moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. The number "1" reappears and is temporarily stopped, and a specific image composed of the character CRC on the surface (front) of the coin is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as a left decoration. The specific image background image THG4, which is arranged and displayed on the front side of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and can enhance the visibility of the specific image, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as the first premiere. The display is switched from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the image THG3. The specific image background image THG4 is a dark color (for example, gray or black) when the specific image configured by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front) of the coin is expressed in a bright color. In addition to colors close to gray and colors close to black), it may be a single color, a combination of multiple dark colors, or an effect that does not hinder the visibility of a specific image. It may be configured by arranging images. Further, the specific image background image THG4 is a bright color (for example, white color) when the specific image formed by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front) of the coin is expressed in a dark color. In addition to white, it is mainly composed of a color close to white), which may be a single color or a combination of multiple bright colors, and an effect image is arranged so as not to hinder the visibility of the specific image. may be configured.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image moves along the lower edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. When it rolls counterclockwise toward the lower left corner of the display screen 7a and reaches the left side, it rolls counterclockwise along the left side toward the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and reaches the upper side. When it reaches the right side by rolling counterclockwise toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a along the When it reaches the lower side, it stops rolling. That is, the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image rolls around the display screen 7a.

In this embodiment, the time (hereinafter referred to as "rolling time") required for the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a. Now it is 40 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image starts rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a, the countdown starts (timekeeping starts). , the remaining time is indicated by the position where the coin is displayed.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image is the character B that may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(L), the time (rolling time ) becomes the minimum remaining time (zero seconds), in other words, until the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and completes a circuit. , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (the number "1" in this case) and are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Based on the fact that the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a (in other words, the coin forming the specific image is After the character CRC attached to the surface (front) rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and completes one turn, a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) is provided for the purpose of teasing the display of the final promotion result. 70(M), a promotion background image THG6 exclusively for conveying confirmation of promotion is suddenly switched from the specific image background image THG4 and displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. The character CRC attached to the surface (front) disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed also disappear from the display screen 7a. ), the first movable accessory 14, which is already stationary on the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, takes a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) to retreat to the left side of the image display device 7. Move toward a position (home position).

When the first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position (home position) again from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), as shown in FIG. Then, a second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) as a background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as an elevated background image. The display is switched from THG6, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and then stopped and confirmed and displayed rhythmically. Win/lose notification effect B ends. Note that the second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the win is confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted pattern (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, The fourth pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Subsequently, when the player starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started. .

In FIG. 70(M), as the background image, the promotion background image THG6 dedicated to conveying confirmation of promotion is not switched from the specific image background image THG4, and the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is again changed to the specific image. 70(I), the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14, which is in a stationary state on the right side (right end) of 7a, does not move toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, and remains on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , and does not move at all toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed, the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in FIG. After the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "1"), it is stop-displayed and confirmed-displayed, and the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect B is completed.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot") starts and ends, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the first reservation The display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the fluctuation. Subsequently, when the player starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started. .

In this way, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 70(B) and (C)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 70(D) and (E)), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. The timing at which the winning is notified (that is, the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 70(F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the results of winning and losing are reported. The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. 70(F) and (G) are aligned in the same pattern and the winning is notified varies according to FIGS. 70(B) and (C). Although it is the same as the time and the variable time in FIGS. 70 (D) and (E), and it is a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern. Actually, the variation time from FIG. 70(F) to FIG. 70(N) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds).

In addition, in the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect B, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses after the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, the win/loss result is displayed without forming a reach. Since it can always be notified, when the second special figure reservation is digested one after another in the game state of hitting right, a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) ), the deviation is continuously reported. However, when the winning is continuously announced in such a rhythmic manner, the player is suddenly notified of the winning while making the player think that the variation is naturally a losing. It is possible to make it impossible to know for a moment whether something has happened (that is, by having an unexpected event occur), and it is possible to surprise and delight.

In addition, in the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect B, as shown in FIG. When "2", number "3", number "4", number "5", number "6", number "8" or number "9" is displayed and fixed, the above-mentioned "16R (substantially 13R) V passage expected jackpot” or “16R (actually 15R) V passage expected jackpot”. As described above, the "16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ) so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible. As described above, the "16R (substantially 15R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : open pattern 32 ) so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(N), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern and are stopped and confirmed with the number "7", the above-mentioned operation is performed. It will be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". As described above, the substantial total number of rounds for the "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd prize-winning mouth 35 for 29.5 seconds at the maximum per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize winning opening 30 is easily possible.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 70(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the numeral "1", then, as shown in FIG. As shown in (I), by activating the first movable accessory 14, the first movable accessory 14 changes from a state in which the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. By moving toward the right side (right end) of , it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". At this point, even if the player is not informed of the "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are assumed to be the same pattern as shown in FIG. 70(N). Before the number "7" is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. By moving toward the retracted position (home position) of , it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16 RV passage scheduled big win". After that, as shown in FIG. 70(N), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7" as the same pattern, then stop-displayed and confirmed-displayed. , "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot" is announced to the player.

That is, in the rhythmic win-lose notification effect B, the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a from the state of resting at the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as the first stage. and stop, and the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as the second step. Since the first movable role 14 can be operated in the first step and the second step, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable role 14 in the first place. 1 By the operation of the movable accessory 14, the player is given a sense of expectation that the ``16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot'' or the ``16R (substantial 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot'' will become a ``16RV passage scheduled jackpot''. be able to.

In addition, in the rhythmical win/loss notification effect B in the present embodiment, reach is formed after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed since the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern was started. 70(F) to 70(N) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds), but the The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and the winning is notified is the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. It is the same as the variation time in E), and cannot be varied for a predetermined time (predetermined time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time (77 seconds (77000 milliseconds)) obtained by subtracting this time to FIGS. It is possible to increase the variation of performance after the winning is notified. Concretely, while the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 is in effect, it allocates each time to perform FIG. 70(H) to FIG. 70(N).

In addition, in the rhythmical winning/losing notification effect B, before the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are confirmed and displayed in the winning mode, after the winning game state occurs. Execute a first effect (a specific image configured by adding a character CRC to the surface (front) of a coin in FIGS. 70(J) to (L)) for displaying a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state. You can do it. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are not fixedly displayed in the winning mode, the specific game is played after the winning game state occurs. Since a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that will be a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") is displayed, it is assumed that a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) As a result of being confirmed and displayed in a win mode, when a specific game state does not occur (a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" occurs), even if a plurality of decorative symbols are not confirmed and displayed in a win mode (That is, in a state in which a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a win mode), by displaying a specific image, the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot"). A promotion effect of suggesting can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, in the effects (FIGS. 70(J) to (L)) in the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect B, the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 suggesting a win in FIGS. 70(H) and (I), It is supposed to be done after the production that displays. According to this configuration, first, the effects shown in FIGS. Expectations for occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") can be aroused by promotion effects by the effects shown in FIGS. 70(J) to (L).

In addition, in the production (FIGS. 70 (J) to (L)) in the rhythmic winning/losing notification production B, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a win mode. Even in this state, the display of the specific image composed of the character CRC on the surface (front) of the coin can be continued. According to this configuration, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a win mode, the specific image is continuously displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling that the display mode of the decorative pattern may change to another display mode, and to incite the player's expectation for the change of the display mode of the plurality of decorative patterns. .

Further, after the effects (FIGS. 70(J) to (L)) in the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect B, in FIG. 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed also disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. The first movable accessory 14, which is in a stationary state at (right end), moves toward a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and When the first movable accessory 14 returns to the retreat position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a period of (for example, 15 seconds), a specific game state occurs ("16 RV scheduled to pass Since all of the multiple decorative patterns are displayed together in the number "7", which is a specific pattern that conveys the occurrence of a jackpot game that will be a "jackpot", the success of the promotion effect due to the appearance of the movable body (specific It is possible to emphatically convey to the player the confirmation of the occurrence of the game state (confirmation of occurrence of a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot").

In addition, in the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect B, the specific images formed by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front) of the coin in FIGS. This is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) is confirmed and displayed in a win mode. According to this configuration, the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a win mode. In other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time until (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), it is suitable for the time when the promotion effect starts (approximate guideline for the promotion effect to start) can be displayed in

[Rhythmic win/loss notification production C]
Next, the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C. FIG. In the rhythmical win/lose notification effect C, the variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative patterns is started all at once (simultaneously), and after a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed, the win/lose notification effect is reported by stopping the display all at once (simultaneously). It is possible to execute a variable display effect of doing. In other words, the rhythmic win-lose notification effect C is a variable display effect of notifying the win-lose result rhythmically by announcing the win-lose result after a predetermined time (fixed time) has elapsed with a variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols. can be executed.

The rhythmic hit/loss notification effect C in the present embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It should be noted that the image "Right shot" is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, if the image "Right-handed" is an eyesore in the various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to wait until the game state of Right-handed is established and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, as the game state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, by arranging the sub-variation area so that it is on the front side, the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of the fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. Visibility is not hindered.In addition, the background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that an opaque small size Only the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and are the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be varied (variable display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small middle decorative pattern is the number "2", the small right decorative pattern is the number "3", the small left decorative pattern is the number "5", and the small medium decoration is displayed. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icon and the reserved icon, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently fluctuating as digestion of the second special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 71B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the front side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not blocked by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Note that the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. (disappears).

Here, white spherical suspension icons 9B are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical pending icons that have not been digested and are stocked. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 after this, and the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd is extinguished, and then the second When the game ball enters the 2 start hole 21, the state where the rhythmical win/loss notification effect C is started, that is, in the game state of hitting to the right, the state in which 3 to 4 reserved icons are always stocked is maintained. It is assumed that there is As a result, the period of the variable rendering (variable display) of the decorative symbols from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative symbols) of the variable rendering (variable display) of the decorative symbols is always set to a predetermined time (fixed time: 3). seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the frontmost) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, the player can always see the rhythmic win-lose notification effect C as well.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in the shapes and colors of the icons can be used to determine the difference in the degree of expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represent. For example, among the six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As icons other than these, there are a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B have a white aura from the entire icon. The expectation level of winning of the icon of character A emitting a white aura and the expectation level of winning of the icon of character B emitting a white aura are the same as those of the white spherical icon. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to win in the order of white aura→green aura→red aura→gold (yellow) aura→seven-colored (rainbow) aura (rich jackpot). is set high.

Next, the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 will be briefly described. It is configured. The first movable accessory 14 can normally rest at a retracted position (home position, see FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). The first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position (home position) toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and stops at an arbitrary advanced position (deployed position) in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), or after moving from the retracted position (home position) to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, it can be stopped (third mode). Furthermore, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) and stops at an arbitrary advanced position (deployed position) in front of the display screen 7a ( (fourth mode), or after moving from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a to the retracted position (home position), the robot can stop (fifth mode). The first movable accessory 14 may be operated to the third mode after being operated to the second mode, or may be operated directly to the third mode without going through the second mode. may be Also, the first movable accessory 14 may be operated to the fourth mode after being operated to the third mode, or may be directly operated to the fifth mode without going through the fourth mode. may be Further, when the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a (that is, the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), another decorative member provided on the game board 2 A part of the first movable role product 14 may be covered by a part of the first movable role product 14 to make the part of the first movable role product 14 difficult to see. Almost the entire object 14 may be covered so that almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be difficult to see, or the first movable accessory 14 may be in a retracted position (home position). As in, almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be easily visually recognized.

In addition, the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the retracted position (home position) and the right side of the display screen 7a ( Right end) can be moved back and forth.

The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the image display device 7 in the vertical direction, and can cover a part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom in the advanced position (deployed position). It has become.

In the game state of hitting to the right, there is a case where the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C is started. In the state where the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect C is started, as shown in FIG. When the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is completed, the left decorative design 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative design 8C (here, the number "2"), the right decorative design 8R (here, the number "3") ) are stopped all at once (at the same time), and along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the background image THG1 (here, the moving image underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is held for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, immediately before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". , and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". That is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical pending icon 9B is placed on the fourth pending display position 9Bd, and a total of four pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a. 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1", that is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design. 8C, the right decorative patterns 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) stop-displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 71(E), the background image THG1 (in this case, the moving image underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is held for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". , and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". That is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical pending icon 9B is placed on the fourth pending display position 9Bd, and a total of four pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a. 8L is stop-displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "2", that is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design. 8C, the right decorative patterns 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) stop-displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71(F), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. The icon 9B is placed at the second reservation display position 9Bd, and the reservation icon 9B placed at the fourth reservation display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third reservation display position 9Bd and is placed at the third reservation display position 9Bd. state, and the pending icon 9B is not placed at the fourth pending display position. As a result, three pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 71(G), the background image THG1 (in this case, the moving image underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is held for a predetermined time (a predetermined time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from translucent to opaque again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and a win is announced. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", which is the same pattern, without forming reach and without developing into super reach. be. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. ), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and the deviation is notified, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIGS. 71(F) and (G). , and the timing at which the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the same pattern and the winning is notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 71(H), a first premium background image THG3 (so-called “first rainbow background image THG3”) having seven colors as a background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, and the background image THG1 (here, , Underground image of moving image), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" which is the same pattern, are displayed. is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and the image "Right-handed" that has been arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd arranged below are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the win is confirmed.

When a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 is displayed on the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 71(I). It moves toward the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) from a resting position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, when the first movable accessory 14 is completely moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. appears again with the number "1" and is temporarily stopped, and the character CRC is added to the surface (front) of the coin and partially covered at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The specific image configured by arranging the countdown image NJ is arranged and displayed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the visibility of the specific image can be improved. The specific image background image THG4 that can be displayed is suddenly switched from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium image THG3, to be displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image background image THG4 is a bright color specific image formed by adding a character CRC to the surface (front) of the coin and arranging a countdown image NJ so as to partially cover the character CRC. When it is expressed, it is mainly composed of dark colors (e.g., gray and black, as well as colors close to gray and colors close to black), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple dark colors. Alternatively, an effect image may be arranged so as not to hinder the visibility of the specific image. The specific image background image THG4 is composed of a character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ arranged so as to partially cover the character CRC. When it is expressed as a color, it is mainly composed of bright colors (for example, in addition to white, colors close to white), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple bright colors. Alternatively, the effect image may be arranged so as not to hinder the visibility of the specific image.

Specifically, the specific image composed of the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC can be applied to the entire surface (front) of the coin. A character CRC is attached, and a countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover part of the character CRC under the surface (front) of the coin.

Here, with regard to the coin that constitutes the specific image, a vertical line that passes through the top and bottom points of the coin (hereinafter simply referred to as the "vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image") and the leftmost point of the coin. and the rightmost point (hereinafter simply referred to as "horizontal line of the coin forming the specific image") and the intersection point is defined as the center point (hereinafter simply referred to as "center point").

As for the countdown image NJ, a number image to be counted down (clocked) is displayed in a circular shape. The vertical line of the countdown image NJ forming the specific image") matches the vertical line of the coin forming the specific image. As for the countdown image NJ, a horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circular shape (hereinafter simply referred to as "horizontal line of the countdown image NJ forming the specific image") and the coin shape forming the specific image. The horizontal line does not match and is parallel to the horizontal line, and the horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circle is located below the horizontal line of the coin forming the specific image.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image rotates counterclockwise and clockwise around the central point, and such rotation is repeated. The display mode is such that the character CRC also swings in conjunction with the swinging of the coin. On the other hand, the countdown image NJ, which constitutes the specific image arranged so as to partially cover the character CRC, is arranged on the surface (front) of the coin, but unlike the character CRC, the countdown image NJ is interlocked with the swing of the coin. When the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ forming the specific image shifts to the left of the vertical line of the coin forming the specific image. When the coin rotates clockwise around the central point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ forming the specific image is translated to the right of the vertical line of the coin forming the specific image.

Even if the vertical line of the countdown image NJ forming the specific image moves leftward or rightward parallel to the vertical line of the coin forming the specific image, the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ forming the specific image and the specific image form the specific image. The distance between the horizontal line of the coin and the distance dimension is not changed. In other words, the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image simply moves horizontally to the left when the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point, and moves simply to the right when the coin rotates clockwise around the center point. It is designed to move horizontally to

A number image displayed in a circular shape in the countdown image NJ is a number image to be counted down (clocked), and in this embodiment, it is 40 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image and the countdown image NJ are displayed on the display screen 7a, the countdown is started (timekeeping is started). , and countdown images NJ indicate the remaining time.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image is the character B that may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin forming the specific image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 71(K) and 71(L), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed until the number image counted down (clocked) by the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image reaches zero seconds. , the right decorative pattern 8R is maintained to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "1").

Based on the fact that the number images counted down (timed) in the countdown image NJ forming the specific image become zero seconds (in other words, the number image counted down (timed) in the countdown image NJ forming the specific image becomes zero seconds, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses for the purpose of teasing the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. is suddenly switched from the specific image background image THG4 and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character CRC and the countdown image NJ attached to the surface (front face) of the coin constituting the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a, temporarily stopping. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been displayed also disappear from the display screen 7a, and in FIG. The first movable accessory 14 in the state moves toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

When the first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position (home position) again from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), as shown in FIG. Then, a second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) as a background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as an elevated background image. The display is switched from THG6, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and then stopped and confirmed and displayed rhythmically. Win/lose notification effect C ends. Note that the second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the win is confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted pattern (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, The fourth pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Subsequently, when the player starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started. .

In FIG. 71(M), the background image THG6 dedicated to conveying confirmation of promotion does not switch from the specific image background image THG4 as the background image, and the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) again becomes the specific image. 71(I), the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14, which is in a stationary state on the right side (right end) of 7a, does not move toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, and remains on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , and does not move toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed, the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in FIG. After the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "1"), it is stop-displayed and confirmed-displayed, and the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect C ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot") starts and ends, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the first reservation The display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the fluctuation. Subsequently, when the player starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started. .

In this manner, in the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect C, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 71(B) and (C)), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 71(D) and (E)), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. The timing at which the winning is notified (that is, the variable time according to FIGS. 71 (F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined time (a fixed time: 3 Seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the results of winning and losing are reported. The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. Although it is the same as the time and the variable time in FIGS. 71 (D) and (E), and it is a predetermined time (a fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern. Actually, the variation time from FIG. 71(F) to FIG. 71(N) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds).

In addition, in the rhythmical win-lose notification effect C, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses after the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, the win-lose result is displayed without forming a reach. Since it can be notified without fail, when the second special figure reservation is digested one after another in the game state of hitting to the right, a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) ), the deviation is continuously reported. However, when the winning is continuously announced in such a rhythmic manner, the player is suddenly notified of the winning while making the player think that the variation is naturally a losing. It is possible to make it impossible to know for a moment whether something has happened (that is, by having an unexpected event occur), so that it can surprise and delight.

In addition, in the rhythmical win-lose notification effect C, as shown in FIG. When "2", number "3", number "4", number "5", number "6", number "8" or number "9" is displayed and fixed, the above-mentioned "16R (substantially 13R) V passage expected jackpot” or “16R (substantially 15R) V passage expected jackpot”. As described above, the "16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ) so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible. As described above, the "16R (substantially 15R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ) so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(N), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern and are stopped and confirmed with the number "7", the above-mentioned operation is performed. It will be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". As described above, the substantial total number of rounds for the "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd prize-winning mouth 35 for 29.5 seconds at the maximum per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize winning opening 30 is easily possible.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 71(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the number "1", then as shown in FIG. As shown in (I), by activating the first movable accessory 14, the first movable accessory 14 changes from a state in which the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. By moving toward the right side (right end) of , it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". At this point, even if the player is not informed of the "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", as shown in FIG. Before the number "7" is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. By moving toward the retracted position (home position) of , it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16 RV passage scheduled big win". After that, as shown in FIG. 71(N), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7" as the same pattern, then stop-displayed and confirmed-displayed. , "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot" is announced to the player.

That is, in the rhythmic win-lose notification effect C, the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a from the state of resting at the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as the first stage. and stop, and the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as the second step. Since the first movable role 14 can be operated in the first step and the second step, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable role 14, 1 By the operation of the movable accessory 14, the player is given a sense of expectation that the ``16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot'' or the ``16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot'' will become a ``16RV passage scheduled jackpot''. be able to.

In addition, in the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect C in this embodiment, reach is formed after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses after the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started. 71(F) to 71(N) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds), but the The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and the winning is notified is the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. It is the same as the variation time in E), and cannot be varied for a predetermined time (predetermined time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time (77 seconds (77000 milliseconds)) obtained by subtracting this time to FIGS. It is possible to increase the variations of performance after the winning is notified. Concretely, while the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 is in effect, it allocates each time to perform the steps shown in FIGS. 71(H) to 71(N).

In addition, in the rhythmical winning/losing notification effect C, before the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are confirmed and displayed in the winning mode, after the winning game state occurs. A character CRC is added to the surface (front) of the coin and part of the character CRC is covered in the first effect (FIGS. 71(J) to (L)) of displaying a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state. A specific image configured by arranging the countdown image NJ as shown above can be executed. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are not fixedly displayed in the winning mode, the specific game is played after the winning game state occurs. Since a specific image that suggests the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that will be a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") is displayed, it is assumed that a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) As a result of being confirmed and displayed in a win mode, when a specific game state does not occur (a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" occurs), even if a plurality of decorative symbols are not confirmed and displayed in a win mode (That is, in a state in which a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a win mode), by displaying a specific image, the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") is triggered. A promotion effect of suggesting can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, in the effects (FIGS. 71(J) to (L)) in the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C, the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 suggesting a win in FIGS. 71(H) and (I), It is supposed to be done after the production that displays. According to this configuration, first, the effects shown in FIGS. Expectations for the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") can be aroused by promotion effects by the effects shown in FIGS. 71(J) to (L).

In addition, in the production (FIGS. 71(J) to (L)) in the rhythmic winning/losing notification production C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a win mode. Even in this state, the display of the specific image composed of the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ arranged so as to partially cover the character CRC can be continued. It has become. According to this configuration, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a win mode, the specific image is continuously displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling that the display mode of the decorative pattern may change to another display mode, and to incite the player's expectation for the change of the display mode of the plurality of decorative patterns. .

After the effects (FIGS. 71(J) to (L)) in the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C, in FIG. NJ disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, also disappear from the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14, which is in a stationary state on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, takes a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) to move toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. When the first movable accessory 14 returns to the retreat position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), a specific game state occurs. (Occurrence of a jackpot game that will be a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot") Since all of the plurality of decorative patterns are displayed in a fixed manner with the number "7", which is a specific pattern that conveys, promotion due to the appearance of the movable body It is possible to emphatically inform the player of the success of the effect (confirmation of occurrence of a specific game state (confirmation of occurrence of a jackpot game of "16RV passage scheduled jackpot")).

In addition, in the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect C, a character CRC is added to the surface (front) of the coin in FIGS. The specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are confirmed and displayed in a win mode. . According to this configuration, the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a win mode. In other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time until (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), it is suitable for the time when the promotion effect starts (approximate guideline for the promotion effect to start) can be displayed in

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to report the result of winning or losing in the rhythmic win-loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win-loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win-loss notification effect C of FIG. An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C and a right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) is provided, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern are provided. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same time without forming a reach for each variable display by 8R (a set of decorative patterns), and the win-lose result is determined. The first effect to be notified (Figs. 69 (B) to (G) for the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A, Figs. 70 (B) to (G) for the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B, and Fig. 71 (B) for the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C ~ (G)) can be executed in a so-called right-handed game state (specific game state), which is different from the normal game state, without being executed in the so-called left-handed game state (normal game state). . According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L without forming a reach for each variable display by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns). The pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) can be temporarily stopped at the same time to rhythmically notify the winning result. As a result, for example, when a loss is continuously reported rhythmically, the player is suddenly notified of a win while making the player think that the change is naturally a loss. On the other hand, it is possible to momentarily forget what happened (that is, by having an unexpected event occur), and it is possible to surprise and delight. It is possible to perform variable display by such unprecedented novel left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern, and reduce monotony due to fluctuation of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern. It is designed to be able to contribute to Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. 8C, the time from the start of the variable display by the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) to the notification of the winning result of "hit" or "lose" is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decoration. It is fixed time without being changed for each variable display by the pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns). According to this configuration, the win-lose result of "hit" or "lose" is notified at regular time intervals, so that the win-lose result can be known rhythmically.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same time, and the effect of notifying "loss" as a result of winning, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R ( (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same time, and a "hit" is notified as a result of winning. According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L without forming a reach for each variable display by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns). When the decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) is temporarily stopped at the same time and the win-lose result is reported, it becomes either "hit" or "lose", so the win-lose is continuously reported rhythmically as the win-lose result. It is designed to be able to suddenly announce a win while making the player think that the change is also a loss. As a result, it is possible to realize a mode in which a win is suddenly reported when a loss is continuously and rhythmically reported. This makes it possible for the player not to know what happened for a moment (that is, an unexpected event occurs), which contributes to increasing the surprise of the win.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. (the second movable accessory 15 in the rhythmic win-loss notification effect A, the first movable accessory 14 in the rhythmic win-loss notification effect B, and the first movable accessory 14 in the rhythmic win-loss notification effect C). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are displayed temporarily temporarily by the production of , and a win is announced as a result of a win. The second effect that operates in the mode (the second mode in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position in FIG. 69 (I) in the rhythmical hit/loss notification effect A; ), the first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds). In I), the first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds). It's becoming In this embodiment, as described above, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, which are movable bodies, include the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns). ) are aligned in the same pattern and activated during the temporary stop display, compared to when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated, among the plurality of types of wins, the game is played more. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that the player will be rewarded with a profit. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 . As a result, in a state in which the hit is reported as a result of winning by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 are movable. By making the player pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory 15 is activated, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the player will be promoted when a profit is given.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the second effect in the rhythmic win-lose notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win-lose notification effect B of FIG. A third effect that operates in a second win mode different from the mode (in the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect A in FIG. 69(L), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees) at the advanced position. ) and stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds). In FIG. right end) to the retreat position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) (fifth mode). 1 movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) (first 5 modes)) can be executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, which are movable bodies, include the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of sets of decorative patterns). ) are aligned in the same pattern and activated during the temporary stop display, compared to when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated, among the plurality of types of wins, the game is played more. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that the player will be rewarded with a profit. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 . In a state in which a hit is reported as a result of a hit or drop, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, which are movable bodies, are actuated to enter the first winning mode, and then the movable bodies are actuated again. By making the player pay attention to whether or not the win is made, the player is provided with an unprecedented performance that the movable body can operate in two steps in a state in which the win is announced as the result of the win/lose. It is possible to make the player expect whether or not the player will be promoted when the profit is awarded.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect in the rhythmic win-lose notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win-lose notification effect B of FIG. An effect is included in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) which are temporarily stopped and displayed are stopped and displayed at the same time. According to this configuration, after the third effect of operating the movable body in the second winning mode different from the first winning mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative patterns 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative patterns 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative patterns 8C, and the left decorative patterns 8L, the middle decorative patterns 8C, and the left decorative patterns 8L, the middle decorative patterns 8C, and the left decorative patterns 8L, and the middle decorative patterns 8C at the timing when the player is expected to be promoted by giving more profit to the player by the two-step operation of the movable body. The right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) can be stop-displayed at the same time to notify whether or not the player will be promoted.

[Modification]
Modifications of the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
69, the rhythmic win-lose notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win-lose notification effect C of FIG. . In other words, it was performed in the so-called right-handed game state (specific game state different from the normal game state). However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called left-handed game state (normal game state).

[Modification 2]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. The winning result of "hit" or "missing" by the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of sets of decorative patterns) was announced. However, the win/lose result may include a "minor win" in addition to the "win" or "lose". In this way, it is possible to increase the variations displayed as the winning/losing result, and the player is informed which of the "win" or "minor win" is the hit by the stationary displayed left decorative symbols 8L, It is possible to draw attention to the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of sets of decorative patterns).

[Modification 3]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. By the success of the promotion effect using , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are confirmed and displayed together with the same pattern of the number "7". Players were told that a big win game called "16RV Pass Scheduled Big Win" will occur. However, even if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 appear, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are the same number "7". The pattern is not promoted (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are not switched from the number "1" to the number "7" in the same pattern) ), and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are aligned with the same pattern of the number "7". can be By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 4]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. (Display screen 7a), the remaining time until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are confirmed and displayed in the same pattern (that is, in a win mode) (approximate remaining time). At this time, the remaining time (approximate time), for example, a voice saying “There are 5 seconds remaining” may be played from the speaker 67 . In this way, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) can be communicated to the player by the specific image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the sound played from the speaker 67. (Approximate remaining time) can be easily grasped.

[Modification 5]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. (Display screen 7a), the remaining time until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are confirmed and displayed in the same pattern (that is, in a win mode) (approximate remaining time). However, a transparent light guide plate may be provided in front of the display screen 7a to display the specific image on the transparent light guide plate. In this case, since there is a limit to the number of images that can be displayed on the light guide plate, the light guide plate does not notify the remaining time (approximate remaining time) every time one second elapses. Remaining 5 seconds” and “remaining 0 seconds” are displayed. By arranging a plurality of full-color LEDs around a transparent light guide plate, the light emission of the full-color LEDs changes the color every time the remaining time (approximate remaining time) is shortened, for example, "15 seconds remaining" is bright. It may be displayed in white, "5 seconds left" in bright blue, and "0 seconds left" in red. Even if the remaining time (approximate remaining time) appears in a predetermined color, various images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized through the transparent light guide plate.

[Modification 6]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. Display of a specific image composed of an indicator image TB and a character CRC even in a state in which the decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (that is, in a win mode). is continued until the remaining time becomes the minimum (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB, and in FIGS. Even when the decorative patterns 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (that is, in a winning mode), the display of a specific image composed of the character CRC on the surface (front) of the coin is displayed. , until the remaining time (rolling time) for the specific image (character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin) to rotate clockwise around the display screen 7a becomes the minimum (zero seconds). 71 (J) to (L) of the rhythmic hit/loss notification effect C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are aligned in the same pattern (that is, the winning A countdown image NJ is a display of a specific image configured by placing a character CRC on the surface (front) of a coin and disposing a countdown image NJ so as to cover a part of the character CRC. It continued until the number image counted down (timed) at the time reached zero seconds. However, the display of the specific image may be terminated before zero seconds (an arbitrary time from when the clock reaches zero seconds). In this case, a special promotion background image THG6 for conveying confirmation of promotion is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a after switching from the specific image background image THG4 capable of enhancing the visibility of the specific image, and the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a. , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, also disappear from the display screen 7a. From the resting position (home position) of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) again toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a and counterclockwise. It rotates by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees) and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In addition, in the rhythmic win-lose notification effect B and the rhythmic win-lose notification effect C, the third player that has already stopped on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. 70(I) and FIG. One movable accessory 14 moves toward a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds). In this way, the second movable accessory 15 or the first movable accessory 14 suddenly advances before the zero second (an arbitrary time from when the time is counted until the zero second is reached), thereby creating a promotion effect. The occurrence can be emphasized as an impactful production. The sub-control board 90 is designed to determine an arbitrary time from when the time is counted until it reaches zero seconds.

[Modification 7]
The character CRC of the specific image in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of FIG. was becoming That is, the character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appeared on the display screen 7a as the character CRC of the specific image. However, the character CRC of the specific image may be a promotion effect character that appears only in the rhythmic win/lose notification effects A to C, or a premium character that appears when a so-called premium image is displayed may be used as a rhythmical win/loss notification effect. It may also appear in A to C. In either case, since the character is rarely seen, it can contribute to further enhancing the effect of the rhythmic hit/loss notification effects A to C. FIG.

[Modification 8]
69, the rhythmic win-loss notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win-loss notification effect C of FIG. 71 are performed in the right-handed game state. It was assumed that four reserved icons were kept in stock. As the game state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, it was the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time). In this game state of hitting to the right, in a state in which 3 to 4 reserved icons are always stocked, a variable performance (variable display) of decorative symbols is started, and left decorative symbols 8L, middle decorative symbols 8C, and right decorative symbols 8R are displayed. All at once (simultaneously) changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and becoming a display mode that fluctuates at high speed, the left The decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) is reached. Immediately before the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped all at once (simultaneously), and a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decoration is displayed. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). In this way, in the game state of hitting to the right, in a state in which 3 to 4 reserved icons are always stocked, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started and stopped (stopped display of the decorative symbols). The period of the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is always the above-mentioned predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)). However, in the game state of hitting to the right, regardless of the number of reserved icons in stock, the variation of the decorative symbols from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative symbols) of the variable effect of the decorative symbols (variation display). The duration of the effect (variable display) may always be the above-mentioned predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

[Modification 9]
The rhythmic win/loss notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C in FIG. may

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a set of decorative symbols capable of informing a winning result,
The normal game is played without executing a first effect of notifying the winning result by temporarily stopping and displaying the set of decorative patterns at the same time without forming reach for each variable display by the set of decorative patterns. It is executable in a specific game state different from the state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
In the first effect, the time from the start of the variable display of the set of decorative symbols to the notification of the winning/losing result is a fixed time that is not changed for each variable display of the set of decorative symbols. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or aspect A7-2,
The first performance includes a performance of temporarily stopping and displaying the set of decorative patterns at the same time to notify a loss as a win-lose result, and a performance of temporarily stopping and displaying the set of decorative patterns at the same time to notify a win as a win-lose result. including directing and
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
having a movable body actuated by an electric drive source;
In a state in which the set of decorative patterns are simultaneously displayed in a temporary stop state by the first effect and a win is reported as a result of a win, a second effect of operating the movable body in the first win mode can be executed. is
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-4,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect of operating the movable body in a second winning mode different from the first winning mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-5,
In the first effect, after the third effect, the set of decorative symbols already temporarily stopped and displayed are simultaneously stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol competition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative pattern competition effect is executed during special pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative symbol competition effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern competition production A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol competition effect A. FIG. This decorative symbol competition effect A is an effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol competition production A, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the decorative symbol variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varied. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big win or not. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R each having the same identifier (number) are stop-displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also called double eyes symbol. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet pattern, it becomes a lost pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), a big hit symbol display effect A is performed. In this big win symbol display effect A, the display screen 7a displays the ally character CRA and the first big win symbol XC1. The first jackpot pattern XC1 is a jackpot pattern in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are even-numbered parallel patterns, suggesting entry into a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot. The teammate character CRA is stopped and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a big hit symbol display effect B is performed. In the big win pattern display performance B, the ally character CRA and the first big win pattern XC1 are continued to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second big win pattern XC2 is displayed under the first big win pattern XC1. The second jackpot pattern XC2 is a jackpot pattern in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are odd-numbered parallel patterns, suggesting entry into a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot. That is, the second jackpot pattern XC2 is a jackpot pattern that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot pattern XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a big hit symbol display effect C is performed. In this big win symbol display effect C, an effect is performed in which the first big win symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first big winning symbol XC1 is closer to the ally character CRA than the second big winning symbol XC2. At this time, the first big winning symbol XC1 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), a big hit symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance D, the first jackpot pattern XC1 returns to the position before approaching the teammate character CRA, and the second jackpot pattern XC2 approaches the teammate character CRA in a switching manner. In other words, an effect is performed in which the second big winning symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first big winning symbol XC1. At this time, the second big winning symbol XC2 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), a big hit symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect E, the first jackpot pattern XC1 is flipped out of the display screen 7a out of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2, and the second jackpot pattern XC2 is displayed on the display screen. It is stopped and displayed at approximately the center of 7a.

[Decorative pattern competition production B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol competition effect B. FIG. This decorative symbol competition effect B is an effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol competition production B, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), the decorative symbol variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varied. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big win or not. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R each having the same identifier (number) are stop-displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also called double eyes symbol. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet pattern, it becomes a lost pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), a big hit symbol display effect A is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect A, the display screen 7a displays the teammate character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1. The first jackpot pattern XC1 is a jackpot pattern in which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are even-numbered parallel patterns, suggesting entry into a time-saving game state after the jackpot. The teammate character CRA is stopped and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a big hit symbol display effect B is performed. In the big win pattern display performance B, the ally character CRA and the first big win pattern XC1 are continued to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second big win pattern XC2 is displayed under the first big win pattern XC1. The second jackpot pattern XC2 is a jackpot pattern in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are odd-numbered parallel patterns, suggesting entry into a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot. That is, the second jackpot pattern XC2 is a jackpot pattern that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot pattern XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), a big hit symbol display effect C is performed. In this big win symbol display effect C, an effect is performed in which the first big win symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first big winning symbol XC1 is closer to the ally character CRA than the second big winning symbol XC2. At this time, the first big winning symbol XC1 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), a big hit symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance D, the first jackpot pattern XC1 returns to the position before approaching the teammate character CRA, and the second jackpot pattern XC2 approaches the teammate character CRA in a switching manner. In other words, an effect is performed in which the second big winning symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first big winning symbol XC1. At this time, the second big winning symbol XC2 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), a big hit symbol display effect E is performed. In this big win symbol display effect E, the first big win symbol XC1 and the second big win symbol XC2 collide with each other. Specifically, the lower side of the first big winning pattern XC1 collides with the upper side of the second big winning pattern XC2, or the positions of the first big winning pattern XC1 and the second big winning pattern XC2 are exchanged, and the first The upper side of the jackpot pattern XC1 collides with the bottom side of the second jackpot pattern XC2, or the first jackpot pattern XC1 moves to the left side of the second jackpot pattern XC2, and the right side of the first jackpot pattern XC1. and the left side of the second jackpot pattern XC2, or the first jackpot pattern XC1 moves to the right side of the second jackpot pattern XC2, and the left side of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2 collide. collides with the right side of Incidentally, when the first big winning symbol XC1 and the second big winning symbol XC2 collide as shown in FIG. 73(F), the three decorative symbols of the first big winning symbol XC1 and the second big winning symbol XC2 , the corresponding decorative patterns collide with each other. For example, the left decorative pattern of the first jackpot pattern XC1 collides with the left decorative pattern of the second jackpot pattern XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), a big win symbol display effect F is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect F, the first jackpot pattern XC1 is flipped out of the display screen 7a out of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2, and the second jackpot pattern XC2 is displayed on the display screen. An effect of enlarging so as to protrude from 7a is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), a big win symbol display effect G is performed. In this big win symbol display effect G, the second big win symbol XC2 is reduced and displayed stopped at substantially the center of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern competition production C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol competition effect C. FIG. This decorative symbol competition effect C is an effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol competition effect C, as shown in FIG. 74(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varied. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big win or not. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R each having the same identifier (number) are stop-displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also called double eyes symbol. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet pattern, it becomes a lost pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), a big hit symbol display effect A is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect A, the display screen 7a displays the teammate character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1. The first jackpot pattern XC1 is a jackpot pattern in which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are even-numbered parallel patterns, suggesting entry into a time-saving game state after the jackpot. The teammate character CRA is stopped and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), a big winning symbol display effect B is performed. In the big win pattern display performance B, the ally character CRA and the first big win pattern XC1 are continued to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second big win pattern XC2 is displayed under the first big win pattern XC1. The second jackpot pattern XC2 is a jackpot pattern in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are odd-numbered parallel patterns, suggesting entry into a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot. That is, the second jackpot pattern XC2 is a jackpot pattern that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot pattern XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), a big hit symbol display effect C is performed. In this big win symbol display effect C, an effect is performed in which the first big win symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first big winning symbol XC1 is closer to the ally character CRA than the second big winning symbol XC2. At this time, the first big winning symbol XC1 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a big hit symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance D, the first jackpot pattern XC1 returns to the position before approaching the ally character CRA, and the second jackpot pattern XC2 approaches the ally character CRA in a switching manner. In other words, an effect is performed in which the second big winning symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first big winning symbol XC1. At this time, the second big winning symbol XC2 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), a big hit symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance E, the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2 are rotated, and the side part is directed to the front so that the front part becomes invisible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), a big hit symbol display effect F is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance F, the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2 collide with each other with the side part facing the front so that the front part cannot be visually recognized. Specifically, the lower side of the first big winning pattern XC1 collides with the upper side of the second big winning pattern XC2, or the positions of the first big winning pattern XC1 and the second big winning pattern XC2 are exchanged, and the first The upper side of the jackpot pattern XC1 collides with the bottom side of the second jackpot pattern XC2, or the first jackpot pattern XC1 moves to the left side of the second jackpot pattern XC2, and the right side of the first jackpot pattern XC1. and the left side of the second jackpot pattern XC2, or the first jackpot pattern XC1 moves to the right side of the second jackpot pattern XC2, and the left side of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2 collide. collides with the right side of When the first big winning symbol XC1 and the second big winning symbol XC2 collide as shown in FIG. 74(G), the three decorative symbols of the first big winning symbol XC1 and the second big winning symbol XC2 The corresponding decorative patterns collide with each other. For example, the left decorative pattern of the first jackpot pattern XC1 collides with the left decorative pattern of the second jackpot pattern XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), a big win symbol display effect G is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect G, the first jackpot pattern XC1 out of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2 is flipped out of the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot pattern XC2 is displayed in front. The image is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a with the side portion facing the front so that the portion becomes invisible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), a big win symbol display effect H is performed. In this big win symbol display effect H, an effect of enlarging the second big win symbol XC2 so as to protrude from the display screen 7a is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), a big hit symbol display effect I is performed. In this big win symbol display performance I, the second big win symbol XC2 is reduced and stopped and displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Modification]
In the decorative symbol competition effect C, in the jackpot symbol display effect G, the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the three decorative patterns of the second jackpot pattern XC2 are displayed, and their front portions are displayed. Collision with the side part facing the front so as not to be visible. However, it is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be adopted. Three decorative patterns of the first jackpot pattern XC1 are arranged toward the inner side so as to be hidden by one decorative pattern, and three decorative patterns of the second jackpot pattern XC2 are hidden by one decorative pattern. Arranged toward the back side, that is, when viewed from the player, one of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and one of the three decorative patterns of the second jackpot pattern XC2. One decorative pattern is arranged so as to be mainly visible, and from this state, the decorative pattern of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the decorative pattern of the second jackpot pattern XC2 correspond to each other. They may collide. In this case, the player selects one decorative symbol displayed in front of the three decorative symbols of the first big win pattern XC1 and one displayed in front of the three decorative symbols of the second big win pattern XC2. Two decorative symbols collide with each other can be visually recognized, but the two decorative symbols behind the decorative pattern displayed in front of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the two decorative patterns displayed in front of the second jackpot pattern XC2. The collision between two decorative patterns on the far side of the decorative pattern on the other side cannot be visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can select one of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot pattern XC1 to be displayed in front and one of the three decorative patterns of the second jackpot pattern XC2 to be displayed in front. Along with the manner in which one displayed decorative pattern collides, the two decorative patterns on the far side of the decorative pattern displayed in front of the first big win pattern XC1 and the two decorative patterns displayed in front of the second big win pattern XC2. It is also possible to make it possible to visually recognize from an oblique direction how the two decorative patterns on the back side of the decorative patterns collide with each other.

In the decorative symbol competition performances A to C, the first big winning symbol XC1 is closer to the teammate character CRA than the second big winning symbol XC2. 2 may be displayed so as to be located on the front side of the big winning symbol XC2. Also, on the contrary, the second big winning symbol XC2 may be displayed so as to be located on the front side of the first big winning symbol XC1.
In addition, in the decorative symbol competition performances A to C, the second big winning symbol XC2 is closer to the teammate character CRA than the first big winning symbol XC1, but in this case, the second big winning symbol XC2. may be displayed so as to be located in front of the first jackpot symbol XC1. Also, on the contrary, the first big winning symbol XC1 may be displayed so as to be positioned closer to the user than the second big winning symbol XC2.

[Effect example]
In the decorative symbol competition effect A of the game machine 1, in the jackpot symbol display effect B, the first big winning symbol XC1 formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are formed. A second big winning pattern XC2 is displayed, after that, in a big winning pattern display performance C, a performance is given to the teammate character CRA so that the first big winning pattern XC1 is closer than the second big winning pattern XC2, and then. In the big win symbol display performance D, the second big win symbol XC2 is brought closer to the ally character CRA than the first big win symbol XC1, and then in the big win symbol display performance E, the first big win. An effect is performed in which the second big winning symbol XC2 is stopped and displayed, out of the symbol XC1 and the second big winning symbol XC2. According to this configuration, after the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2 approach the teammate character CRA, that is, the two jackpot patterns are directed to the teammate character CRA like a competition. Since one jackpot pattern (second jackpot pattern) is determined after the is performed, the player can be thrilled until the final jackpot pattern is determined, and the attraction of the performance when the jackpot is determined. can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition performance B of the gaming machine 1, a big winning symbol display performance E in which the first big winning symbols XC1 and the second big winning symbols XC2 collide is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to further excite the player until the final jackpot pattern is decided, and to improve the interest of the performance when the jackpot is decided. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition effect B of the gaming machine 1, the big win symbol display effect E in which the first big win symbol XC1 collides with the second big win symbol XC2, and the second big win symbol XC2 for the ally character CRA. A jackpot pattern display performance D that is closer than the first jackpot pattern XC1, and a jackpot pattern display performance G in which the second jackpot pattern XC2 out of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2 is stopped and displayed. is performed between According to this configuration, it is possible to further excite the player until the final jackpot pattern is decided, and to improve the interest of the performance when the jackpot is decided. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition effect of the gaming machine 1, the second big winning symbol XC2 becomes a big winning symbol (for example, a variable and fixed big winning symbol) that is more profitable for the player than the first big winning symbol XC1. there is According to this configuration, after the two jackpot patterns are displayed as if they were competing against the ally character CRA, the second jackpot pattern, which is more profitable for the player, is displayed. Great joy can be imparted after the heart-pounding excitement, and the amusement of the performance when the big win is determined can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition effect B of the gaming machine 1, the big win symbol display effect F in which the second big win symbol XC2 expands so as to protrude from the display screen 7a is provided, and the first big win symbol XC1 and the second big win symbol XC2 are displayed. After the colliding jackpot pattern display performance E and before the jackpot pattern display performance G in which the second jackpot pattern XC2 out of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the second jackpot pattern XC2 is stopped and displayed. be According to this configuration, it is possible to further excite the player until the final jackpot pattern is decided, and to improve the interest of the performance when the jackpot is decided. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first jackpot pattern including a plurality of decorative patterns and a second jackpot pattern including a plurality of decorative patterns,
The second display effect is a effect in which the first jackpot pattern is closer to a predetermined place than the second jackpot pattern,
The third display effect is a effect in which the second jackpot pattern is closer to a predetermined place than the first jackpot pattern,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which the second jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, out of the first jackpot pattern and the second jackpot pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, then the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect in which the first jackpot pattern and the second jackpot pattern collide,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed between the third display effect and the fourth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
The second jackpot pattern is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect in which the second jackpot pattern is expanded so as to protrude from the display means,
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the fifth display effect and before the fourth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The logo moving contact effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. FIG. This logo movement contact effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the logo movement contact effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . The logo movement contact effects A to C are executed in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state. It should be noted that it can be executed in the same way in the low-probability-low base state.

[Logo moving contact effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the logo movement contact effect A. FIG. The logo moving contact effect A is a pattern effect for a big win.
First, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Also, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the variation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), logo movement effect A is executed. The logo movement effect A is a effect related to the second movable accessory 15 . The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The advanced positions include an intermediate position covering the vicinity of the central portion of the display screen 7a and a lower position covering the vicinity of the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The logo movement effect A is a effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves as indicated by an arrow Y from the retracted position toward the intermediate position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact effect is a effect in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "1" pattern and "2" pattern. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), the image is displayed in line with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position, so that the image appears as if it is positioned at the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. Make it appear as if the "1" and "2" symbols are touching. Here, an image is displayed in which the "1" pattern and the "2" pattern are crushed in the vertical direction. It should be noted that the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position may be moved up and down in a small width to create an effect that encourages the player not to collapse easily. At this time, the “1” pattern and the “2” pattern may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 . Also, here, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed. This is an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 63 . Here, when the player operates the production button 63, the following production is executed. Even when the effect button 63 is not operated, the next effect is executed when the effective period of the input of the effect button 63 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a logo moving effect B is executed. The logo movement effect B is a effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the middle position to the lower position. This indicates that the "1" and "2" symbols were successfully crushed. Specifically, during the movement of the second movable role product 15 from the intermediate position to the lower position, an image is displayed in which the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol explode and disappear. When the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the left, middle and right performance patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed so as to be below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front. Also, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a jackpot manner. A jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "3" patterns. Also, only the upper part of the "3" pattern is displayed, and the remaining part is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving the effect symbol upward. Specifically, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the jackpot mode are slowly moved upward as indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. At this time, the portion covered with the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. Here, the upper part of the "3" pattern is covered with the second movable accessory 15, making it difficult to see. The "3" symbol moves upward and stops near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the logo moving effect C is executed. The logo movement effect C is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position toward the retracted position. As the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as indicated by the arrow X, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the difficult-to-see state to the easy-to-see state. Here, the second movable accessory 15 moves above the "3" pattern when viewed from the front, making the "3" pattern easier to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Logo moving contact effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining logo movement contact effect B. FIG. The logo movement contact effect B is an effect of a pattern that results in a failure in contrast to the logo movement contact effect A that is a big win.
First, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. In addition, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the variation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), logo movement effect A is executed. The logo movement effect A is a effect related to the second movable accessory 15 . The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled "OARO" and is configured to be vertically movable. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The advanced positions include an intermediate position covering the vicinity of the central portion of the display screen 7a and a lower position covering the vicinity of the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The logo movement effect A is a effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves as indicated by an arrow Y from the retracted position toward the intermediate position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact effect is a effect in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "1" pattern and "2" pattern. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), the image is displayed in line with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position, so that the image appears as if it is positioned at the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. Make it appear as if the "1" and "2" symbols are touching. Here, an image is displayed in which the "1" pattern and the "2" pattern are crushed in the vertical direction. It should be noted that the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position may be moved up and down in a small width to create an effect that encourages the player not to collapse easily. At this time, the “1” pattern and the “2” pattern may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 . Also, here, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed. This is an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 63 . Here, when the player operates the production button 63, the following production is executed. Even when the effect button 63 is not operated, the next effect is executed when the effective period of the input of the effect button 63 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), a logo movement effect D is executed. The logo movement effect D is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the retracted position. This indicates that the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol have failed to be crushed. Concretely, according to the movement of the second movable accessory 15 from the intermediate position to the retracted position, the "1" pattern and the "2" pattern that have been collapsed in the vertical direction are displayed to return to their original states.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), a middle symbol low speed variation effect is executed. In the middle pattern low speed fluctuation performance, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle performance pattern 8C moving downward as indicated by the arrow Y becomes slow and becomes visible. Here, the moving speed of the "5" symbol is slow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped so that the left, middle and right effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol. Also, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Logo movement contact effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the logo movement contact effect C. FIG. The logo moving contact effect C is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are promoted after being informed that a big win has been achieved. Promotion of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R serves as notification of shift to a more advantageous jackpot game. Specifically, it is reported that the 16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot has been won, and the 16RV passing scheduled jackpot is announced by promotion of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped in any order. Also, in that order, two or more of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop at the same time. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode. A jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "2" patterns. The "2" symbol (even number symbol) is a symbol indicating a 16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot. Note that the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the variation are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), logo movement effect A is executed. The logo movement effect A is a effect related to the second movable accessory 15 . The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The advanced positions include an intermediate position covering the vicinity of the central portion of the display screen 7a and a lower position covering the vicinity of the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The logo movement effect A is a effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves as indicated by an arrow Y from the retracted position toward the intermediate position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact effect is a effect in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "2" pattern. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), the image is displayed in line with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position, so that the image appears as if it is positioned at the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. "2" Make it look as if the symbols are touching. Here, an image is displayed in which the "2" pattern is crushed in the vertical direction. It should be noted that the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position may be moved up and down in a small width to create an effect that encourages the player not to collapse easily. At this time, the “2” pattern may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), a logo movement effect B is executed. The logo movement effect B is a effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the middle position to the lower position. This indicates that the "2" symbol has been successfully crushed. Specifically, during the movement of the second movable accessory 15 from the intermediate position to the lower position, an image is displayed in which the symbol "2" explodes and disappears. When the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the left, middle and right performance patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed so as to be below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front. Also, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a jackpot mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "3" patterns. The "3" symbol (odd number symbol) is a symbol indicating that it is a 16RV passage scheduled jackpot. That is, at this stage, the "2" symbol displayed in the jackpot mode has been promoted to the "3" symbol. Here, only the upper portion of the "3" symbol is displayed, and the remaining portion is framed out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving the effect symbol upward. Specifically, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the jackpot mode are slowly moved upward as indicated by the arrow Z and displayed. At this time, the portion covered with the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. Here, the upper part of the "3" pattern is covered with the second movable accessory 15, making it difficult to see. The "3" symbol moves upward and stops near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), the logo moving effect C is executed. The logo movement effect C is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position toward the retracted position. As the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as indicated by the arrow X, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the difficult-to-visible state to the easy-to-visible state. Here, the second movable accessory 15 moves above the "3" pattern when viewed from the front, making the "3" pattern easy to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

Note that the logo movement contact effect C is a case where the promotion of the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is successful, but when the promotion of the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is unsuccessful, the structure is the same as that of the logo movement contact production B. can be considered. 77(D) is the same, and then the logo moving effect D shown in FIG. 76(E) is executed. Execute the fixed stop effect (hit).

In addition, in the logo contact effects (FIGS. 75(D), 76(D), and 77(D)), an effect is performed to prompt the operation of the operation unit such as the effect button 63, and when the operation unit is operated, the following (Fig. 75(E), Fig. 76(E), Fig. 77(E)).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the logo movement contact effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position to the intermediate position to encourage winning in a predetermined lottery (FIGS. 75(C)(D), 76(C)(D) ), FIGS. 77(C)(D)). Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the lower position and notifies the winning in a predetermined lottery (FIGS. 75(E) and 77(E)). According to this configuration, since the second movable accessory 15 performs the fanning effect and the winning notification effect, the effect is more powerful than the mere notification effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The second movable accessory 15 corresponds to the "movable member", the retracted position corresponds to the "first position", the intermediate position corresponds to the "second position", and the lower position corresponds to the "third position". Equivalent to. Further, the logo moving effect A and the logo contact effect (Figs. 75(C)(D), 76(C)(D), and 77(C)(D)) correspond to the "first effect", and the logo moving effect The effect B, the pattern moving effect, and the logo moving effect C correspond to the "second effect". A jackpot lottery and a jackpot type lottery correspond to the "predetermined lottery".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the logo contact effect is executed, and the second movable accessory 15 stops at the intermediate position, and performs the effect of crushing the temporarily stopped effect pattern. That is, when viewed from the front side (player), the image is displayed in line with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position, so that the effect pattern appears at the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. Pretend to be in contact. According to this configuration, since the movement of the performance pattern is interlocked with the movement of the second movable accessory 15, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the temporarily stopped effect pattern corresponds to the "symbol".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed (FIGS. 75(E) and 77(E)). According to this configuration, since the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear to be pressed down by the second movable accessory 15 that has moved to the lower position, the movement of the second movable accessory 15 to the lower position stands out, and the game is played. can improve the interest of

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the symbol movement effect is executed (FIGS. 75(F) and 77(F)). Specifically, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed by slowly moving upward as indicated by the arrow Z, and move to the back side of the second movable accessory 15 . According to this configuration, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that move so as to overlap the second movable accessory 15 are more likely to be watched, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the logo moving effect C is executed (FIGS. 75(G) and 77(G)). Specifically, by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the lower position to the retracted position as indicated by the arrow X, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the difficult-to-visually-visible state to the easily-visible state. Become. According to this configuration, since the performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R change from a state in which they are difficult to see to a state in which they are easily visible, the possibility that the performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R will be watched increases, and the interest in the game is improved. be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the logo movement effect D is executed (Fig. 76(E)), and it is possible to notify that the player has lost a predetermined lottery. Specifically, in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 from the intermediate position to the retracted position, a display is performed in which the production pattern that has been collapsed in the vertical direction returns to its original form. According to this configuration, since the second movable accessory 15 performs the fanning performance and the notification performance of the failure, the performance becomes more powerful than the mere notification performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the logo moving effect D (Fig. 76(E)) corresponds to the "third effect".

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the logo contact effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed to prompt the user to operate the effect button 63 (FIGS. 75(D) and 76(D). When the button 63 is pressed, the following effects (logo movement effect B, logo movement effect D) are executed (FIGS. 75(E) and 76(E)). Winning or losing is announced by pressing the button, so the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation part", and the logo contact effect (Fig. 75(D), Fig. 76(D)) for displaying the button image BG corresponds to the "promoting effect".

[Modification]
A modified example of the logo movement contact effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol are temporarily stopped, and after the logo contact effect has been performed, a jackpot is achieved (FIGS. 75(B) to (H)). On the other hand, the temporarily stopped symbol may be in the ready-to-win mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information of the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are the same).

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the temporarily stopped production pattern is crushed by the second movable accessory 15 to notify the big win or the type of the big win. However, not limited to these, a lottery result as to whether or not to execute an effect may be notified. For example, by crushing the temporarily stopped symbol, it is reported that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. In this case, it is conceivable to change again the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the back side of the second movable accessory 15 in accordance with the execution of the logo movement production B (FIGS. 75(E) and 77(E)). .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A9-1]
a display screen for displaying an image;
movable between a first position, a second position different from the first position, and a third position different from the first position and the second position, wherein the first position, the second position, and A game machine comprising a movable member that can be stopped at the third position,
a first effect in which the movable member moves from the first position to the second position to encourage winning in a predetermined lottery;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the movable member moves from the second position to the third position and notifies of winning in the predetermined lottery is executable.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-1,
In the first effect, a pattern is displayed on the display screen in accordance with the movable member that has moved to the second position, so that the movable member apparently touches the pattern displayed on the display screen. to be
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A9-1 or aspect A9-2,
In the second effect, a pattern is displayed on the display screen so that the pattern can be visually recognized below the movable member in accordance with the movable member that has moved to the third position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-3,
In the second effect, the pattern displayed on the display screen is moved and displayed in a direction overlapping the movable member to move to the back side of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-4,
In the second effect, an effect is executed in which the movable member moves from the third position to the first position in accordance with the effect in which the pattern moves to the back side of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
It should be noted that the phrase "in accordance with the effect of moving the pattern to the back side of the movable member" is intended to include a configuration in which the movement of the movable member is performed in parallel with the display of the movement of the pattern. In other words, it includes not only a configuration in which the movable member moves after the symbol movement effect is completed, but also a configuration in which the movable member moves before the symbol movement effect is completed. For example, a configuration is included in which the movable member is moved so as to cover the symbol that is displayed by movement.

[Aspect A9-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-5,
After the first effect, the movable member moves from the second position to the first position, and a third effect can be executed in which a failure in the predetermined lottery is announced.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-6,
Further comprising an operation unit operable by the player,
Executes a promotion effect that promotes the operation of the operation unit in the first effect, and executes the second effect or the third effect with the effect as a trigger,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-6,
Further comprising an operation unit operable by the player,
Execution of a promotion effect that promotes the operation of the operation unit in the first effect, and execution of the second effect triggered by the effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol count continuous effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG. This symbol count continuous effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the performances executed during the variable performance are performed continuously over a plurality of variations. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pattern count continuous effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. The symbol count continuous effects A to C are executed in a high probability base state or a low probability height base state. It should be noted that it can be executed in the same way in the low-probability-low base state.

[Symbol count continuous effect A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect A. FIG.
After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which two of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). In the normal game, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped to form a ready-to-win mode, but in the pattern count continuous effect A, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R form the ready-to-win mode. do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, which is different from the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol at the normal time, in a variable area. The same applies to the following. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. Note that the description will be continued on the assumption that the suspension will not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "5" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is "8" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern. Three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The two pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "8" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" symbol. Two pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one pending icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. One suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "7" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is "8" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern. One pending icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. The variation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all determined and stopped at "8" symbol. The variable icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

The symbol count continuous effect A is a continuous effect over 4 fluctuations. In the symbol count continuous effect A, reach is formed with "8" symbols each time the reach forming effect is executed. Then, the final stop symbol in the fixed stop effect is counted up as "5" symbol→"6" symbol→"7" symbol→"8" symbol. Also, after the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped at the same time, the left effect pattern 8L is stopped. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a big win or loss is reported at the second timing. Furthermore, normally, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol.

Incidentally, the symbol count continuous effect A was a pattern that resulted in a big win in the final variation of the four variations, but it is also possible to make a pattern effect that results in a loss. In that case, instead of the fixed stop effect (win) of FIG. 78(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. For example, it is conceivable that the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is a "7" symbol or a "9" symbol.

[Pattern count continuous production B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect B. FIG.
After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which two of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). In a normal game, the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R are temporarily stopped to form a ready-to-win mode, but in the symbol count continuous performance B, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R form the ready-to-win mode. do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, which is different from the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol at the normal time, in a variable area. The same applies to the following. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. Note that the description will be continued on the assumption that the suspension will not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is "8" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern. Three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The two pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "7" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at "7" symbol. Two pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "6" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one pending icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. One suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "7" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" symbol. One pending icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5" symbol. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. The variation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all determined and stopped at "5" symbol. The variable icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

The symbol count continuous production B is a continuous production over 4 fluctuations. In the symbol count continuous effect B, the ready-to-win is formed in the order of "8" symbol→"7" symbol→"6" symbol→"5" symbol each time the ready-to-win formation effect is executed. Then, the final stop symbol in the fixed stop effect is "9" symbol→"8" symbol→"7" symbol→"5" symbol. It can be said that the final stop symbols are counting down, except for the final fixed stop effect (win) “5” symbol. Also, after the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped at the same time, the left effect pattern 8L is stopped. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a big win or loss is reported at the second timing. Furthermore, normally, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol.

Incidentally, the pattern count continuous effect B was a pattern that resulted in a big hit in the final variation of the 4 variations, but it is also possible to produce a pattern that results in a loss. In that case, instead of the fixed stop effect (win) of FIG. 79(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. For example, it is conceivable to set the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, to the "6" symbol.

[Symbol count continuous effect C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect C. FIG.
After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which two of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). In a normal game, the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R are temporarily stopped to form a ready-to-win mode, but in the symbol count continuous performance C, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R form the ready-to-win mode. do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, and the variation area is different from that of the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the normal final stop symbol. The same applies to the following. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. Note that the description will be continued on the assumption that the suspension will not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "4" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is "8" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern. Three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "2" symbol. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The two pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at "2" symbol. Two pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "0" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one pending icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. One suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "0" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at "0" symbol. One pending icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

After the final fluctuation is stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern. Incidentally, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. The variation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all determined and stopped at "7" symbol. The change icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

The symbol count continuous effect C is a continuous effect over 4 fluctuations. In the symbol count continuous effect C, the ready-to-win is formed in the order of "8" symbol→"2" symbol→"0" symbol→"7" symbol every time the ready-to-win formation effect is executed. This is an example of randomly selecting reach symbols. However, the last "7" symbol is selected based on the count-up of the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol in the fixed stop effect is counted up as "4" symbol→"5" symbol→"6" symbol→"7" symbol. Also, after the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped at the same time, the left effect pattern 8L is stopped. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a big win or loss is reported at the second timing. Furthermore, normally, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol.

In addition, the pattern count continuous effect C is a pattern that results in a big hit in the final variation of the 4 variations, but it is also possible to create a pattern that results in a loss. In that case, instead of the fixed stop effect (win) of FIG. 80(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. For example, it is conceivable that the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is a "6" symbol or an "8" symbol.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pattern count continuous effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, by repeating the ready-to-win formation effect and the determination stop effect in the ready-to-win losing mode, the stopping of the effect pattern in the big win mode indicating the transition to the big win game is encouraged (Fig. 78 (A) ) to (F), FIGS. 79(A) to (F), and FIGS. 80(A) to (F)). According to this configuration, by repeating the reach-losing mode, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) correspond to the "reach loss effect", the left effect pattern 8L corresponds to the "final stop pattern", and the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R correspond to the "reach pattern". Equivalent to. Also, a jackpot mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same) corresponds to the "special mode."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (losing) are repeated in continuous fluctuations (FIGS. 78(A) to (F), FIGS. 79(A) to (F), FIG. 80 ( A) to (F)). According to this configuration, since the determination stop effect (loss) in the ready-to-win mode is executed in each successive variation, the player can be given expectations for the next variation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped simultaneously in the ready-to-win effect, and the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is stopped in the fixed stop effect (loss). According to this configuration, a series of effects consisting of the ready-to-reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (losing) creates a rhythm, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The stop timing of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R corresponds to "first timing", and the stop timing of the left effect symbol 8L corresponds to "second timing".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol in the normal state, whereas the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol. ing. According to this configuration, the ready-to-win formation effect and the fixed stop effect (losing) are conspicuous, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L is changed each time the reach forming effect and the fixed stop effect (losing) are repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the next time the game will be a big win by changing the final stop symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left performance symbol 8L is counted up or down each time the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (losing) are repeated (FIGS. 78(A) to (F), FIG. 79 ( A)-(F), FIG. 80(A)-(F)). According to this configuration, by counting up or down the final stop symbols, the player can be given a further expectation that the next game will be a big win, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the reach forming effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) which are repeatedly executed, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R forming the reach mode are "8" patterns each time ( 78(A)-(F)). Then, the left performance symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is counted up. According to this configuration, the count-up of the left performance pattern 8L is conspicuous, and the count-up of the left performance pattern 8L can make the player feel a feeling of approaching a big win, thereby improving the amusement of the game. .

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the pattern count continuous effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the left performance symbol 8L is the final stop symbol on the premise that the left performance symbol 8L→right performance symbol 8R→middle performance symbol 8C is normally stopped in this order. On the other hand, the right performance symbol 8R may be used as the final stop symbol. Also, the medium effect symbol 8C, which is the same as the normal time, may be used as the final stop symbol. Incidentally, by determining the final stop symbol, the remaining performance symbols become the ready-to-win symbols forming the ready-to-win mode.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R, which are ready-to-win patterns, are stopped at the same time. On the other hand, the production pattern, which is the ready-to-win pattern, may be stopped at another timing. Also, any of the performance symbols may be stopped first. In this case, if the three performance patterns are stopped at the same intervals including the stop timing of the final stop pattern, a rhythm is created in the stop of the performance patterns, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the ready-to-win formation effect and the fixed stop effect (losing) are repeated in continuous fluctuations. On the other hand, the ready-to-win formation effect and the fixed stop effect (losing) may be repeated in one variation. Moreover, you may make it repeat by both. For example, repeat 2 times for the first variation, repeat 3 times for the next variation, and so on.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A10-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display screen for displaying an image,
In the display screen, by repeatedly executing a ready-to-lose performance of stopping the symbols variably displayed in a plurality of rows so that the final stop pattern to be stopped last becomes a ready-to-lose pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern forming the ready-to-win state, the design is repeatedly executed. but encourages to stop in a special mode that indicates the transition to a special game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1,
The reach-losing effect is executed and repeated in continuous fluctuations,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A10-1 or aspect A10-2,
In the ready-to-win performance, the ready-to-win symbol stops at a first timing, and then the final stop symbol stops at a second timing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-3,
In the reach-losing effect, the variation area of the final stop symbol on the display screen is different from the variation area of the final stop symbol during normal operation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-4,
The final stop pattern is changed each time the reach-losing effect is repeatedly executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5,
The change of the final stop symbol is count up or count down,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5 or aspect A10-6,
In the reach-losing effect that is repeatedly executed, the reach pattern is common,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5 or aspect A10-6,
In the repeatedly executed reach-losing effect, the reach pattern is changed by counting up or down.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-9]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5 or aspect A10-6,
The ready-to-win pattern is randomly selected in the repeatedly-executed ready-to-win performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

81 to 83, the image reversal expectation degree suggesting effects A to C will be described below. This image reversal expectation degree suggesting effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 and sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Image Reversal Expectation Suggestion A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect A. FIG. The image reversal expectation degree indication effect is an effect that also suggests the degree of expectation of winning by reversing a specific image (holding icon) that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by a change in color. In the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. is displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, the game state is normal state (low probability low base state), the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have the shape of a flag. The shape of this flag is provided with a screen portion that is divided into two on the right side and a rod-shaped rod portion located on the left side of the flag portion. Note that the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C can have any shape that represents a specific target. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the color of the four flag-shaped pending icons 9A is blue.

During this change, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the color of the second pending icon 9A from the right among the four pending icons 9A changes from blue to green by prefetching. The suspension icon 9A and the variation icon (the suspension icon) 9C suggest the degree of expectation of the jackpot at the time of variation corresponding to the suspension icon by their colors. Here, the expectations for the jackpot are high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with the expectation for blue being 2%, the expectation for green being 10%, the expectation for purple being 20%, and the expectation for red. 30% for gold and 40% for gold. The change in color of the second pending icon 9A from the right suggests that the expectation of the jackpot at the time of variation (next subsequent variation) corresponding to this pending icon 9A has increased from 2% to 10%. .

In FIG. 81(C), the state at the time of special figure variation next to the special figure variation in FIGS. 81(A) and (B) is shown. In FIG. 81(B), the pending icon 9A whose color has changed from blue to green shifts rightward by one, and as shown in FIG. 81(C), the rightmost of the three pending icons 9A to be displayed. During this change, the rightmost pending icon 9A whose color has changed is reversely displayed by prefetching as shown in FIG. 81(D). Here, the reversed display means that the object (flag) represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed in a horizontally reversed state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the pending icon 9A is horizontally reversed, the rod portion is positioned on the right side of the screen portion, and the split portion of the flag portion is displayed on the left side of the flag portion. When the pending icon 9A is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of the big win is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, reversing adds 43% to the expectation. In this embodiment, when the pending icon 9A is reversed, the sum of the expected degree of reversal of 43% and the expected degree of color of the pending icon 9A becomes the expected degree. For example, when the blue pending icon 9A is inverted, it suggests that expectations have increased from 2% to 45%. Here, the green pending icon 9A has been reversed, suggesting that the degree of expectation has risen from 10% to 53%. Thus, in this embodiment, not only the color of the pending icon 9A but also the reversed/non-reversed state indicates the degree of expectation for the big win. In this embodiment, when the pending icon 9A is inverted, the degree of expectation is higher than when the color changes.

In FIG. 81(E), the state at the time of special figure variation next to the special figure variation in FIGS. 81(C) and (D) is shown. In FIG. 81(D), the inverted green pending icon 9A is shifted rightward by one, and as shown in FIG. A change corresponding to the pending icon) 9C is performed. The degree of expectation for a big win in this variation is 53%, and when a win is made, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in the form of a big win, as shown in FIG. 81(F).

81(G) to (L) show another example of the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect A. FIG. In another example, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), in a state where the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed, the pending icon 9A is horizontally arranged at the bottom of the display screen 7a and 4 are displayed. The color of the four pending icons 9A is blue. During this change, as shown in FIG. 81(G), the third pending icon 9A from the right among the four pending icons 9A is highlighted by prefetching. The reverse display here is the same as the reverse display in FIG. 81(D). That is, when the pending icon 9A is highlighted, the expectation level is increased by 43%, suggesting that the expectation for the big win is higher than when the pending icon 9A is not highlighted. Here, the blue pending icon 9A has been reversed, suggesting that the degree of expectation has increased from 2% to 45%. Thus, in this embodiment, the pending icon 9A may be highlighted not only after the color change but also before the color change.

In FIG. 81(H), the state at the time of the special figure variation next to the special figure variation in FIGS. 81(A) and (G) is shown. One pending icon 9A is added by winning a prize. In FIG. 81(G), the highlighted pending icon 9A shifts rightward by two and is displayed at the rightmost of the three pending icons 9A as shown in FIG. 81(H). . During this change, the color of the rightmost highlighted pending icon 9A changes from blue to green by prefetching as shown in FIG. 81(I). The color change here is the same as the color change in FIG. 81(B). That is, blue, green, purple, red, and gold have the highest expectations for big wins in that order, with blue expected at 2%, green expected at 10%, purple expected at 20%, and red expected at 2%. are 30%, and gold expectations are 40%. When the color of the pending icon 9A changes while being highlighted, the degree of expectation corresponding to the color change is added. Here, the color expectation increases from 2% to 10%, and 43% of the reverse display is added to this, so the overall expectation increases from 45% to 53%.

The reversed display of the green pending icon 9A may be further reversed to the original direction (non-reversed display) at a specific timing. There is a 20% chance that the reverse display will return to its original state, and when it returns, the timing may be during the same change or after the next change. Here, as shown in FIG. 81(J), during the same change as in FIG. 91(I), an effect is executed in which the suspended icon 9A that has been highlighted is returned to its original orientation (non-inverted display). . As a result, the degree of expectation for the big win at the time of fluctuation corresponding to this pending icon 9A is lowered to the degree of expectation before the reverse display. Here the expectation drops from 53% (43+10) to 10% (0+10).

In FIG. 81 (K), the state at the next special figure variation of the special figure variations of FIGS. 81 (H) to (J) is shown. In FIG. 81(J), the green pending icon 9A, which has returned to its original direction (non-end point display), is shifted rightward by one, and as shown in FIG. ) 9C, and the variation corresponding to this variation icon (the pending icon) 9C is performed. The degree of expectation for a big win in this variation is 10%, and when a loss occurs, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a loss mode as shown in FIG. 81(L).

[Image Reversal Expectation Suggestion Effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect B. FIG. The image reversal expectation degree indication effect is an effect that also suggests the degree of expectation of winning by reversing a specific image (holding icon) that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by a change in color. FIG. 82(A) shows the same state as FIG. That is, in the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect B, first, the same effect as that of the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The color of the second pending icon 9A from the right among the four pending icons 9A is changed from blue to green by prefetching. The suspension icon 9A and the variation icon (the suspension icon) 9C suggest the degree of expectation of the jackpot at the time of variation corresponding to the suspension icon by their colors. Here, the expectations for the jackpot are high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with the expectation for blue being 2%, the expectation for green being 10%, the expectation for purple being 20%, and the expectation for red. 30% for gold and 40% for gold. The change in color of the second pending icon 9A from the right suggests that the expectation of the jackpot at the time of the change (next next change) corresponding to this pending icon 9A has increased from 2% to 10%. there is

During this change, as shown in FIG. 82(B), the second hold icon 9A from the right in green is prefetched to perform a rotating effect. Here, the second hold icon 9A from the right rotates counterclockwise with the normal line of the display screen 7a as the axis of rotation. After that, the rotational speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 82(C), the second hold icon 9A from the right becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82(D), the vortex image disappears and a reversed hold icon 9A is displayed at the display position of the second hold icon 9A from the right. Here, the reversed display means that the object (flag) represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed in a horizontally reversed state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the pending icon 9A is horizontally reversed, the rod portion is positioned on the right side of the screen portion, and the split portion of the flag portion is displayed on the left side of the flag portion. When the pending icon 9A is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of the big win is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, reversing adds 43% to the expectation. In this embodiment, when the pending icon 9A is reversed, the sum of the expected degree of reversal of 43% and the expected degree of color of the pending icon 9A becomes the degree of expectation. For example, when the blue pending icon 9A is inverted, it suggests that expectations have increased from 2% to 45%. Here, the green pending icon 9A has been reversed, suggesting that the degree of expectation has increased from 10% to 53%. Thus, in this embodiment, not only the color of the pending icon 9A but also the reversed/non-reversed state indicates the degree of expectation for the big win. In this embodiment, when the pending icon 9A is inverted, the degree of expectation is higher than when the color changes.

In FIG. 82 (E), the state at the time of the special figure variation next to the special figure variation of FIGS. 82 (A) to (D) is shown. In FIG. 82(D), the inverted green pending icon 9A is shifted rightward two places, and as shown in FIG. A change corresponding to the pending icon) 9C is performed. The degree of expectation for a big win in this variation is 53%, and when a win is made, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in a big win mode as shown in FIG. 82(F).

82(G) to (L) show another example of the image reversal expectation degree suggesting effect B. FIG. In another example, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), in a state in which the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed below. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are blue flag-shaped. During this variation, as shown in FIG. 82(H), a variation icon (the pending icon) 9C is enlarged and displayed while moving upward on the display screen 7a by prefetching, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. A rotation presentation is executed to rotate at a first position that overlaps with the fluctuation display of . Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C rotates counterclockwise around the normal line of the display screen 7a at the first position on the display screen 7a. After that, the rotational speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 82(I), the fluctuation icon (the suspension icon) 9C becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 82(J), from the vortex image at the first position on the display screen 7a, a reversed variable icon (the pending icon) 9C appears, and rotates to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Move towards the second position. Inverted display here means that the object represented by the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in an inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C is horizontally reversed, the pole portion is positioned on the right side of the screen portion, and the split portion of the flag portion is displayed on the left side of the flag portion. be done. Also, the number displayed on the flag (here, "3") is also highlighted. When the fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of the big win is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, reversing adds 43% to the expectation. In the present embodiment, when the variable icon (retained icon) 9C is inverted, the expected level is the sum of the color expectation level of the variable icon (retained icon) 9C and the reversal level of expectation of 43%. Here, it is suggested that the degree of expectation has increased from 2% to 45% because the blue variable icon (the pending icon) 9C has been inverted. Thus, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big win is represented not only by the color of the variable icon (retained icon) 9C, but also by inverting/non-inverting. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is inverted, the degree of expectation is higher than when the color changes. After that, a countdown effect is executed by the reversed number displayed on the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C displayed at the second position.

When the countdown effect is started, as shown in FIG. 82(K), one number is highlighted in the flag portion of the variable icon (retained icon) 9C displayed at the second position on the display screen 7a. decremented. Here, the highlighted "3" is switched to the highlighted "2". After that, the reversed number continues to be decremented, and when the reversed display of "0" is displayed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. FIG. 82(L) shows an example in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Image Reversal Expectation Suggestion Effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect C. FIG. The image reversal expectation degree indication effect is an effect that also suggests the degree of expectation of winning by reversing a specific image (reserved icon) that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by a change in color. In the image reversal expectation degree suggesting effect C, first, the same effect as that of the image reversal expectation degree suggesting effect A of FIG. 81(A) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed. Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have the shape of a flag. The shape of this flag is provided with a screen portion that is divided into two on the right side and a rod-shaped rod portion located on the left side of the flag portion. Note that the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C can have any shape that represents a specific target. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the color of the four flag-shaped pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C is blue.

During this variation, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at "2" and "4", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. . After that, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the suspension icon 9A and the same flag-shaped image (design) as the suspension icon 9C are stop-displayed at the stop position as the middle decorative symbol 8C by pre-reading. This image (design) is blue in color and larger in size than the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a rotating effect is executed in which the image (symbol) stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C rotates. Here, the image (design) stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design 8C rotates counterclockwise about the normal line of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the rotational speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 83(D), the image (symbol) stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes a swirl image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a reversed flag-shaped image appears from the vortex image at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and rotates to the display position of the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. move towards. Here, the reversal display means that the object (flag) represented by the image (design) stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in a reversed state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the image (design) stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative design 8C is reversed left and right, the rod portion is located on the right side of the screen portion, and the flag portion is split in two. section is displayed to the left of the flag section. This inverted flag-shaped image is the same as the inverted display of the variable icon (the suspension icon) 9C in FIG. 83(A).

By the effect of FIG. 83(E), as shown in FIG. 83(F), the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is highlighted. When the fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of the big win is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, reversing adds 43% to the expectation. In the present embodiment, when the variable icon (retained icon) 9C is inverted, the expected level is the sum of the color expectation level of the variable icon (retained icon) 9C and the reversal level of expectation of 43%. Here, it is suggested that the degree of expectation has increased from 2% to 45% because the blue variable icon (the pending icon) 9C has been inverted. Thus, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big win is represented not only by the color of the variable icon (retained icon) 9C, but also by inverting/non-inverting. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is inverted, the degree of expectation is higher than when the color changes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which have been stop-displayed at "2" and "4", are again variably displayed. Here, nothing is displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the numeric symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are varied again.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "2" and "4" again. , the inverted flag-shaped image (symbol) is stopped and displayed at the stop position. The flag-shaped image (design) that is displayed in reverse is green, and has the same shape as the blue variation icon (the pending icon) 9C, but a different color. The inverted flag-shaped image (design) is larger in size than the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(I), the green flag-shaped image (symbol) stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C moves toward the display position of the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C. At this time, the image (pattern) may or may not be rotated. By this effect, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C changes to green, and the number (here, "3") is also highlighted in the flag section. Also, the size increases. Specifically, it becomes an image of the same size as the image (design) stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design 8C. Here, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with a blue expectation of 2%, a green expectation of 10%, and a purple expectation of 20% %, 30% for red, and 40% for gold. When the color of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C changes while being highlighted, the degree of expectation corresponding to the color change is added. Here, the color expectation increases from 2% to 10%, and 43% of the reverse display is added to this, so the overall expectation increases from 45% to 53%. After that, a countdown effect is executed by the reversed numbers displayed on the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C.

When the countdown effect is started, as shown in FIG. 83(J), the number highlighted in the flag portion of the variable icon (retained icon) 9C is decremented by one. Here, the highlighted "3" is switched to the highlighted "2". After that, as shown in FIG. 83(K), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which have been stop-displayed at "2" and "4", are again variably displayed. Here, nothing is displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the numeric symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are varied again. The number highlighted in the flag portion of the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C continues to decrement, and when the highlighted "0" is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. FIG. 83(L) shows an example in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image reversal expectation level suggestion effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the pending icon 9A, which indicates the degree of expectation of winning by changing its color, also indicates the degree of expectation of winning by reversing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 82 and 83 as well.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, after the pending icon 9A is displayed in a non-inverted state, the first effect is executed in which the pending icon 9A is inverted. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 82 and 83 as well.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the first effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed in a non-inverted state, then the hold icon 9A is rotated, and then held. The icon 9A is displayed in an inverted state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the pending icon 9A includes characters (including numbers), and after the first effect, characters are included in the pending icon 9A. A second effect can be executed in which the character is changed to another character while the character is reversed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the first effect is executed during the special figure fluctuation, and after the pending icon 9A is displayed in a non-inverted state, the fluctuation There are cases in which the pending icon 9A is reversed and cases in which it is not reversed, and the pending icon 9A suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the variation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the first effect, the pending icon 9A is displayed in a non-inverted state on the display screen 7a at the first position, and is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed in a reversed state in the second position of 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the image reversal expectation degree suggesting effects A to C, when the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (the relevant reserved icon) 9C are displayed in reverse, they are horizontally reversed. However, the inversion method is not limited to horizontal inversion, and may be vertical inversion, for example.

[Modification 2]
In the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effects B and C, the characters displayed in reverse on the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C are numbers, but characters other than numbers may also be displayed in reverse.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the image reversal expectation degree suggesting effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. Further, the specific image that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by changing color and also suggesting the degree of expectation of winning by reversing may be an image other than the pending icon.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by changing color,
Reversing the specific image also suggests the degree of expectation of winning,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
capable of executing a first effect in which the specific image is reversed after being displayed in a non-reversed state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2,
In the first effect, after the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state, the specific image is rotated, and after the rotation, the specific image is displayed in an inverted state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-2 or aspect B1-3,
The specific image includes characters,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the characters included in the specific image are reversed and changed to another character,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-2 to B1-4,
The first effect is executed during the special figure fluctuation, and after the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state, the specific image may or may not be inverted during the fluctuation. A specific image suggests the expected degree of success in the variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-2 to B1-5,
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state at a first position of the display means, and is displayed in a reversed state at a second position of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The specific mode pseudo continuous effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. This specific mode pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Note that the specific mode pseudo continuous effect C will be described assuming that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Specific Mode Pseudo Continuous Effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the specific mode pseudo continuous effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern. It should be noted that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is determined by stopping the "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), image display effect A is executed. The image display effect A is a effect of moving and displaying the first image G1 indicating execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the first image G1 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a. The first image G1 may be framed out of the display screen 7a, or may bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change brightly, or may be a display of only the first image G1. The characters "NEXT" and the characters "second time" are written on the first image G1. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo-continuous effect, and "second" indicates that it is the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is the "8" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is the "4" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is the "NEXT" pattern. It should be noted that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed by stopping the "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), image display effect B is executed. The image display effect B is a effect of moving and displaying the second image G2 indicating execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the second image G2 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a. The second image G2 may be framed out of the display screen 7a, or may bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-variation may be a display in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change brightly, or may be a display of only the second image G2. The characters "NEXT" and the characters "third time" are written on the second image G2. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo continuous effect, and "3rd time" indicates that it is the third variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that constitute the production design (the same applies below). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Specific Mode Pseudo Continuous Effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the specific mode pseudo continuous effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a "SPECIAL" pattern. The "SPECIAL" pattern is a pattern in which a character image of "SPECIAL" is added to the "NEXT" pattern. By stopping the "SPECIAL" symbols, the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), image display effect A is executed. The image display effect A is a effect of moving and displaying the first image G1 indicating execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the first image G1 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a. The first image G1 may be framed out of the display screen 7a, or may bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change brightly, or may be a display of only the first image G1. The characters "NEXT" and the characters "second time" are written on the first image G1. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo-continuous effect, and "second" indicates that it is the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), image display effect B is executed. The image display effect B is a effect of moving and displaying the second image G2 indicating execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the second image G2 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a. The second image G2 may be framed out of the display screen 7a, or may bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change brightly, or may be a display of only the second image G2. The characters "NEXT" and the characters "third time" are written on the second image G2. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo continuous effect, and "3rd time" indicates that it is the third variation including the first variation. However, after the image display effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not temporarily stopped, which indicates that the effect is the third change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), image display effect C is executed. The image display effect C is an effect of moving and displaying the third image G3 suggesting the effect to be executed next. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the third image G3 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a. The third image G3 may be framed out of the display screen 7a, or may bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. The characters "battle" are written on the third image G3. "Battle" indicates execution of a battle presentation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. Also, the effect symbol during fluctuation is temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win mode, and displayed in the corner portion of the display screen 7a. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "3" patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB is rainbow-colored to announce the victory of the teammate character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Specific Mode Pseudo Continuous Effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, on the display screen 7a, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. On the display screen 7b below the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L is the "1" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is the "2" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is the "SPECIAL" symbol. The "SPECIAL" pattern is a pattern in which a character image of "SPECIAL" is added to the "NEXT" pattern. By stopping the "SPECIAL" symbols, the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), image display effect A is executed. The image display effect A is a effect of moving and displaying the first image G1 indicating execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the first image G1 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a. The first image G1 is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change brightly, or may be a display of only the first image G1. The characters "NEXT" and the characters "second time" are written on the first image G1. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo-continuous effect, and "second" indicates that it is the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), image display effect B is executed. The image display effect B is a effect of moving and displaying the second image G2 indicating execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the second image G2 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a. The second image G2 is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-variation may be a display in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change brightly, or may be a display of only the second image G2. The characters "NEXT" and the characters "third time" are written on the second image G2. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo continuous effect, and "3rd time" indicates that it is the third variation including the first variation. However, after the image display effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not temporarily stopped, which indicates that the effect is the third change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), image display effect C is executed. The image display effect C is an effect of moving and displaying the third image G3 suggesting the effect to be executed next. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the third image G3 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a. The third image G3 is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. The characters "battle" are written on the third image G3. "Battle" indicates execution of a battle presentation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. Also, the effect symbol during fluctuation is temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win mode, and displayed in the corner portion of the display screen 7a. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "3" patterns. Also, the teammate character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB is rainbow-colored to notify the victory of the teammate character CRA. Also, the teammate character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at "3" symbol. In addition, three pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7b below the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, when the middle performance symbol 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol, the first image G1 showing the first execution of the pseudo continuous performance is displayed. 84(A) to (C)). Further, when the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol, the second image G2 showing the second execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed to execute the pseudo-continuous effect (FIGS. 84(D) and (E)). On the other hand, after the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, when the middle performance symbol 8C temporarily stops at the "SPECIAL" symbol, the first image G1 and the second image G2 are continuously displayed to execute a pseudo continuous performance. (FIGS. 85(A) to (D), FIGS. 86(A) to (D)). According to this configuration, the simulated continuous effect is continuously performed by stopping the "SPECIAL" symbol, so that the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "first mode of the specific modes", and the mode in which it stops at the "SPECIAL" symbol corresponds to the "second mode of the specific mode". Equivalent to. Also, the first image G1 corresponds to the "first image", and the second image G2 corresponds to the "second image".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the medium effect symbol 8C stops at the "SPECIAL" image, the first image G1 and the second image G2 are displayed, followed by the third image G3 suggesting execution of the battle effect. After that, the battle production is executed. According to this configuration, the stop of the "SPECIAL" symbol continuously performs the pseudo-continuous effect, and furthermore, the execution of the battle effect is suggested by the third image G3 after that, so that the player is further surprised. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the battle effect corresponds to the "special effect", and the third image G3 corresponds to the "third image".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are displayed while moving on the display screen 7a (7a and 7b) (FIGS. 84(C), (E), FIG. 85 ( C)-(E), FIG. 86(C)-(E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out as compared with the case where the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are simply displayed, and the game is enhanced. Interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are moved and displayed, they are framed out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 86(C) to (E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are moved and displayed, they are framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in to the display screen 7b (see FIG. 86 ( C) to (E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The display screen 7a corresponds to "display screen", and the display screen 7b corresponds to "another display screen".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the "first mode" is the case where the middle effect symbol 8C among the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the "NEXT" symbol. According to this configuration, the first mode in which execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved. The "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "special symbol".

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the "second mode" is a "SPECIAL" pattern in which the medium effect pattern 8C of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a "NEXT" pattern with a character image of "SPECIAL" added. It is the case. According to this configuration, the second mode in which the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect and the execution of the special effect are confirmed becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that the character image "SPECIAL" corresponds to the "predetermined image".

[Modification]
Modifications of the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the pattern temporary stop effect (Fig. 84 (B) (D), Fig. 85 (B), Fig. 86 (B), the left production pattern 8L → right production pattern 8R → stop in the order of the middle production pattern 8C On the other hand, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R may be stopped at the same time, or the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R may be stopped at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the design temporary stop effect (in FIGS. 84(B)(D), 85(B), and 86(B), the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are configured to stop with different patterns. On the other hand, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R may be stopped at the same pattern (stopped in the reach mode).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the design temporary stop effect (Fig. 84 (B) (D), Fig. 85 (B), Fig. 86 (B), "NEXT" design, "SPECIAL" design is stopped in the middle production design 8C On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the ``NEXT'' symbol and ``SPECIAL'' symbol are stopped in the left effect symbol 8L, and the ``NEXT'' symbol and the ``SPECIAL'' symbol are stopped in the right effect symbol 8R. Also, the "NEXT" symbol and the "SPECIAL" symbol may be stopped in two or more of the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the design temporary stop effect (in FIGS. 84 (B) (D), 85 (B), and 86 (B), all of the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. On the other hand, at least one of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may be temporarily stopped.In this case, at least one of the production patterns to be temporarily stopped is the "NEXT" design. , "SPECIAL" pattern.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b are arranged adjacent to each other, but the display screens 7a and 7b may be arranged apart from each other.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the third image G3 suggesting execution of the battle effect is displayed, and then the battle effect is executed (FIGS. 85(E) to (G), FIGS. 86(E) to (G )). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which effects other than the battle effects can also be selectively executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
Equipped with a display screen for displaying images,
A gaming machine capable of executing a pseudo-continuous effect, which is a pseudo-continuous-variation effect, when the changing symbols stop in a specific mode on the display screen,
After the start of the symbol variation, when the symbols stop in the first mode of the specific modes, a first image showing the first execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and then the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. When the symbols stop in the first mode, a second image showing the second execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed,
After the pattern starts to fluctuate, when the pattern stops in the second mode of the specific mode, the first image and the second image are displayed continuously, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
When the pattern stops in the second mode after the pattern starts to fluctuate, the display of the first image and the second image is followed by the display of a third image suggesting a special effect to be executed next. , then executing the special effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
at least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is displayed while moving on the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3,
At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is moved and displayed on the display screen, and then is framed out of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
an image out of the display screen among the first image, the second image, and the third image is framed in a display screen different from the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
The first mode is a mode in which at least one of the stopped symbols is a special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-6,
The second mode is a mode in which at least one of the stopped symbols becomes a symbol in which a predetermined image is added to the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable stride continuous effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. This variable crossing continuous effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the variable straddling continuous effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

[Variation straddling continuous production A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the variable crossing continuous effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. FIG. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the NEXT image G, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by clearly displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starting to fluctuate, or may be performed by displaying only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a pattern confirmation stop effect is executed. The symbol fixation stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. After that, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is the "8" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is the "4" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is the "NEXT" pattern. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

Next, when the next variation starts, an image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 87(E). The image display effect is a effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. FIG. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that constitute the production design (the same applies below). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3" symbol. It should be noted that two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Variation stride continuous production B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the variable crossing continuous effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. Below, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as the "first suspended icon 9A", the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area as the "second suspended icon 9A", and the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called a "third pending icon 9A". Further, in the display screen 7a, an area where the pending icon 9A is displayed is called a "holding area", and an area where the variable icon 9C is displayed is called a "variable area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. FIG. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the NEXT image G, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by clearly displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starting to fluctuate, or may be performed by displaying only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" pattern. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon are displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C is changed. Specifically, it changes from white to green. The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white→blue→green→purple→red→gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a symbol confirmation stop effect is executed. The symbol fixation stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. After that, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is the "8" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is the "4" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is the "5" pattern. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Here, the variation icon 9C remains without disappearing. Then, when the next change is started, the hold icon 9A shifts. Specifically, the first pending icon 9A in the pending area moves to the variable area as indicated by an arrow Y3 and becomes the variable icon 9C. Also in the reserve area, the second reserve icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y2 and becomes the first reserve icon 9C. The third pending icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y1 and becomes the second pending icon 9C. Here, in particular, the green variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation remains in the variation area, and an effect is performed in which the first pending icon 9A collides with the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. Here, in particular, the variation icon 9C corresponding to the current variation is changed to red due to the collision of the first suspension icon 9A with the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation. When the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation is green, the variation icon 9C corresponding to the current variation is green or a display color indicating a higher degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C changed to red pending are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Variation stride continuous production C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the variable crossing continuous effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. Below, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first suspended icon 9A", the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area as the "second suspended icon 9A", and the suspended icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called a "third pending icon 9A". Further, in the display screen 7a, an area where the pending icon 9A is displayed is called a "reserved area", and an area where the variable icon 9C is displayed is called a "variable area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. FIG. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the NEXT image G, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by clearly displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starting to fluctuate, or may be performed by displaying only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" pattern. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon are displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C is changed. Specifically, it changes from white to green. The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white→blue→green→purple→red→gold. Also, the pending icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed in an enlarged manner compared to when the change starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a pattern confirmation stop effect is executed. The symbol fixation stop effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. After that, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is the "8" pattern, the right effect pattern 8R is the "4" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is the "NEXT" pattern. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Here, the variation icon 9C remains without disappearing. Then, when the next change is started, the hold icon 9A shifts. Specifically, the first pending icon 9A in the pending area moves to the variable area as indicated by an arrow Y3 and becomes the variable icon 9C. Also in the reserve area, the second reserve icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y2 and becomes the first reserve icon 9C. The third pending icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y1 and becomes the second pending icon 9C. Here, in particular, the green variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation remains in the variation area, and an effect is performed in which the first pending icon 9A collides with the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. FIG. Here, as indicated by the arrow Y, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. Here, in particular, due to the collision of the first pending icon 9A with the variable icon 9C corresponding to the previous change, the variable icon 9C corresponding to the current change is changed to green pending. When the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation is green, the variation icon 9C corresponding to the current variation is green or a display color indicating a higher degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C changed to green pending are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. Note that the hold icon 9A has returned to its original size.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the variable-crossing continuous effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the middle effect pattern 8C among the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is confirmed and stopped at the "NEXT" symbol, the image display effect of displaying the NEXT image G is executed at the beginning of the next variation. (Fig. 87(D)(E), Fig. 89(D)(E)). Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, if the variation icon 9C has undergone a pending change and remains without disappearing, an effect to take over the pending change is performed. (FIGS. 88(D)(E), 89(D)(E)). According to this configuration, since the effect that has been performed in one variation can be performed over a plurality of variations, the range of effects can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the shift movement of the pending icon 9A after the fixed stop in the pattern fixed stop production, the subsequent image display production, and the fluctuation start production correspond to the "variation stride production".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "NEXT" symbol is fixed and stopped in the medium effect symbol 8C, the image display effect is executed in the next variation (Fig. 87 (D) (E), Fig. 89 (D) (E )). According to this configuration, the stop of the "NEXT" symbol and the image display effect are executed over a plurality of variations, so that the range of effect is widened and the interest of the game can be improved.

Incidentally, the mode in which the middle effect pattern 8C of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "specific mode", and the image display effect corresponds to the "specific effect".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "NEXT" symbol is temporarily stopped in the medium effect symbol 8C, the image display effect is executed in the variation following this temporary stop (Fig. 87 (B) (C ), FIGS. 88(B)(C), and FIGS. 89(B)(C)). According to this configuration, since the stop of the "NEXT" pattern and the image display effect are executed in one variation, it is difficult to distinguish between the execution over a plurality of changes, and the effect is produced without giving a sense of incongruity. can be expanded, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, if the change icon 9C has undergone a pending change and remains without disappearing, an effect that takes over the pending change is performed (Fig. 88(D)(E), FIG. 89(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the hold change is inherited over the change, so the interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that the shift movement of the hold icon 9A after the fixed stop in the pattern fixed stop production, the subsequent image display production, and the fluctuation start production (FIGS. 88 (D) (E), FIGS. 89 (D) (E)) It corresponds to "holding continuation production".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped and the change icon 9C changes to green, the first hold icon 9A in the hold area moves to the change area. As a result, the variation icon 9C is green or red with a higher degree of expectation than green (FIGS. 88(D) and (E), FIGS. 89(D) and (E)). According to this configuration, the same hold change or a hold change with a higher degree of expectation can be obtained across fluctuations, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. The green variation icon 9C corresponds to the "first suspension mode", and the red variation icon 9C corresponds to the "second suspension mode".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the green variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation remains in the variation area in the symbol confirmation stop effect, and the first pending icon 9A is the variation corresponding to the previous variation. An effect of colliding with the icon 9C is performed (Fig. 88(D), Fig. 89(D)). According to this configuration, the handover effect of the hold change that straddles the fluctuation is conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the variable stride continuous effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the symbol temporary stop effect (Fig. 87(B), Fig. 88(B), Fig. 89(B)) and the symbol fixed stop effect (Fig. 87(D), Fig. 88(D), Fig. 89(D) )), it was configured to stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L→right effect pattern 8R→middle effect pattern 8C. Alternatively, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R may be stopped at the same time, or the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R may be stopped at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the symbol temporary stop effect (Fig. 87(B), Fig. 88(B), Fig. 89(B)) and the symbol fixed stop effect (Fig. 87(D), Fig. 88(D), Fig. 89(D) )), the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped at different patterns. On the other hand, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be stopped at the same symbol (stopped in the reach state).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop effect (Fig. 87(B), Fig. 88(B), Fig. 89(B)) and the symbol fixed stop effect (Fig. 87(D), Fig. 89(D)), the medium effect The configuration was such that the "NEXT" symbol stopped at the symbol 8C. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the "NEXT" symbol stops at the left effect symbol 8L, or the "NEXT" symbol stops at the right effect symbol 8R. Further, it may be configured such that the "NEXT" symbol is stopped in two or more of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be temporarily stopped.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the design temporary stop effect (FIGS. 87(B), 88(B), and 89(B)). rice field. Alternatively, at least one of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped. In this case, at least one of the performance symbols to be temporarily stopped should be the "NEXT" symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the suspension change of the variation icon 9C (FIGS. 89(C) to (F)). On the other hand, instead of enlarged display, for example, a character icon related to the theme of the gaming machine 1 may be changed. At this time, it is conceivable to use at least one of the variable icon 9C and the three suspended icons 9C as the character icon.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
Equipped with a display screen for displaying images,
When the pattern that is fluctuating on the display screen is fixed and stopped, in the next fluctuation, a fluctuation straddling production that is a production having continuity from the end of the current fluctuation to the beginning of the next fluctuation can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The variable crossing effect includes an effect of executing a specific effect in the next change so as to continue to the fixed stop when the pattern that is fluctuating on the display screen is fixed and stopped in a specific mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
When the pattern that is fluctuating on the display screen temporarily stops in the specific mode, the specific effect can be executed in the fluctuation so as to continue the temporary stop.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
When the variable icon displayed in the variable area has undergone a pending change, the variable crossing effect includes a pending continuation effect that takes over the pending change of the variable icon in the next change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the suspension continuation effect, when the variation icon is changed to suspension and is in the first suspension mode, in the next variation, the suspension icon displayed in the suspension area moves to the variation area and the variation icon When it becomes, it becomes the first holding mode, or becomes the second holding mode with a higher expectation of transition to an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first holding mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-5,
When the pending icon displayed in the pending area moves to the variable area, the variable icon of the previous change remains in the variable area, and the pending icon becomes the variable icon of the previous change. perform conflicting renditions,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The suspension icon interlocking effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This pending icon interlocking effect is executed during the variable effect of special symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon-linked effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Hold icon interlocking effect A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect A. FIG. This pending icon interlocking effect A is a effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the suspended icon interlocking effect A, as shown in FIG. 90(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be varied, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holder 9CC, the four reserved icons 9A, and the four reserved holders 9AA. is displayed. The variable icon holding unit 9CC is a holding unit that is arranged below the variable icon 9C and supports the variable icon 9C. The four suspension holders 9AA are holders for supporting the suspension icon 9A. Up to four pending icons 9A are arranged on the pending holding portion 9AA from the left in the order of winning the first starting port 20. FIG. Among the pending icons 9A, the leftmost pending icon (the oldest winning in the first starting port 20) is also called the first pending icon. The third pending icon from the left (the second oldest winning to the first starting port 20) is also called the third pending icon. , the fourth pending icon from the left (the most recent win to the first starting port 20) is also called the fourth pending icon. Further, in the holding holding unit 9AA, the holding holding unit holding the first holding icon is also called the first holding holding unit, the holding holding unit holding the second holding icon is also called the second holding holding unit, The hold holding unit holding the third hold icon is also called the third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit holding the fourth hold icon is also called the fourth hold holding unit.
The four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are white circles.
Further, among the hold icons 9A, the fourth hold icon is also called a target hold because it is a hold icon that triggers a hold icon movement effect, which will be described later. In other words, the pending icon movement effect to be described later is performed based on the display of the fourth pending icon (more specifically, the winning of the game ball in the first start port 20 in the three pending states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a suspended icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, both the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA move upward (raise). In this case, the movement speeds of the fourth pending icon and the fourth pending holding portion are the same. Also in the pending icon movement effect described below, when the pending icon and the pending holding portion move together, the moving speed is the same. In addition, not limited to this, when the hold icon and the hold holding portion move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold hold portion, and the hold hold portion may move faster than the hold icon. You can also move faster. Note that the moving direction of the pending icon (holding portion) is different from the shifting direction (leftward direction) of the pending icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a suspended icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA are further moved upward (raised). At the same time, the third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA both move upward (raise). In this case, the movement speeds of the third pending icon (third pending holding portion) and the fourth pending icon (fourth pending holding portion) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the third pending icon (third pending holding unit) may be faster than that of the fourth pending icon (fourth pending holding unit). The 4 pending icon (fourth pending holder) may be faster than the third pending icon (third pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a suspended icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA change direction from above to move downward. , the third holding icon of the holding icons 9A and the third holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA move (rise) further upward, and the holding icon 9A The second hold icon and the second hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA both move upward (raise). In this case, the moving speeds of the second pending icon (second pending holding portion) and the third pending icon (third pending holding portion) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the second pending icon (second pending holding unit) may be faster than the third pending icon (third pending holding unit). The 3 pending icon (third pending holder) may be faster than the second pending icon (second pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a suspended icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (object hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, A third holding icon of the holding icons 9A and a third holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA change direction from the upward direction to the downward direction and move downward (fall), and the holding icon The second hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the second hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA further move (rise) upward, and the first hold icon and the hold icon of the hold icon 9A move upward. The first holding holding portion of the holding portion 9AA moves upward together (rises). In this case, the moving speeds of the first pending icon (first pending holding portion) and the second pending icon (second pending holding portion) are the same. However, not limited to this, the moving speed of the first pending icon (first pending holding unit) may be faster than that of the second pending icon (second pending holding unit). The second pending icon (second pending holder) may be faster than the first pending icon (first pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a suspended icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A The second holding icon and the second holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA change direction from the upward direction to the downward direction and move downward (lower), and the holding icon 9A moves downward. The first pending icon and the first pending/holding portion of the pending/holding portion 9AA further move (rise) upward, and the variation icon 9C moves (rises) upward. In this case, the variable icon holding unit 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the variation icon 9CC is not limited to this, and may move upward together with the variation icon holding section 9CC. Further, the moving speed amount of the variable icon 9C, the first pending icon (first pending holding section), and the second pending icon (second holding holding section) is the same. However, not limited to this, the moving speed amount of the first pending icon (first pending holding unit) may be faster than the second pending icon (second pending holding unit), The second pending icon (second pending holder) may be faster than the first pending icon (first pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed as lost patterns of "2", "3" and "4", and the second reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A and the reserved holding section 9AA. , the second holding holding portion of the holding icon 9A, the first holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are at the position before the movement. stop back.
Thus, in the suspended icon movement effect, a wave-like effect can be produced by the movements of the suspended icon 9A, the suspended holding part 9AA, and the variable icon 9C.
In addition, in the pending icon movement effect, when the pending icon 9A moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, when the holding/holding portion 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (eg, bouncing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a hold icon shift effect is performed. In this pending icon shift effect, among the pending icons 9A, the first pending icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, and the second pending icon moves to the first holding holding section. The first pending icon becomes the first pending icon, the third pending icon moves to the second pending holding unit and becomes the second pending icon, and the fourth pending icon (target pending) moves to the third pending holding unit It becomes the third pending icon.

After that, the new variation icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding section, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding section, and the new third hold Using the icon (object pending) and the third pending holding unit, the pending icon movement effect as described above is performed. After that, every time the pending icon shift effect is performed, the pending icon moving effect as described above is performed after the pending shift. Then, when the subject hold becomes the variable icon, an effect is performed in which the variable icon 9C moves upward like the hold icon movement effect E, and the series of effects is completed.

[Holding icon interlocking effect B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect B. FIG. This pending icon interlocking effect B is a effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the suspended icon interlocking effect B, as shown in FIG. 91(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be varied, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holder 9CC, the four reserved icons 9A, and the four reserved holders 9AA. is displayed. The variable icon holding unit 9CC is a holding unit that is arranged below the variable icon 9C and supports the variable icon 9C. The four suspension holders 9AA are holders for supporting the suspension icon 9A. Up to four pending icons 9A are arranged on the pending holding portion 9AA from the left in the order of winning the first starting port 20. FIG. Among the pending icons 9A, the leftmost pending icon (the oldest winning in the first starting port 20) is also called the first pending icon. The third pending icon from the left (the second oldest winning to the first starting port 20) is also called the third pending icon. , the fourth pending icon from the left (the most recent win to the first starting port 20) is also called the fourth pending icon. Further, in the holding holding unit 9AA, the holding holding unit holding the first holding icon is also called the first holding holding unit, the holding holding unit holding the second holding icon is also called the second holding holding unit, The hold holding unit holding the third hold icon is also called the third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit holding the fourth hold icon is also called the fourth hold holding unit.
The four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are white circles.
Further, among the hold icons 9A, the fourth hold icon is also called a target hold because it is a hold icon that triggers a hold icon movement effect, which will be described later. In other words, the pending icon movement effect to be described later is performed based on the display of the fourth pending icon (more specifically, the winning of the game ball in the first start port 20 in the three pending states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a suspended icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA both move upward (rise), The fourth pending icon (target pending) changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91(B), the red color is indicated by cross hatching). In this case, the movement speeds of the fourth pending icon and the fourth pending holding portion are the same. Also in the pending icon movement effect described below, when the pending icon and the pending holding part move together, the moving speed is the same. In addition, not limited to this, when the pending icon and the pending holding portion move together, the pending icon may move faster than the pending holding portion, and the pending holding portion may move faster than the pending icon. You can also move faster. Note that the moving direction of the pending icon (holding portion) is different from the shifting direction (leftward direction) of the pending icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a suspended icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA are further moved upward (raised). At the same time, the third pending icon of the pending icons 9A and the third pending holding portion of the pending holding portion 9AA both move upward (rise), and the third pending icon changes from white to red. (In the example of FIG. 91(C), the change to red is indicated by cross hatching). In this case, the movement speeds of the third pending icon (third pending holding portion) and the fourth pending icon (fourth pending holding portion) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the third pending icon (third pending holding unit) may be faster than that of the fourth pending icon (fourth pending holding unit). The 4 pending icon (fourth pending holder) may be faster than the third pending icon (third pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a suspended icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA change direction from above to move downward. , the third holding icon of the holding icons 9A and the third holding holding portion of the holding holding portions 9AA move (rise) further upward, and the holding icon 9A The second pending icon among them and the second pending holding portion of the pending holding portion 9AA both move upward (rise), and the second pending icon changes from white to red (Fig. 91 In the example of (D), cross-hatching shows the change to red). In this case, the moving speeds of the second pending icon (second pending holding portion) and the third pending icon (third pending holding portion) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the second pending icon (second pending holding unit) may be faster than the third pending icon (third pending holding unit). The 3 pending icon (third pending holder) may be faster than the second pending icon (second pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a suspended icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (object hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, A third holding icon of the holding icons 9A and a third holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA change direction from the upward direction to the downward direction and move downward (fall), and the holding icon The second hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the second hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA further move (rise) upward, and the first hold icon and the hold icon of the hold icon 9A move upward. The first suspension holding portion of the holding portion 9AA moves upward together (rises), and the first suspension icon changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91(E), the color changes to red). The changed state is indicated by cross hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the first pending icon (first pending holding portion) and the second pending icon (second pending holding portion) are the same. However, not limited to this, the moving speed of the first pending icon (first pending holding unit) may be faster than that of the second pending icon (second pending holding unit). The second pending icon (second pending holder) may be faster than the first pending icon (first pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a pending icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A The second holding icon and the second holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA change direction from the upward direction to the downward direction and move downward (lower), and the holding icon 9A moves downward. The first suspension icon and the first suspension holding portion of the suspension holding portion 9AA further move (rise) upward, the variation icon 9C moves upward (rise), and the variation The icon 9C changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91(F), the red color is indicated by cross hatching). In this case, the variable icon holding section 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the variation icon 9CC is not limited to this, and may move upward together with the variation icon holding portion 9CC. Further, the moving speed amount of the variable icon 9C, the first pending icon (first pending holding section), and the second pending icon (second holding holding section) is the same. However, not limited to this, the moving speed amount of the first pending icon (first pending holding unit) may be faster than the second pending icon (second pending holding unit), The second pending icon (second pending holder) may be faster than the first pending icon (first pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed as lost patterns of "2", "3" and "4", and the second reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A and the reserved holding section 9AA. , the second holding holding portion of the holding icon 9A, the first holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are at the position before the movement. stop back. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain changed to red pending.
In this manner, in the hold icon movement effect, the hold icon 9A changes to red hold each time it moves, and a wave-like effect is performed by the movements of the hold icon 9A, the hold holding section 9AA, and the variable icon 9C. be able to.
In addition, in the pending icon movement effect, when the pending icon 9A moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, when the holding/holding portion 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (eg, bouncing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a pending icon shift effect is performed. In this pending icon shift effect, among the pending icons 9A, the first pending icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, and the second pending icon moves to the first holding holding section. The first pending icon becomes the first pending icon, the third pending icon moves to the second pending holding unit and becomes the second pending icon, and the fourth pending icon (target pending) moves to the third pending holding unit It becomes the third pending icon.

After that, the new variation icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding section, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding section, and the new third hold Using the icon (object pending) and the third pending holding unit, the pending icon movement effect as described above is performed. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are still smiling characters. After that, every time the pending icon shift effect is performed, the pending icon moving effect as described above is performed after the pending shift. Then, when the target hold becomes the variable icon, the variable icon 9C is moved upward like the hold icon movement effect E while the variable icon is in the red hold state. ends.

[Hold icon interlocking effect C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect C. FIG. This pending icon interlocking effect C is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the hold icon interlocking effect C, as shown in FIG. 92(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be varied, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holder 9CC, the four reserved icons 9A, and the four reserved holders 9AA. is displayed. The variable icon holding unit 9CC is a holding unit that is arranged below the variable icon 9C and supports the variable icon 9C. The four suspension holders 9AA are holders for supporting the suspension icon 9A. Up to four pending icons 9A are arranged on the pending holding portion 9AA from the left in the order of winning the first starting port 20. FIG. Among the pending icons 9A, the leftmost pending icon (the oldest winning in the first starting port 20) is also called the first pending icon. The third pending icon from the left (the second oldest winning to the first starting port 20) is also called the third pending icon. , the fourth pending icon from the left (the most recent win to the first starting port 20) is also called the fourth pending icon. Further, in the holding holding unit 9AA, the holding holding unit holding the first holding icon is also called the first holding holding unit, the holding holding unit holding the second holding icon is also called the second holding holding unit, The hold holding unit holding the third hold icon is also called the third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit holding the fourth hold icon is also called the fourth hold holding unit.
The four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are white circles.
Further, among the hold icons 9A, the fourth hold icon is also called a target hold because it is a hold icon that triggers a hold icon movement effect, which will be described later. In other words, the pending icon movement effect to be described later is performed based on the display of the fourth pending icon (more specifically, the winning of the game ball in the first start port 20 in the three pending states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a suspended icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (object hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA both move upward (rise), The fourth hold icon (subject hold) changes from a circular shape to a smiling character (hereinafter also referred to as a smiling character). In this case, the movement speeds of the fourth pending icon and the fourth pending holding portion are the same. Also in the pending icon movement effect described below, when the pending icon and the pending holding portion move together, the moving speed is the same. In addition, not limited to this, when the hold icon and the hold holding portion move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold hold portion, and the hold hold portion may move faster than the hold icon. You can also move faster. Note that the moving direction of the pending icon (holding portion) is different from the shifting direction (leftward direction) of the pending icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), a pending icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA are further moved upward (raised). At the same time, the third holding icon of the holding icons 9A and the third holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA both move upward (rise), and the third holding icon moves upward from the circular shape. Change to a smiling character. In this case, the movement speeds of the third pending icon (third pending holding portion) and the fourth pending icon (fourth pending holding portion) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the third pending icon (third pending holding unit) may be faster than that of the fourth pending icon (fourth pending holding unit). The 4 pending icon (fourth pending holder) may be faster than the third pending icon (third pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a suspended icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA change direction from above to move downward. , the third holding icon of the holding icons 9A and the third holding holding portion of the holding holding portions 9AA move (rise) further upward, and the holding icon 9A The second hold icon and the second hold holding part of the hold holding part 9AA both move upward (rise), and the second hold icon changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. . In this case, the moving speeds of the second pending icon (second pending holding portion) and the third pending icon (third pending holding portion) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the second pending icon (second pending holding unit) may be faster than the third pending icon (third pending holding unit). The 3 pending icon (third pending holder) may be faster than the second pending icon (second pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), a suspended icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, The third holding icon of the holding icons 9A and the third holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA change direction from the upward direction to the downward direction and move downward (lower), and the holding icon The second hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the second hold holding portion of the hold holding portion 9AA further move (rise) upward, and the first hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the hold The first hold holding portion of the holding portion 9AA moves upward together (rises), and the first hold icon changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the moving speeds of the first pending icon (first pending holding portion) and the second pending icon (second pending holding portion) are the same. However, not limited to this, the moving speed of the first pending icon (first pending holding unit) may be faster than that of the second pending icon (second pending holding unit). The second pending icon (second pending holder) may be faster than the first pending icon (first pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a suspended icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold holding section of the hold holding section 9AA return to the position before the movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A is stopped. The second holding icon and the second holding holding part of the holding holding part 9AA change direction from the upward direction to the downward direction and move downward (lower), and the holding icon 9A moves downward. The first suspension icon and the first suspension holding portion of the suspension holding portion 9AA further move (rise) upward, the variation icon 9C moves upward (rise), and the variation The icon 9C changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the variable icon holding unit 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the variation icon 9CC is not limited to this, and may move upward together with the variation icon holding portion 9CC. Further, the moving speed amount of the variable icon 9C, the first pending icon (first pending holding portion), and the second pending icon (second pending holding portion) is the same. However, not limited to this, the moving speed amount of the first pending icon (first pending holding unit) may be faster than the second pending icon (second pending holding unit), The second pending icon (second pending holder) may be faster than the first pending icon (first pending holder).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed as lost patterns of "2", "3" and "4", and the second reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A and the reserved holding section 9AA. , the second holding holding portion of the holding icon 9A, the first holding holding portion of the holding holding portion 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are at the position before the movement. stop back. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain changed to the smiling characters.
In this manner, in the pending icon movement effect, the pending icon 9A changes to a smiling character each time it moves, and the motion of the pending icon 9A, the pending holding part 9AA, and the variable icon 9C produces a wave-like effect. be able to.
In addition, in the pending icon movement effect, when the pending icon 9A moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, when the holding/holding portion 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (eg, bouncing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), a pending icon shift effect is performed. In this pending icon shift effect, among the pending icons 9A, the first pending icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, and the second pending icon moves to the first holding holding section. The first pending icon becomes the first pending icon, the third pending icon moves to the second pending holding unit and becomes the second pending icon, and the fourth pending icon (target pending) moves to the third pending holding unit It becomes the third pending icon.

After that, the new variation icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding section, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding section, and the new third hold Using the icon (object pending) and the third pending holding unit, the pending icon movement effect as described above is performed. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are still smiling characters. After that, every time the pending icon shift effect is performed, the pending icon moving effect as described above is performed after the pending shift. Then, when the target hold becomes the variable icon, the variable icon 9C is moved upward like the hold icon movement effect E while the variable icon is a smiling character, and a series of these effects are performed. ends.

[Modification]
In the suspended icon interlocking effect C, when the suspended icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is moved in the suspended icon moving effect, all of them change to smiling characters. may be changed to For example, in the suspended icon movement effect B, when the third suspended icon moves, it changes from a circular shape to a character AA that is different from the smiling character. to a character BB different from the smiling character, in the holding icon movement effect D, when the first holding icon moves, the circular shape changes to the character CC different from the smiling character, and in the holding icon moving effect E, the When the variable icon moves, it may change from a circle to a character DD different from the smiling character. In this way, it is possible to produce an impactful presentation.

In the holding icon interlocking effect C, after the holding icon shifts in the holding icon shift effect, when the holding icon moving effect is performed again, the smiling character is used. After the icon shift effect, when the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C starts to move in the pending icon moving effect, it may change to a character different from the smiling character. For example, after the pending icon shifts in the pending icon shift effect (for example, after FIG. 92(H)), when the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C starts moving in the pending icon moving effect, a smile It changes to a character XX different from the character. Then, when the suspended icon shifts again in the suspended icon shift effect and the suspended icon 9A or the variable icon 9C starts to move in the suspended icon shift effect, it changes to the character YY different from the character XX. . In this way, it is possible to produce an impactful presentation.

In the pending icon interlocking effects A to C, the pending icon movement effect is performed based on the display of the fourth pending icon among the pending icons 9A. The suspended icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of a suspended icon different from the fourth suspended icon. For example, the pending icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of the third pending icon among the pending icons 9A, or based on the display of the second pending icon among the pending icons 9A. A configuration in which a suspended icon movement effect is performed, or a configuration in which a suspended icon movement effect is performed based on the display of the first suspended icon among the suspended icons 9A may be used.

[Effect example]
In the pending icon interlocking effects A to C, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed to display the pending icon 9A and the pending holding section 9AA for holding the pending icon 9A. A holding icon moving effect is performed in which the is moved together. According to this configuration, the expectation for a big hit with respect to the target hold can be improved by the effect that the hold icon 9A moves and the hold holding part 9AA moves, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the hold icon interlocking effects B and C, the hold icon 9A changes from the first state (white hold) to the second state (green hold or first character hold) while moving together with the hold holding portion 9AA. do. According to this configuration, in addition to the effect that the pending icon 9A moves and the pending holding section 9AA moves, the pending icon 9A changes from the first mode (white pending) to the second mode (green pending, or second mode). 1 character hold), it is possible to further improve the expectation for a big win with respect to the object hold, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the suspended icon interlocking effects A to C, the suspended icon 9A and the suspended holding section 9AA are displayed, and the variable icon 9C and the variable icon holding section 9CC for holding the variable icon 9C are displayed. The variable icon 9C moves according to the movement of the pending icon 9A and the pending holding section 9AA. According to this configuration, even the variable icon 9C moves according to the movement of the pending icon 9A and the pending holding part 9AA, so that the expectation for the big win for the target pending can be further improved, and the game is improved. Interest can be improved.

In the suspended icon-linked effects A to C, the variable icon holding section 9CC does not move even though the variable icon 9C moves. According to this configuration, even the variable icon 9C moves according to the movement of the pending icon 9A and the pending holding section 9AA, whereas the variable icon holding section 9CC does not move together, so that the The change icon 9C can be emphasized by losing the physical sensation, and as a result, the expectation for the big win for the target holding can be further improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the pending icon-linked effects A to C, the pending icon 9A includes a first pending icon (eg, the leftmost pending icon) and a second pending icon (eg, the second pending icon from the left), The suspension holding unit 9AA includes a first suspension holding unit that holds a first suspension icon and a second suspension holding unit that holds a second suspension icon. A holding holding part is displayed, a second holding icon and a second holding holding part are displayed, and then the first holding icon and the first holding holding part move together, and a second holding holding part is displayed. and the second holding holder move together, the direction of movement of the first holding and the direction of movement of the second holding may be different. According to this configuration, the movement of the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit and the movement of the second hold icon and the second hold holding unit are opposite or pass each other, and the hold The movement of the icon 9A and the holding/holding part 9AA can be impressed, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the expectation for the big win with respect to the object holding, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect for displaying a pending icon and a pending holding unit for holding the pending icon,
the second display effect is a display effect in which the suspension icon and the suspension holding unit move together;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the holding icon changes from the first mode to the second mode while moving together with the holding holding unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the reserved icon and the reserved holding section are displayed, and the variable icon and the variable icon holding section for holding the variable icon are displayed, and then , in the second display effect, the variable icon moves according to the movement of the suspension icon and the suspension holding unit;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
In the combination effect, the variable icon holding unit does not move in the second display effect even though the variable icon moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
the pending icon includes a first pending icon and a second pending icon;
The suspended icon holding unit includes a first suspended holding unit that holds the first suspended icon and a second suspended icon holding unit that holds the second suspended icon,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first pending icon and the first pending holding section are displayed, and the second pending icon and the second pending holding section are displayed. is displayed, and then, in the second display effect, the first suspension icon and the first suspension holding unit move together, and the second suspension icon and the second suspension holding unit move together. move together, and the direction of movement of the first holding retainer and the direction of movement of the second retainer may be different.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special hold change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. FIG. This special pending change effect can be executed during the change effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the special pending variation effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

[Special hold change effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the special hold change effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), an effect during variation is executed. The production during fluctuation is a production in which the production pattern fluctuates at high speed. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. Below, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first suspended icon 9A", the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area as the "second suspended icon 9A", and the suspended icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called a "third pending icon 9A". Further, in the display screen 7a, an area where the pending icon 9A is displayed is called a "reserved area", and an area where the variable icon 9C is displayed is called a "variable area". An information image IG reading "544 more rotations" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. This indicates the number of rotations (the number of fluctuations) until reaching the so-called ceiling.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is "6" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. An information image IG reading "544 more rotations" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the variable start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start production (first half) is a production performed before the production pattern starts to fluctuate. Here, the first pending icon 9A displayed in the pending area is changed from "white" to "green". The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white→blue→green→purple→red→gold. Further, the information image in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is updated to read "543 more rotations". Here, in particular, the aspect of the information image IG is changed. Specifically, the black characters of the information image IG are changed to white characters. In addition, the change of the aspect of the information image IG is performed based on the degree of expectation for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), the variable start effect (second half) is executed. The variation start performance (second half) is a performance in which the first suspension icon 9A, which has become "green" in the suspension area, moves to the variation area and becomes the variation icon 9C, and the performance pattern starts to fluctuate. Of course, the second pending icon 9A becomes the first pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A becomes the second pending icon 9A. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. An information image IG in white characters is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that constitute the production design (the same applies below). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3" symbol. It should be noted that two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is "green". An information image IG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(G), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The big hit confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the confirmation of the big win. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB is rainbow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Special hold change effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the special hold change effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 94(A), an effect during variation is executed. The production during fluctuation is a production in which the production pattern fluctuates at high speed. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed on the display screen 7a. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. Below, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first suspended icon 9A", the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area as the "second suspended icon 9A", and the suspended icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called a "third pending icon 9A". Further, in the display screen 7a, an area where the pending icon 9A is displayed is called a "reserved area", and an area where the variable icon 9C is displayed is called a "variable area". Further, the display screen 7b displays an information image IG reading "544 more rotations". This indicates the number of rotations (the number of fluctuations) until reaching the so-called ceiling. It is assumed that the display screen 7b is arranged so as to overlap the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol. Also, three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. Further, an information image IG reading "544 more rotations" is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the variable start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start production (first half) is a production performed before the production pattern starts to fluctuate. Here, the first pending icon 9A displayed in the pending area is changed from "white" to "green". The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white→blue→green→purple→red→gold. Also, the information image on the display screen 7b is updated to read "543 more rotations". Here, in particular, the aspect of the information image IG is changed. Specifically, the black characters of the information image IG are changed to white characters. In addition, the change of the aspect of the information image IG is performed based on the degree of expectation for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the variable start effect (second half) is executed. The variation start effect (second half) is a effect in which the first suspension icon 9A that has become "green" in the suspension area moves to the variation area and becomes the variation icon 9C, and the effect pattern starts to vary. Of course, the second pending icon 9A becomes the first pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A becomes the second pending icon 9A. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The display screen 7b displays an information image IG in white characters.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3" symbol. It should be noted that two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is "green". An information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. In the battle effect, the information image IG on the display screen 7b is hidden, and the teammate character CRA is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the display screen 7b displays the image of the portion covering the display screen 7a. Such display on the display screen 7b is continuously performed in the battle production, and the enemy character CRB may be displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(G), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The big hit confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the confirmation of the big win. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB is rainbow. At this time, the teammate character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In other words, the display screen 7b displays the image of the portion covering the display screen 7a even in the big win confirmation effect. Such display on the display screen 7b is continuously performed in the jackpot confirmation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. Nothing is displayed on the display screen 7b. This is because the information image GI showing the ceiling becomes unnecessary information when the jackpot is won.

[Special hold change effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the special hold change effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 95(A), an effect during variation is executed. The production during fluctuation is a production in which the production pattern fluctuates at high speed. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed on the display screen 7a. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. Below, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first suspended icon 9A", the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area as the "second suspended icon 9A", and the suspended icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called a "third pending icon 9A". Further, in the display screen 7a, an area where the pending icon 9A is displayed is called a "reserved area", and an area where the variable icon 9C is displayed is called a "variable area". Further, the display screen 7b displays an information image IG reading "544 more rotations". This indicates the number of rotations (the number of fluctuations) until reaching the so-called ceiling. It is assumed that the display screen 7b is arranged so as to overlap the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol. Also, three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. Further, the display screen 7b displays an information image IG reading "544 more rotations".

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), the variable start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start production (first half) is a production performed before the production pattern starts to fluctuate. Here, the first pending icon 9A displayed in the pending area is changed from "white" to "green". The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white→blue→green→purple→red→gold. Also, the information image on the display screen 7b is updated to read "Congratulations". That is, the mode of the information image IG is changed. In addition, the change of the mode of the information image IG is performed based on the degree of expectation for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), the variable start effect (second half) is executed. The variation start performance (second half) is a performance in which the first suspension icon 9A, which has become "green" in the suspension area, moves to the variation area and becomes the variation icon 9C, and the performance pattern starts to fluctuate. Of course, the second pending icon 9A becomes the first pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A becomes the second pending icon 9A. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. An information image IG reading "Congratulations" is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3" symbol. It should be noted that two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is "green". An information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. In the battle effect, the information image IG on the display screen 7b is hidden, and the teammate character CRA is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the display screen 7b displays the image of the portion covering the display screen 7a. Such display on the display screen 7b is continuously performed in the battle production, and the enemy character CRB may be displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(G), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The big hit confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the confirmation of the big win. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB is rainbow. At this time, the teammate character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In other words, the display screen 7b displays the image of the portion covering the display screen 7a even in the big win confirmation effect. Such display on the display screen 7b is continuously performed in the jackpot confirmation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. Nothing is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the special hold change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the suspension change (mode change) of the variation icon 9C at the start of variation of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is suspended after the first suspension icon 9A is subjected to the suspension change in the suspension area. This is done by moving the changed first pending icon 9A to the variable area (FIGS. 93(C)(D), 94(C)(D), 95(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the hold change of the hold icon becomes conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved. The variable icon 9C corresponds to the "variable icon", and the first suspended icon 9A corresponds to the "suspended icon".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the mode of the information image IG is changed according to the hold change of the first hold icon 9A (FIGS. 93(C), 94(C), and 95(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the big win, and to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the information image IG corresponds to the "information image".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode is changed by changing the black character information image IG to white characters (FIGS. 93(C) and 94(C)). According to this configuration, the change in the mode of the information image IG is conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information image IG is the number of rotations (the number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling (Figs. 93(A) to (E), Figs. 94(A) to (E), Fig. 95 ( A) (B)). According to this configuration, since the information image IG is useful information, the change in the aspect of the information image IG is conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b different from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 94(A) to (E), FIGS. 95(A) to (E)). According to this configuration, the change in the mode of the information image IG is conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved. The display screen 7a corresponds to "display screen", and the display screen 7b corresponds to "another display screen".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation for the big win. According to this configuration, the change in the aspect of the information image IG can give the player a sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of special hold|maintenance change production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the information image IG indicates the number of rotations (the number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling, but the information image IG is not particularly limited. For example, the number of fluctuations from the big win (number of games), the number of big wins, the number of consecutive games, etc., may be any information that the player may visually recognize during the game.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the display color of the variable icon 9C (first pending icon 9A) is changed. On the other hand, the shape of the variable icon 9C (first pending icon 9A) may be changed. For example, it is conceivable to change the variable icon 9C (first reserved icon 9A) to a character icon of the gaming machine 1 theme.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, black characters are changed to white characters as a change of the information image IG (FIGS. 93(C) and 94(C)). However, any display color may be used. For example, it may be changed to blue, green, purple, red, gold, or the like.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the aspect of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation of transition to the big winning game. On the other hand, the aspect of the information image IG may be changed based on the degree of expectation for the transition to the small winning game or the degree of expectation for the type of the big winning in the case of a big winning.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
It is possible to variably display symbols on a display screen, and before the symbols start to vary, a pending icon displayed in a pending region of the display screen moves to the variable region of the display screen and changes. A gaming machine in which the pattern starts to change as soon as it becomes an icon,
The change in the form of the variable icon accompanying the start of the pattern fluctuation is performed by changing the form of the reserved icon in the reserved area and then moving the changed form of the reserved icon to the variable area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
changing the mode of an information image displaying predetermined information in accordance with the timing of the mode change of the pending icon;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2,
The change in the aspect of the information image is performed by changing the display color of the information image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2 or aspect C2-3,
The information image is an image displaying information related to the variation of the pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-4,
The information image is an image displayed on a display screen different from the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-5,
The change in the aspect of the information image is performed based on the player's expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-6,
The change in the aspect of the information image changes the predetermined information displayed by the information image, and can inform the player of the determination of transition to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The holding expectation degree effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG. This pending expectation level performance can be executed during the variable performance of performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pending expectation degree effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Suspended expectation performance A to C is executed in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state. It should be noted that it can be executed in the same way in the low-probability-low base state. Further, in the pending expectation effect B, it is assumed that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Holding Expectation Level A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the pending expectation effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. The suspended icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is the "first suspended icon 9B", the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is the "second suspended icon 9B", and the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. is called a "third pending icon 9B". Also, the area where the pending icon 9B is displayed is called the "reserved area", and the area where the variable icon 9C is displayed is called the "variable area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the pending change effect A is executed. The pending change effect A is a effect in which the pending icon 9B changes to an expectation degree icon imitating an expectation degree image. Here, the mode of the third pending icon 9B has changed to an expectation level icon "hot?". The expectation level icon "Hot?" means that it is unknown whether it is hot or not, and is the first mode icon that reserves the suggestion of the level of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (losing) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in a losing mode. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Then, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped. The order of temporary stop of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not limited to this. Also, two or more of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop at the same time. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "6" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. One of them is an expectation degree icon (first mode icon) of "Hot?". The change icon 9C is hidden at the same time as the fixed stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. One of the pending icons 9B is an expectation level icon (first mode icon) of "Hot?".

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a pending change effect B is executed. The pending change effect B is a effect in which the expectation level icon of the first mode (first mode icon) changes to the expectation level icon of the second mode (second mode icon). Here, the expectation level icon (first mode icon) "hot?" is changed to the expectation level icon (second mode icon) "hot". Along with the change to the second mode icon, the "hot" expectation level image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The expectation level icon includes an image obtained by reducing the expectation level image MG. Specifically, it includes images obtained by reducing the character images of "hot", "heat", and "i".

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), an image movement effect is executed. The image moving effect is a effect in which the degree-of-expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved, as indicated by the arrow Y, to the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the degree of expectation image MG is reduced and displayed, and its mode is changed. Specifically, the horizontal writing "hot" is changed to the vertical writing "hot".

After that, through a plurality of fluctuations, the expectation level icon (second mode icon) moves to the fluctuation area, and the fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 96(G). The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. An expectation level icon (second mode icon) is displayed in the variable area at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the three performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance symbols is the same). The identification information indicates a number that constitutes the effect pattern (the same applies below). Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. The expectation degree icon (second mode icon) of the variable area disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Holding Expectation Level B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the pending expectation effect B. FIG. In the pending expectation effect B, the screen display device 7 has a display screen 7a and a display screen 7b arranged so as to be adjacent to the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.
First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variable start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. The suspended icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is the "first suspended icon 9B", the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is the "second suspended icon 9B", and the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. is called a "third pending icon 9B". Also, the area where the pending icon 9B is displayed is called the "reserved area", and the area where the variable icon 9C is displayed is called the "variable area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the pending change effect A is executed on the display screen 7a. The pending change effect A is a effect in which the pending icon 9B changes to an expectation degree icon imitating an expectation degree image. Here, the mode of the third pending icon 9B has changed to an expectation level icon "Hot?". The expectation level icon "Hot?" means that it is unknown whether it is hot or not, and is the first mode icon that reserves the suggestion of the level of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (losing) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in a losing mode. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R is slowed down, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Then, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped. The order of temporary stop of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not limited to this. Also, two or more of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop at the same time. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "6" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. One of them is an expectation degree icon (first mode icon) of "Hot?". The change icon 9C is hidden at the same time as the fixed stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. One of the pending icons 9B is an expectation level icon (first mode icon) of "Hot?".

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), a pending change effect B is executed. The pending change effect B is a effect in which the expectation level icon of the first mode (first mode icon) changes to the expectation level icon of the second mode (second mode icon). Here, the expectation level icon (first mode icon) "hot?" is changed to the expectation level icon (second mode icon) "hot". Along with the change to the second mode icon, the "hot" expectation level image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the expectation level icon includes an image obtained by reducing the expectation level image MG. Specifically, it includes images obtained by reducing the character images of "hot", "heat", and "i".

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), an image movement effect is executed. The image moving effect is a effect in which the expectation degree image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved to the lower right portion of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y, and then displayed on the display device 7b. At this time, the degree-of-expectation image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its mode is changed. Specifically, the horizontal writing "hot" is changed to the vertical writing "hot".

After that, through a plurality of fluctuations, the degree-of-expectation icon (second mode icon) moves to the fluctuation area, and the fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 97(G). The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. An expectation level icon (second mode icon) is displayed in the variable area at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Further, the display screen 7b displays an expectation level image MG of "hot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the three performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance symbols is the same). Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. The expectation degree icon (second mode icon) of the variable area disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. Further, the display screen 7b displays an expectation level image MG of "hot". Of course, the expectation level image MG on the display screen 7b may be hidden along with the confirmation stop.

[Holding Expectation Level C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the pending expectation level effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. The suspended icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is the "first suspended icon 9B", the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is the "second suspended icon 9B", and the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. is called a "third pending icon 9B". Also, the area where the pending icon 9B is displayed is called the "reserved area", and the area where the variable icon 9C is displayed is called the "variable area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), an expectation degree image display effect is executed. The expectation degree image display effect is an effect of displaying an expectation degree image in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a. Here, the expectation degree image MG of "hot" is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), an image movement effect is executed. The image moving effect is a effect in which the degree-of-expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved, as indicated by the arrow Y, to the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the degree-of-expectation image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its mode is changed. Specifically, the horizontal writing "hot" is changed to the vertical writing "hot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left performance design and the right performance design are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the performance design is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB is rainbow-colored to notify the victory of the teammate character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols (specifically, identification information constituting the performance symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "3" pattern. Also, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the holding expectation level presentation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, an expectation level image MG that suggests the degree of expectation for transition to the big win game is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a (FIG. 98(B)). Under this configuration, in suggesting the degree of expectation by changing the mode of the pending icon 9B displayed in the pending area of the display screen 7a, the mode of the pending icon 9B is changed to an expectation level icon imitating the level of expectation image MG. change (FIGS. 96(B)(E), 97(B)(E)). According to this configuration, since the pending icon changes to the expectation level icon that imitates the expectation level image, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the amusement of the game.

The jackpot game corresponds to the "advantageous gaming state", the expectation level image MG corresponds to the "expectation level image", and the central area of the display screen 7a where the expectation level image MG is displayed is the "predetermined area". Equivalent to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the expectation level icon includes images obtained by reducing the character images of "heat" and "i" in the expectation level image MG (FIGS. 96(B)(E), 97( B) (E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation level icon indicates the level of expectation in the same manner as the expectation level image, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, there are the expectation level icon of the first mode "hot?" that withholds the suggestion of the expectation level and the expectation level icon of the second mode "hot" that suggests the expectation level ( 96(B)(E), 97(B)(E)). According to this configuration, the player expects that the expectation level icon of the first mode will change to the expectation level icon of the second mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the expectation level icon of the first mode changes to the expectation level icon of the second mode, the expectation level image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 96(E), FIG. 97(E)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the expectations of the player will be increased by the display of the expectation level image MG in addition to the change of the icon, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the degree-of-expectation image MG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed to another area (FIGS. 96(F), 97(F), and 98(C)). . According to this configuration, compared to the case where the expectation image MG is only displayed, the possibility that the player will pay attention to the expectation image MG is high, and the expectation image MG stands out, so that the player is further encouraged. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the degree-of-expectation image MG is moved and displayed on the display screen 7b different from the display screen 7a (FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will pay attention to the degree of expectation image MG, and the degree of expectation image MG stands out, so that the player can have a greater sense of expectation and enjoyment of the game. be able to. Also, by displaying on the separate display screen 7b, the interest in the game can be improved without interfering with the presentation of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a corresponds to "display screen", and the display screen 7b corresponds to "another display screen".

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the expectation level image MG is displayed in a different area, it is changed in a manner different from when it is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the horizontal writing "hot" is changed to the vertical writing "hot". According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an effect that effectively utilizes the area of the display screen 7a (7b), thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pending expectation effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expectation level image MG moved and displayed in the image movement effect is not displayed in subsequent effects (FIGS. 96(F) to (H), FIGS. 98(C) to (G)). On the other hand, the moving and displayed expectation level image MG may be continuously displayed until the change in the corresponding reserved memory ends. Of course, it may be temporarily hidden while the corresponding reserved memory is changed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b are arranged adjacent to each other, but the display screens 7a and 7b may be arranged apart from each other. Moreover, the display screen 7b may be arranged so as to overlap the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying, in a predetermined area of a display screen, an expectation level image suggesting the level of expectation for transition to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player,
In suggesting the degree of expectation by changing the mode of the pending icon displayed in the pending area of the display screen, it is possible to change the mode of the pending icon to an expectation degree icon imitating the degree of expectation image. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
The expectation icon includes a reduced image obtained by reducing at least part of the expectation image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
The expectation level icon includes a first mode icon that withholds the suggestion of the expectation level, and a second mode icon that suggests the expectation level,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3,
After the holding icon changes to the first mode icon, when the first mode icon changes to the second mode icon, the expectation degree image is displayed in the predetermined area of the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-4,
The expectation degree image displayed in a predetermined area of the display screen is then moved and displayed in an area different from the predetermined area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
The another area is set on a display screen different from the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5 or aspect C3-6,
When the expectation degree image is displayed in the different area, it is changed in a different manner from when it is displayed in the predetermined area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

99 to 101, the operation means operation state notification effects A to C will be described below. This operation means operation state notification effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation means operation state notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 and sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). Also, the corresponding sound data is read out from the ROM 103 and the sound is output from the speaker 67 .

[Operation means operation state notification effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect A. FIG. FIG. 99 shows the state of the display screen 7a and the effect button 63. As shown in FIG. The operation means operation state notification effect is an effect in which a predetermined notification is given to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses while the effect button 63 is operated. The effect button 63 has a first state (protruded state) when not operated (pressed) by the player, and a second state (state where the protruding amount is reduced or does not protrude) when it is operated (pressed). state) and when not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect button 63 is in a state (OFF) in which it is not operated (pressed) by the player.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state. Also, here, the display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. ), when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player, a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), the display screen 7a appears as shown in FIG. 99(C). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed, and a character image of "Ooooooooooo" is also displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 99(D), an enlarged character image and a character image of "How long have you been pressing the button?" are displayed. That is, the character image indicates that the effect button 63 is being operated (pressed). As a result, when the player unintentionally presses the effect button 63, the player can be notified of the fact.

FIG. 99(E) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification of FIG. 99(D). When the player stops pressing (applying force to) the effect button 63, the display of the character image and the character image of "How long have you been pressing the button?" disappears. The timing at which the display of the character image and the character image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed from the detection. may

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R that have been variably displayed on the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed. Here, "567" is stop-displayed in a lost mode.

When the next special figure variation after the special figure variation finished in FIG. 99(F) is started, as shown in FIG. be. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again in a state where the display screen 7a does not prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 (outside the operation valid period), the counter (not shown) counts again. to start.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed while the player has operated (pressed) the effect button 63 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), the display screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 99(H). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed in 7a, and a character image of "Ooooooooo" is also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(I), an enlarged character image and a character image of "Keep pressing again?" are displayed. That is, the character image indicates that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) again. This is because the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed twice for a predetermined period while the player is not prompted to operate the effect button 63 (outside the operation valid period). Here, since the effect button 63 was operated twice in succession, the previous change and the current change, after the character image of "Hey, hey", instead of the character image of "How long do you keep pressing the button?" , the character image of "Keep pressing again?" in FIG. 99(I) is displayed. Note that if the effect button 63 is operated again within a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the character image "How long have you been pressing the button?" ” is displayed.

The player is still operating (pressing) the effect button 63 even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the character image "Keep pressing again?" If there is, the content of the character image changes as shown in FIG. 99(J). Here, the character image is switched (changed) from "Keep pressing the button again?" to "Release the button!". Here, since there is a high possibility that the player has intentionally pressed the effect button 63, the character image is switched to a stronger expression for stopping the pressing of the effect button 63.

FIG. 99(K) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification of FIG. 99(J). When the player stops pressing (applying force to) the effect button 63, the content of the character image changes while the character image continues to be displayed. Here, the character image switches from "Please take your hand off the button!" to "Yes. Well done." Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the character image "Yes. Well done" is displayed, both the character image and the character image disappear.

On the other hand, when the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 again in the state of FIG. 99(K), the character image and the character image of "oooooooo" are displayed immediately after the operation. Here, there is a high possibility that the player has intentionally pressed the effect button 63, and the player is making a retort.

[Operation means operation state notification effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining operation means operation state notification effect B. FIG. FIG. 100 shows the state of the display screen 7a and the effect button 63. As shown in FIG. The operation means operation state notification effect is an effect in which a predetermined notification is given to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses while the effect button 63 is operated. The effect button 63 has a first state (protruded state) when not operated (pressed) by the player, and a second state (state where the protruding amount is reduced or does not protrude) when it is operated (pressed). state) and when not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In the image reversal expectation degree suggesting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect button 63 is in a state (OFF) in which it is not operated (pressed) by the player.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state. Also, here, the display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. ), when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed, turned on) by the player, a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

As shown in FIG. 100(B), before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses with the effect button 63 being operated (pressed) (before the counter reaches a predetermined value), the player presses the effect button. When the hand is released from 63 (the pressure is stopped), the counter stops counting and the counter value is reset. After that, in a state where the player is not prompted to operate the effect button 63 (outside the operation valid period), as shown in FIG. ), the counter starts counting again.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), the display screen 7a appears as shown in FIG. 100(E). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed, and a character image of "Ooooooooooo" is also displayed. As a result, when the player unintentionally presses the effect button 63, the player can be notified of the fact. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as "2".

FIG. 100(F) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification of FIG. 100(E). When the player stops pressing (applying force to) the effect button 63, the display of the character image and the character image of "Ooooooooo" disappears. The timing at which the display of the character image and the character image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed from the detection. may If the player continues to press the effect button 63 without stopping, the character image and character image of FIG. In FIG. 100(F), the right decorative pattern 8R is also stop-displayed with "2", and is in the ready-to-win state.

In FIG. 100(G), in the reach state of "2↓2", the button image BTN, the operation prompting image RND consisting of the characters "Press!", and the timer bar image TBI indicating the valid period of operation are displayed. It is Here, it is in a state (operation effective period) in which the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63 . At this time, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player, the counter does not start counting. This is because the operation of the effect button 63 is performed at appropriate timing, so there is no need to call attention to an unintended operation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(H), after the effect has progressed by operating the effect button 63 during the operation effective period, that is, after the operation is outside the effective period, the player releases the effect button 63. If the pressing is continued without releasing, the counter (not shown) starts counting again.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed while the player has operated (pressed) the effect button 63 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), the display screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 100(I). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed in 7a, and a character image of "Ooooooooo" is also displayed. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed as "3", and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed as "232".

When the next special figure variation of the special figure variation finished in FIG. 100 (I) is started, as shown in FIG. be. At this time, if the player continues to press the effect button 63 without stopping, the character image and the character image of "Hey, hey, hey" continue to be displayed. The character image and character image of (D) are displayed. On the other hand, when the player stops pressing the effect button 63, the display of the character image and the character image of "Hey, hey, hey" disappears, as shown in FIG. 100(J). The timing at which the display of the character image and the character image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed from the detection. may

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(K), the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. When the operation (pressing) of is started, the counter starts counting. This is because even if it is immediately before the operation valid period, it is still outside the operation valid period. After that, as shown in FIG. 100(L), in addition to the button image BTN, the timer bar image TBI is displayed. The counter of the counter is stopped and the count value is reset.

[Operation means operation state notification effect C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect C. FIG. 101(A) to (F) show the state of the left sub-display screen 64L and the sword member 65. FIG. (G) to (L) of FIG. 101 show the states of the left sub-display screen 64L and the select button 68. FIG. The operation means operation state notification effect is an effect in which a predetermined notification is given to the player after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed while the operation unit such as the sword member 65 or the select button 68 is being operated. The sword member 65 can be changed between a first state in which it is not pushed downward by the player (protruding state) and a second state in which it is pushed downward (a state in which the protruding amount is reduced). When not pushed downward by an operator, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring. The select button 68 has a first state (protruded state) when not operated (pressed) by the player, and a second state (a reduced protruding state or no protruding state) when operated (pressed) by the player. state) and when not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), while nothing is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, the sword member 65 is operated (pushed downward) by the player. It is in a non-operated state (OFF). At least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and the function display image of the gaming machine 1, the pending icon 9A, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C, etc. may be displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state.

From the state shown in FIG. 101(A) to the state where the player is not prompted to operate the sword member 65 (outside the operation valid period), the player moves the sword member 65 as shown in FIG. 101(B). is operated (pushed downward, ON), a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

When the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65 and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in FIG. The sub-display screen 64L displays a text image of "The sword is being pushed in!" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the sword member 65 is arranged. That is, the character image shows that the sword member 65 is being operated (pushed downward). As a result, when the player unintentionally pushes the sword member 65, the player can be notified of the fact.

FIG. 101(D) shows the left sub-display screen 64L when the player stops pushing the sword member 65 after the notification of FIG. 101(C). When the player stops pushing (applying force to) the sword member 65, the display of the character image "The sword is being pushed in!" and the arrow image disappear. The timing at which the display of the character image and the arrow image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pushing the sword member 65, or after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed from the detection. may

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(E), in a state where the player is not prompted to operate the sword member 65 (outside the operation valid period), the player again operates the sword member 65 (presses downward). ), the counter (not shown) starts counting again.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed while the player has operated (pushed downward) the sword member 65 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in FIG. , the left sub-display screen 64L displays a text image of "So don't push the sword in" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the sword member 65 is arranged. That is, the character image shows that the sword member 65 is again operated (pushed downward). This is because the sword member 65 is repeatedly pressed twice for a predetermined period while the player is not prompted to operate the sword member 65 (outside the operation valid period). Here, since the sword member 65 has been operated twice in succession in the same variation, the character image "The sword is being pushed in!" in FIG. Do not press the .” character image is displayed. It should be noted that if the sword member 65 is operated again within a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the character image "The sword is being pushed in!" Don't push it in!" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 101(G), after FIG. 101(F), when the player stops operating the sword member 65 and presses the right side of the select button 68, the message "So don't push the sword in." While the display of the character image and the arrow image disappears, the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the sword member 65 is operated.

When the player operates (long presses) the right side of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), the left A character image of "The right side of the select button is being pressed!" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged are displayed on the sub display screen 64L. That is, the character image indicates that the right side of the select button 68 is being operated (long pressed). As a result, when the player unintentionally presses the right side of the select button 68 for a long time, the player can be notified of this fact.

As shown in FIG. 101(I), after FIG. 101(H), when the player stops operating the select button 68 to the right and presses the left and the bottom of the select button 68, "the right of the select button is pressed. It's been done!" disappears and the arrow image disappears, while the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the right side of the select button 68 is operated.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed while the player has operated (long-pressed) the left and bottom of the select button 68 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in FIG. 101(J), , the left sub-display screen 64L displays a text image of "Select button left and bottom pressed!" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged. In other words, the character image indicates that the left and lower sides of the select button 68 are being operated (long pressed). As a result, when the player unintentionally presses the left and lower sides of the select button 68 for a long time, the player can be notified of this fact.

As shown in FIG. 101(K), after FIG. 101(J), when the player stops operating the select button 68 left and down and presses the top of the select button 68, "select button left and down is being pressed!” and the arrow image disappear, while the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the left and bottom of the select button 68 are operated.

After a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed while the player has operated (long-pressed) the select button 68 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in FIG. A text image of "Select button up is being pressed!" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged are displayed on the sub display screen 64L. That is, the character image indicates that the select button 68 is being operated (long-pressed). As a result, when the player unintentionally presses the select button 68 for a long time, the player can be notified of the fact.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means operation state notification effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, is a gaming machine provided with an effect button 63 that can be changed from the first state (protruding state) to the second state (non-protruding state) by the player. The effect button 63 is in the first state when no force is applied by the player. A predetermined notification is made. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect executed by the gaming machine from becoming unintended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, thereby improving interest. For example, if an operation is unintentionally performed outside the effective period of operation, when the effective period of operation is reached, the performance progresses in a blink of an eye, and the player loses track of what happened. Sometimes. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation. 100 and 101 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the player keeps the effect button 63 in the second state for a predetermined period of time, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect executed by the gaming machine from becoming unintended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, thereby improving interest. 100 and 101 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, after the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a, when the player returns the effect button 63 to the first state, the predetermined image is displayed from the display screen 7a. disappears. According to this configuration, after the unintended operation or operation state by the player is resolved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such as the original effect becoming invisible due to the predetermined image, thereby improving interest. 100 and 101 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, after the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a, when the player continues to hold the effect button 63 in the second state, the content of the predetermined image is displayed. changes. According to this configuration, when there is a high possibility that the player is intentionally operating the effect button 63 outside the operation valid period of the effect button 63, a message can be displayed according to the state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance executed by the gaming machine from being as intended, and to improve the interest. 100 and 101 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the predetermined image suggests that the effect button 63 is in the second state. It is possible to make the player more easily aware of the fact that he or she is doing so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance executed by the gaming machine from being as intended, and to improve the interest. 100 and 101 are the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the speaker 67 outputs a predetermined sound when the player keeps the effect button 63 in the second state for a predetermined period of time. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect executed by the gaming machine from becoming unintended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, thereby improving interest.

[Modification]
A modified example of the operation means operation state notification effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operating means operation state notification effect A, the fluctuations in FIGS. 99(G) to (L) have been explained as the fluctuations subsequent to the fluctuations in FIGS. 99(A) to (F). However, the fluctuations in FIGS. 99(G) to (L) are not fluctuations subsequent to the fluctuations in FIGS. 99(A) to (F), but fluctuations within a predetermined number of fluctuations in FIGS. may be

[Modification 2]
In the operation means operation state notification effects A to C, portions displayed as character images may be output as voice from the speaker 67 . For example, the speaker 67 may output voices such as "Hey hey hey" in FIG. Even in this case, the player can be notified of this fact. In addition, the same content may be output by voice from the speaker 67 in conjunction with the character image displayed on the display screen 7a or the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine comprising a movable part capable of being changed from a first state to a second state by a player,
The movable part is in the first state when no force is applied by the player,
When the player maintains the movable part in the second state for a predetermined period of time, a predetermined notification is given to the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1, further comprising:
Equipped with display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
displaying a predetermined image on the display means when the player maintains the movable part in the second state for a predetermined period of time;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
After the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, when the player returns the movable portion to the first state, the display of the predetermined image disappears from the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2 or aspect D1-3,
After the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, if the player continues to keep the movable portion in the second state, the content of the predetermined image changes.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-2 to D1-4,
The predetermined image suggests that the movable portion is in a second state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1, further comprising:
Equipped with sound output means,
When the player maintains the movable part in the second state for a predetermined period of time, the sound output means outputs a predetermined sound;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The load application effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. FIG. 102 to 104, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for the sake of clarity.

In this load imparting effect, a predetermined vibration is applied to the effect button 63 in the so-called left-handed game state and right-handed game state, so that the upper surface of the effect button 63 is touched with the vibration of the effect button 63 as a load. It is possible to execute an effect of giving (transmitting) to the palm of the player who is playing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when the command includes an instruction to execute a load imparting effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image display device 7 is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the relay board 108 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute a load application effect is included, a signal is sent to the vibration motor arranged inside the effect button 63. While outputting and driving to generate a predetermined vibration in the production button 63, a signal is output to a decoration board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted, which is arranged inside the production button 63, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted. , the full-color LED is driven to make the production button 63 have a predetermined light emission mode. The load giving performance is not performed as one performance of the so-called look-ahead performance, but a performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 decides by lottery whether or not to execute the load giving performance during the performance.

Various background images of the variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns correspond to the effect modes described later. and a background image imitating "snow". These various background images may be still images or moving images. Here, a moving image is used as the background image.

Here, the load application effect A will be described first, and then the load application effect B and the load application effect C will be described in order.

[Load giving effect A]
First, the load application effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the load application effect A. FIG. In the game state of right-handed hitting, the load imparting effect A applies the vibration of the effect button 63 as a load to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 by applying a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63. - 特許庁It is possible to execute the production of (conveying). In addition, as the game state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

The load imparting effect A in this embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It should be noted that if the image "Right-handed" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be left until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes) after the game state of Right-handed is started. or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number “8” → number “9” → number “1” → number “2” → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is changed to a display mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, by arranging the sub-variation area so that it is on the front side, the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of the fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. Visibility is not hindered.In addition, the background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that an opaque small size Only the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and the same size is displayed at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be varied (variable display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "5" and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, a brief description of the variable icon and the reserved icon will be given. As shown in FIG. 102(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently fluctuating as digestion of the second special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 102B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the front side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not blocked by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Note that the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. It is hidden (disappears) from 7a.

Here, a white spherical suspension icon 9B is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the third suspension display position 9Bd, and no suspension icon exists at the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three white spherical pending icons that have not been digested and are stocked. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be easily discerned by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, even in the load imparting effect A, it is always visible.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in the shapes and colors of the icons can be used to determine the difference in the degree of expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, of the six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a green spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that the green spherical icon may be replaced with a smiling sphere icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

On the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 Above the number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the number of game balls entering the game ball, and above the arrangement of these numbers, the production mode selection unit SEL that can select the production mode is arranged. Is displayed. In the effect mode selection unit SEL, effect modes composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the reel is displayed. By rotating, the effect mode reaching the specific area SELa is displayed larger than other effect modes. The selected effect mode is the effect mode located in the specific area SELa. In this embodiment, the B mode is selected, and the theme image of this B mode (here, an image imitating "clouds") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown. It's becoming

It should be noted that the period during which the production mode can be selected is, in addition to the period during which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing down) the production button 63 as the decorative patterns start to fluctuate. A message "mode change with effect button" is placed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is the period that is displayed as The load imparting effect A is performed after a period in which the effect mode can be selected has passed. That is, when the load imparting effect A is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected, but the effect mode selected before the load imparting effect A is performed is continued in the load imparting effect A. there is

In addition, although the effect mode selection part SEL overlaps the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L and other images do not impede the visibility because the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are arranged and displayed behind the foreground). In other words, the effect mode selection unit SEL keeps the left decorative pattern 8L and others displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image of , even in the load application effect A, it can be visually recognized. When a specific effect of a battle effect, which is super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection unit SEL is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a with this as a trigger. . Also, if the effect mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore in various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL, the A mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL is lowered. By going to , the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "clouds". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the B mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL, the B mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL is lowered. By going to , the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the C mode, an effect with the theme of "rain" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "rain". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL, the C mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL is lowered. By going to , the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "snow". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the D mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL, the D mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL is lowered. By going to , the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. , and the A mode is displayed in the specific area SELa again.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode, in the three production modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, the type of load application (load application mode ) exists (hereinafter referred to as “single load application mode”), and this single load application mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one production mode (single production mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (modes of load application) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"). Any one load application mode may be selected from a plurality of load application modes. In the load application effect A in the present embodiment, the B mode is selected, and a single load application mode is performed.

Here, the single loading mode and multiple loading modes will be briefly described. In the single load application mode, there is only the normal load application mode in which the production button 63 is given a one-choice tightening vibration such as "bub". On the other hand, in the plurality of load application modes, the first specific time load application in which the single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 in the manner of "bububu", "bububu", "bububu", and "bub". Mode, single-tightening vibration is applied three times. 3rd specific time load application mode, "bu", "bubu", "bububu", "bubububu", "bububububu", the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) Vibration is given A fourth specific-time load application mode, in which long vibrations are applied in the manner of "buzz" (for example, long vibrations are applied for 30 seconds). Fifth specific-time load application Aspects exist.

In addition, the hit expectation degree in the said fluctuation|variation is preset with respect to a single load application mode and several load application modes. For the single load application mode (one-choice tightening vibration), the hit expectation corresponding to the above-described white spherical icon is set in advance. Among the plurality of load application modes, the third specific time load application mode (337 time signature vibration) corresponds to the yellow (gold) star icon described above. The degree of hit expectation is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases one by one)) corresponds to the purple spherical icon described above. The hit expectation level corresponding to the above-described red spherical icon is set in advance, and the hit expectation level corresponding to the green spherical icon described above for the first specific time load application mode (one-fastening vibration) is set in advance. The degree of expectation of winning is set in advance and the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) corresponds to the white spherical icon described above. For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest degree of expectation for winning, and the fourth specific time load application mode (the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases one by one ) vibration) has the second highest expectation for hitting, the second specific time load application mode (three-fastening vibration) has the third highest expectation for hitting, and the first specific time load applying mode (single-fastening vibration) The degree of expectation for winning is the fourth highest, and the degree of expectation for winning is the lowest for the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) and the single load application mode (one-tight vibration).

Arrangement of a sub-variation area on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in which the above-described small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed). A load application execution permission selection portion FG indicating whether or not the execution of the load application effect A is permitted is displayed above. When the execution of the load application effect A is permitted, an image "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection part FG, whereas when the execution of the load application effect A is not permitted. , an image of "load application OFF" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection portion FG. In this embodiment, the execution of the load application effect A is permitted, and an image of "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection portion FG. It should be noted that the period during which the execution of the load imparting effect A can be selected is the same period as the above-described period during which the effect mode can be selected, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. , along with the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the above-described message "Mode change with production button" telling that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 Seconds) is a period in which it is arranged and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection section SEL) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . Every time a select button 68, which is a button different from the performance button 63, is operated during this period, the execution permission of the load imparting performance A and the non-permission of the load imparting performance A (execution prohibition of the load imparting performance A) are alternately performed. can be selected.

Although the load application execution permission selection part FG overlaps the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R and other images are positioned on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the side (that is, the frontmost), the visibility is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R and other images. That is, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is displayed and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed even when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is being performed or when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is finished. Since the visibility is not hindered by other images, even in the load application effect A, it can be visually recognized. The load application execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when the specific effect of the battle effect, which is the super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a. ing. Further, if the load application execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. .

In the game state of hitting to the right, the load application effect A may be started. As shown in FIG. 102(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is completed, the left decorative design 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative design 8C (here, the number "2"), the right The decorative symbol 8R (here, number "3") is stopped and displayed, and along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the production button 63 is in a state in which no vibration is generated, and the production button 63 is in a state of being extinguished.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all at once (simultaneously) change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a high-speed fluctuating display mode. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. It is placed in the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position. As a result, two pending icons are stocked.

Subsequently, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R all change at once (simultaneously) from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. In the fluctuating display mode, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, are changed to the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern. The pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". , and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the number "3", the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3". The decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the failure is confirmed and displayed. That is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all (simultaneously) stop-displayed, and the deviation is determined and displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly. 102(B) and 102(C), the decorative pattern variation effect (variation display) is in a state in which the effect button 63 does not vibrate, and the effect button 63 is turned off. there is

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all at once (simultaneously) change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a high-speed fluctuating display mode. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. The icon 9B starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B is not placed at the second holding display position to the fourth holding display position. As a result, one pending icon is stocked. In addition, in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols in FIG. 102(D), the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is in a state of being extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a translucent state and in a state in which the display mode fluctuates at high speed. is started. In this embodiment, as described above, the B mode is selected. Therefore, as the load application performance A, a single load application mode performed in the B mode, the C mode and the D mode is performed. When the load application effect A is started, the effect button 63 is given a one-clamp vibration, and when the effect button 63 starts to change from the mode in which the effect button 63 is not vibrated to the normal load application mode, the effect button 63 is changed to " It vibrates like "b". The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load. In addition, in the load imparting effect A, before imparting the one-chome vibration to the effect button 63 (or immediately before or at the same time as imparting the one-chome vibration to the effect button 63), the effect button 63 is set in a predetermined light emission mode (here Then, the light emission mode corresponding to the normal load application mode is white flashing), and this predetermined light emission mode is maintained until the vibration of the production button 63 ends. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load imparting effect A ends.

When the load application effect A is completed, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, are changed to the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern. Decelerate in the order of 8C and change from translucent state to opaque state again, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the number "1", the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decoration is displayed. The symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the failure is confirmed and displayed. That is, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all (simultaneously) stop-displayed, and the deviation is determined and displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly. In addition, in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols in FIG. 102(F), the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration occurs with the end of the load imparting effect A, and the effect button 63 is turned off. It is in a state of

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the reserved icon 9B placed on the first reserved display position 9Bd, the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is started, and the left decorative pattern is started. 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B is placed at the first through fourth pending display positions. There is no state. As a result, no pending icons are stocked.

Some players like the operation of the effect button 63, and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63. Therefore, the player presses the select button 68 during the demo effect for waiting for customers or during the game. By doing so, it is possible to set prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 or to cancel the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 .

Further, the load application effect A is executed only when the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be released. That is, the load imparting effect A is not executed at all when the effect button 63 is set to be prohibited from operating. On the other hand, a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged inside the effect button 63 and capable of emitting multicolor light are driven in accordance with the progress of the effect regardless of whether the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be released. Then, the effect button 63 can be made to have a predetermined light emission mode suggesting the degree of expectation of winning. For example, in FIG. 102(E), the effect button 63 blinks in white as a light emission mode corresponding to the normal load application mode regardless of whether or not the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be released. . As a result, although there are players who like the actuation of the effect button 63 and there are players who dislike the actuation of the effect button 63, the degree of expectation for winning can be suggested by the effect button 63 having a predetermined light emission mode. Therefore, even if the prohibition of operation of the performance button 63 is set and the execution of the load giving performance A is blocked by the player, the performance button 63 can be set in a predetermined light emission mode. can be done.

Predetermined light emission modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow lighting. White lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting. →Golden color (yellow) lighting →Rainbow color lighting (rich hit), so that the expectation of winning increases in the order. In addition to lighting in each color, there are also flashing in each color, including white flashing, blue flashing, green flashing, red flashing, purple flashing, golden (yellow) flashing, and rainbow flashing. White flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → Red flashing → purple flashing → golden color (yellow) flashing → rainbow color flashing (rich win) is designed to increase the expectation of winning. It should be noted that, compared to lighting in each color, blinking in each color is basically more expected to win. For example, blinking white has a higher chance of winning than lighting white, but it has a lower chance of winning than blue lighting, which has the next highest expectation of winning after white lighting, and rainbow color blinking is the same as rainbow color lighting. The same is true for blinking of other colors, except that it has a degree of expectation of winning (deep hit).

[Load giving effect B]
Next, load application effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the load application effect B. FIG. In the game state of right-handed hitting, the load-applying performance B applies a predetermined vibration to the performance button 63 to apply the vibration of the performance button 63 as a load to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63. It is possible to execute the production of (conveying). In addition, as the gaming state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

The load imparting effect B in this embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It should be noted that if the image "Right-handed" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be left until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes) after the game state of Right-handed is started. or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, by arranging the sub-variation area so that it is on the front side, the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of the fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. Visibility is not hindered.In addition, the background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that an opaque small size Only the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and are the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be varied (variable display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "5" and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icon and the reserved icon, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently fluctuating as digestion of the second special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 103B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the frontmost side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Note that the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. It is hidden (disappears) from 7a.

Here, a white spherical suspension icon 9B is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the third suspension display position 9Bd, and no suspension icon exists at the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three white spherical pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols. In addition to the holding icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be easily discerned by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since visibility is not hindered by the image, even in the load imparting effect B, it is always visible.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon will make the difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a green spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that the green spherical icon may be replaced with a smiling sphere icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

On the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 Above the number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the number of game balls entering the game ball, and above the arrangement of these numbers, the production mode selection unit SEL that can select the production mode is arranged. Is displayed. In the effect mode selection unit SEL, effect modes composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the reel is displayed. By rotating, the effect mode reaching the specific area SELa is displayed larger than other effect modes. The selected effect mode is the effect mode located in the specific area SELa. In this embodiment, the A mode is selected, and the theme image of this A mode (in this case, an image imitating the sun) is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (not shown). It's becoming

It should be noted that the period during which the production mode can be selected is, in addition to the period during which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing down) the production button 63 as the decorative patterns start to fluctuate. A message "mode change with effect button" is placed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is a period that is displayed as The load imparting effect B is performed after a period in which the effect mode can be selected has passed. That is, when the load giving effect B is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected, but the effect mode selected before the load applying effect B is performed is continued in the load applying effect B. there is

In addition, although the effect mode selection part SEL overlaps the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L and other images do not hinder the visibility because the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are arranged and displayed behind the foreground). In other words, the production mode selection unit SEL keeps the left decorative pattern 8L and other Since the visibility is not hindered by the image of , even in the load application effect B, it can be visually recognized. When a specific effect of a battle effect, which is super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection unit SEL is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a with this as a trigger. . Also, if the effect mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore in various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL, the A mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL is lowered. By going to , the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "clouds". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the B mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL, the B mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL is lowered. By going to , the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the C mode, an effect with the theme of "rain" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "rain". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL, the C mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL is lowered. By going to , the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the D mode, an effect with the theme of "snow" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "snow". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the D mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL, the D mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL is lowered. By going to , the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. , and the A mode is displayed in the specific area SELa again.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode, in the three production modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, the type of load application (load application mode ) exists (hereinafter referred to as “single load application mode”), and this single load application mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one production mode (single production mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (modes of load application) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"). Any one load application mode may be selected from a plurality of load application modes. In the load imparting effect B in the present embodiment, the A mode is selected, and one of a plurality of load imparting modes is selected and executed.

Here, the single loading mode and multiple loading modes will be briefly described. In the single load application mode, there is only the normal load application mode in which the production button 63 is given a single tightening vibration such as "bu". On the other hand, in the plurality of load application modes, the first specific time load application in which the single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 such as "bububu", "bububu", "bububu", and "bub". mode, single-tightening vibration is applied three times, and triple-tightening vibration is applied. 3rd specific time load application mode, "bu", "bubu", "bububu", "bubububu", "bububububu", the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) Vibration is given A fourth specific time load application mode that is applied, a long vibration is applied in the manner of "buzz" (for example, a long vibration is applied for 30 seconds). A fifth specific time load application Aspects exist.

In addition, the hit expectation degree in the said fluctuation|variation is preset with respect to a single load application mode and several load application modes. For the single load application mode (one-choice tightening vibration), the hit expectation corresponding to the above-described white spherical icon is set in advance. Among the plurality of load application modes, the third specific time load application mode (337 time signature vibration) corresponds to the yellow (gold) star icon described above. The degree of hit expectation is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases one by one)) corresponds to the purple spherical icon described above. The hit expectation level corresponding to the above-described red spherical icon is set in advance, and the hit expectation level corresponding to the green spherical icon described above for the first specific time load application mode (one-fastening vibration) is set in advance. The degree of expectation of winning is set in advance and the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) corresponds to the white spherical icon described above. For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest degree of expectation for winning, and the fourth specific time load application mode (the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases one by one ) vibration) has the second highest expectation for hitting, the second specific time load application mode (three-fastening vibration) has the third highest expectation for hitting, and the first specific time load applying mode (single-fastening vibration) The degree of expectation for winning is the fourth highest, and the degree of expectation for winning is the lowest for the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) and the single load application mode (one-tight vibration).

Arrangement of a sub-variation area on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in which the above-described small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed). A load application execution permission selection portion FG indicating whether or not the execution of the load application effect B is permitted is displayed above. When the execution of the load application performance B is permitted, an image "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection part FG, whereas when the execution of the load application performance B is not permitted. , an image of "load application OFF" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection portion FG. In this embodiment, execution of the load application effect B is permitted, and an image of "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection portion FG. It should be noted that the period during which the execution of the load imparting effect B can be selected is the same period as the above-described period during which the effect mode can be selected, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. , along with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the above-mentioned message "Mode change with production button" telling that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 Seconds), it is arranged and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . Every time a select button 68, which is a button different from the performance button 63, is operated during this period, the execution permission of the load imparting performance B and the non-permission of the load imparting performance B (execution prohibition of the load imparting performance B) are alternately performed. can be selected.

Although the load application execution permission selection part FG overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative design 8R, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R and other images are placed on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the side (that is, the frontmost), the visibility is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R and other images. That is, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is displayed and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed even when the decorative symbol variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variable effect (variable display) is terminated. Since the visibility is not hindered by other images, even in the load application effect B, it can be visually recognized. The load application execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when the specific effect of the battle effect, which is the super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a. ing. Also, if the load application execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. .

In the game state of hitting to the right, the load imparting effect B may be started. As shown in FIG. 103(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is completed, the left decorative design 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative design 8C (here, the number "2"), the right The decorative symbol 8R (here, number "3") is stopped and displayed, and along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the production button 63 is in a state in which no vibration is generated, and the production button 63 is in a state of being extinguished.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all at once (simultaneously) change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a high-speed fluctuating display mode. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the second holding display position 9Bd. It is placed in the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position. As a result, two pending icons are stocked.

Here, the load imparting effect B is started in a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are translucent and fluctuate at high speed. In this embodiment, the A mode is selected as described above. Therefore, as the load application effect B, one load application mode is selected from the plurality of load application modes that are performed only in the A mode.

When the load application performance B is started, as one load application mode among the plurality of load application modes, here, 337 time signature vibration is applied in the manner of “bububu”, “bububu”, and “bubububububu”. is selected, and first, as shown in FIG. to the third specific time load application mode, and the performance button 63 vibrates "bubu" three times in succession. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period (a time period corresponding to the time period during which the vibration is made with "beep"), and then, as shown in FIG. "b" vibrates three times in succession. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period (a time period corresponding to the time period during which the vibration is made with "beep"), and then, as shown in FIG. "Bu" vibrates seven times in succession. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load. In addition, in the load imparting effect B, before imparting the 337 beat vibration to the effect button 63 in FIGS. ), the production button 63 is set to a predetermined light emission mode (here, yellow (gold) blinking as a light emission mode corresponding to the third specific time load application mode in which 337 beat vibration is imparted), and this predetermined light emission is performed. The mode is maintained until the vibration of the production button 63 is finished. The reason why the effect button 63 adopts yellow (gold) as the light emission color of the predetermined light emission mode in FIGS. This is because the winning expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned yellow (gold) star-shaped icon is set in advance, so the same color as the yellow (gold) colored with this star-shaped icon is used. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load imparting effect B ends.

When the load application effect B ends, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the left decoration. The pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, number "2") to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued, the effect button 63 does not vibrate, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a super ready-to-win battle effect is started. When the battle effect is started, the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. unfolds. The battle effect is a effect in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, and the third reserved display position 9Bd. , the fourth pending display position 9Bd, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B disappear (hidden) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the effect mode selection section SEL and the load application execution permission selection section FG disappear (hidden) from the display screen 7a. In the battle effect, the effect button 63 does not vibrate after the load imparting effect B ends, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same pattern, and after that, it becomes a win. A hit game (hit effect) is started. When winning is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, Furthermore, the effect mode selection portion SEL and the load application execution permission selection portion FG are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern, resulting in misalignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and further, The effect mode selection portion SEL and the load application execution permission selection portion FG are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation.

Some players like the operation of the effect button 63, and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63. Therefore, the player presses the select button 68 during the demo effect for waiting for customers or during the game. By doing so, it is possible to set prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 or to cancel the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 .

Further, the load imparting effect B is executed only when the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be released. That is, the load imparting effect B is not executed at all when the effect button 63 is set to be prohibited from operating. On the other hand, a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged inside the effect button 63 and capable of emitting multicolor light are driven in accordance with the progress of the effect regardless of whether the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be released. Then, the effect button 63 can be made to have a predetermined light emission mode suggesting the degree of expectation of winning. For example, in FIGS. 103(B) to (D), regardless of whether or not the prohibition of operation of the production button 63 is set to be released, the production button 63 is applied with the third specific time load in which the 337 time signature vibration is applied. Yellow (gold) flashes as a light emission mode corresponding to the application mode. As a result, although there are players who like the actuation of the effect button 63 and there are players who dislike the actuation of the effect button 63, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for winning by the effect button 63 being in a predetermined light emitting mode. Therefore, even if the prohibition of operation of the performance button 63 is set and the execution of the load giving performance B is blocked by the player, the performance button 63 can be set to a predetermined light emission mode. can be done.

Predetermined light emission modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow lighting. White lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting. →Golden color (yellow) lighting →Rainbow color lighting (rich hit), so that the expectation of winning increases in the order. In addition to lighting in each color, there are flashing in each color, white flashing, blue flashing, green flashing, red flashing, purple flashing, golden (yellow) flashing, and rainbow color flashing. White flashing → Blue flashing → Green flashing → Red flashing → purple flashing → golden color (yellow) flashing → rainbow color flashing (rich win) is designed to increase the expectation of winning. It should be noted that, compared to lighting in each color, blinking in each color is basically more expected to win. For example, blinking white has a higher chance of winning than white lighting, but has a lower chance of winning than blue lighting, which has the next highest expectation of winning after white lighting, and rainbow color blinking is the same as rainbow color lighting. The same is true for blinking of other colors, except that it has a degree of expectation of winning (deep hit).

[Load giving effect C]
Next, the load application effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the load application effect C. FIG. In the game state of right hitting, the load imparting effect C is applied to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 with the vibration of the effect button 63 as a load by imparting a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63. It is possible to execute the production of (conveying). In addition, as the game state of hitting to the right, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the state of shifting to the so-called b time-saving (play time) can be mentioned.

The load imparting effect C in this embodiment is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of hitting to the right, an image of "hitting to the right" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Since the image "Right shot" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging it so as to be on the front side, the right decorative pattern is displayed. 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image of "Right shot", and the image of "Right shot" is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right shot" is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It should be noted that if the image "Right-handed" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be left until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes) after the game state of Right-handed is started. or until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches 10), the image "Right shot" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then "Right shot" is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the plurality of decorative patterns will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variable performance (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns, each decorative pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is changed to a display mode in which it is about to move. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative design, a small opaque medium decorative design, and a small opaque decorative design corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A sub-variation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation region is fixed to a single color (e.g., dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark color (e.g., dark green), and does not change to another color. The sub-variation region is Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, the sub-variation area is arranged so that it is closest to the front side, so that the right decorative pattern 8R is sub-variable. The sub-variation area is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R which is arranged behind the variation area, and even if another production image appears, the other production image is arranged behind the sub-variation area and is affected by the other production image. The sub-variation area is not blocked.In addition, the sub-variation area is arranged to the right of a fourth suspension display position described later, and the fourth suspension display position and the suspension displayed at the fourth suspension display position In other words, the contents displayed in the sub-variable area are the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth reserved display position, and the reserved icon placed at the fourth reserved display position. Visibility is not hindered.In addition, the background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that an opaque small size Only the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and has a different font (for example, Mincho) from the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state. do not have. The small-sized decorative design is similar to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, each of which is reduced, without using a different typeface from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It is good also as a shape which carries out.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable presentation (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and the same size is displayed at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation production (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small A variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative pattern is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small size. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. More specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern is continuously displayed (variably displayed), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "5" and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variation area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. The decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, a brief description of the variable icon and the reserved icon will be given. As shown in FIG. 104(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently fluctuating as digestion of the second special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 104B) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed (placed) on the In the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second pending display area, pending icons can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. It is possible. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Bd (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9B displayed at the suspended display position 9Bd.

Also, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd overlap the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved icon By arranging 9B and the reserved display position 9Bd on the front side, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved display position 9Bd are not blocked by the arranged middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other production images appear, the other production images. is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. do not have. That is, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, reserved icon 9B, and reserved display position 9Bd is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and other effect images. Note that the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. It is hidden (disappears) from 7a.

Here, a white spherical suspension icon 9B is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd to the third suspension display position 9Bd, and no suspension icon exists at the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three white spherical pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged and always displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side (that is, the frontmost) of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is terminated, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, even in the load imparting effect C, it is always visible.

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 (red numbers) and are always displayed at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R instead of being always displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The numbers may be displayed in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side (i.e., these numbers are spaced left and right on the same horizontal line), or the game to the first start port 20 may be displayed. The number of the first special-price reservation based on the entry of the ball is indicated by blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of the second special-price reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is indicated by the red numbers on the lower side. state (that is, the numbers are spaced one above the other on the same vertical line). Also, the sub-variation area in which the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variation area so that the number of special figure reservations (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variation areas do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon will make the difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a green spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that the green spherical icon may be replaced with a smiling sphere icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

On the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 Above the number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the number of game balls entering the game ball, and above the arrangement of these numbers, the production mode selection unit SEL that can select the production mode is arranged. Is displayed. In the effect mode selection unit SEL, effect modes composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the reel is displayed. By rotating, the effect mode reaching the specific area SELa is displayed larger than other effect modes. The selected effect mode is the effect mode located in the specific area SELa. In this embodiment, the A mode is selected, and the theme image of this A mode (in this case, an image imitating the sun) is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (not shown). It's becoming

In addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the performance mode can be selected by operating (pressing) the performance button 63 along with the start of the variation of the decorative symbols. A message "mode change with effect button" is placed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is a period that is displayed as The load imparting effect C is performed after a period in which the effect mode can be selected has passed. That is, when the load giving effect C is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected, but the effect mode selected before the load applying effect C is performed is continued in the load applying effect C. there is

In addition, although the effect mode selection part SEL overlaps the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L and other images do not hinder the visibility because the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are arranged and displayed behind the foreground). In other words, the production mode selection unit SEL keeps the left decorative pattern 8L and other Since the visibility is not hindered by the image of , even in the load application effect C, it is possible to visually recognize it. When a specific effect of a battle effect, which is super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection unit SEL is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a with this as a trigger. . Also, if the effect mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore in various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL, the A mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL is lowered. By going to , the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "clouds". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the B mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL, the B mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL is lowered. By going to , the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the C mode, an effect with the theme of "rain" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "rain". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL, the C mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL is lowered. By going to , the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "snow". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the D mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL, the D mode positioned in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection part SEL is lowered. By going to , the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. , and the A mode is displayed in the specific area SELa again.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode, in the three production modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, the type of load application (load application mode ) exists (hereinafter referred to as “single load application mode”), and this single load application mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one production mode (single production mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (modes of load application) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"). Any one load application mode may be selected from a plurality of load application modes. In the load application effect C in the present embodiment, the A mode is selected, and one of the load application modes is selected and performed.

Here, the single loading mode and multiple loading modes will be briefly described. In the single load application mode, there is only the normal load application mode in which the production button 63 is given a single tightening vibration such as "bu". On the other hand, in the plurality of load application modes, the first specific time load application in which the single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 such as "bububu", "bububu", "bububu", and "bub". mode, single-tightening vibration is applied three times, and triple-tightening vibration is applied. 3rd specific time load application mode, "bu", "bubu", "bububu", "bubububu", "bububububu", the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) Vibration is given A fourth specific time load application mode that is applied, a long vibration is applied in the manner of "buzz" (for example, a long vibration is applied for 30 seconds). A fifth specific time load application Aspects exist.

In addition, the hit expectation degree in the said fluctuation|variation is preset with respect to a single load application mode and several load application modes. For the single load application mode (one-choice tightening vibration), the hit expectation corresponding to the above-described white spherical icon is set in advance. Among the plurality of load application modes, the third specific time load application mode (337 time signature vibration) corresponds to the yellow (gold) star icon described above. The degree of hit expectation is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases one by one)) corresponds to the purple spherical icon described above. The hit expectation level corresponding to the above-described red spherical icon is set in advance, and the hit expectation level corresponding to the green spherical icon described above for the first specific time load application mode (one-fastening vibration) is set in advance. The degree of expectation of winning is set in advance and the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) corresponds to the white spherical icon described above. For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest degree of expectation for winning, and the fourth specific time load application mode (the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases one by one ) vibration) has the second highest expectation for hitting, the second specific time load application mode (three-fastening vibration) has the third highest expectation for hitting, and the first specific time load applying mode (single-fastening vibration) The degree of expectation for winning is the fourth highest, and the degree of expectation for winning is the lowest for the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) and the single load application mode (one-tight vibration).

Arrangement of a sub-variation area on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in which the above-described small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variably produced (variably displayed). A load application execution permission selection portion FG indicating whether or not the execution of the load application effect C is permitted is displayed above. When the execution of the load application effect C is permitted, an image "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection part FG, whereas when the execution of the load application effect C is not permitted. , an image of "load application OFF" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection portion FG. In this embodiment, execution of the load application effect C is permitted, and an image of "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection portion FG. It should be noted that the period during which the execution of the load imparting effect C can be selected is the same period as the above-described period during which the effect mode can be selected, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. , along with the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the above-described message "Mode change with production button" telling that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 Seconds) is a period in which it is arranged and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection section SEL) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . Every time a select button 68, which is a button different from the performance button 63, is operated during this period, the execution permission of the load imparting performance C and the non-permission of the load imparting performance C (execution prohibition of the load imparting performance C) are alternately performed. can be selected.

Although the load application execution permission selection part FG overlaps the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R and other images are positioned on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the side (that is, the frontmost), the visibility is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R and other images. That is, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is displayed and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed even when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is being performed or when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is finished. Since visibility is not obstructed by other images, the load imparting effect C can also be visually recognized. The load application execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when the specific effect of the battle effect, which is the super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a. ing. Further, if the load application execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in various effects that are unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. .

In the game state of hitting to the right, the load giving effect C may be started. As shown in FIG. 104(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is completed, the left decorative design 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative design 8C (here, the number "2"), the right The decorative symbol 8R (here, number "3") is stopped and displayed, and along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button 63 is in a state in which no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is in a state of being extinguished.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to clear the pending icon 9B placed on the first pending display position 9Bd, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all at once (simultaneously) change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a high-speed fluctuating display mode. When the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B placed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position. 9Bd and placed at the first holding display position 9Bd, and the holding icon 9B placed at the third holding display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second holding display position 9Bd and is placed at the first holding display position 9Bd. The state is set in the second reserved display position 9Bd, and the state in which the reserved icon 9B is not placed in the third reserved display position 9Bd and the fourth reserved display position. As a result, two pending icons are stocked.

Here, the load imparting effect C is started in a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are translucent and fluctuate at high speed. In this embodiment, as described above, the A mode is selected. Therefore, as the load application effect C, one load application mode is selected from the plurality of load application modes that are performed only in the A mode.

When the load imparting effect C is started, one of the plurality of load imparting modes is vibrated in the following manner as one of the load imparting modes: 104B. First, as shown in FIG. Vibration application that gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one time) is started, and the effect button 63 starts to change from a non-vibrating mode to the fourth specific time load application mode, and the effect button 63 is "bu". "Bu" vibrates only once. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period (a time period corresponding to the time period of vibrating with "beep"), and then, as shown in FIG. "b" vibrates twice in succession. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period (a time period corresponding to the time period during which the vibration is made with "beep"), and then, as shown in FIG. "b" vibrates three times in succession. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period (a time period corresponding to the time period during which the vibration is made with "beep"), and then, as shown in FIG. "B" vibrates four times in succession. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period (a time period corresponding to the time period during which the vibration is made with "beep"), and then, as shown in FIG. Vibrate 5 times in succession. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the performance button 63 as a load. 104(B) to (F), the number of vibrations increases gradually (the number of vibrations increases one by one) to the effect button 63 (or the effect button 63 vibrates). The number of times gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases one by one) immediately before or at the same time as giving vibration), the production button 63 is pressed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases one by one) ) as a light emission mode corresponding to the fourth specific time load application mode in which vibration is imparted, purple flashing), and this predetermined light emission mode is maintained until the vibration of the production button 63 ends. The reason why the effect button 63 adopts purple as the light emission color of the predetermined light emission mode in FIGS. This is because the probability of winning corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon (vibration), which increases by one time, is set in advance, so the color is the same as the purple color of this spherical icon. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load imparting effect C ends.

When the load imparting effect C ends, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the left decoration. The pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, number "2") to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued, the effect button 63 does not vibrate, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

Subsequently, although not shown, a super reach battle effect is started. When the battle effect is started, the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. unfolds. The battle effect is a effect in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, and the third reserved display position 9Bd. , the fourth pending display position 9Bd, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B disappear (be hidden) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the effect mode selection section SEL and the load application execution permission selection section FG disappear (hidden) from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same pattern, and after that, it becomes a win. A hit game (hit effect) is started. When the hit is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, Furthermore, the effect mode selection portion SEL and the load application execution permission selection portion FG are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern, resulting in misalignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and further, The effect mode selection portion SEL and the load application execution permission selection portion FG are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation.

Some players like the operation of the effect button 63, and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63. Therefore, the player presses the select button 68 during the demo effect for waiting for customers or during the game. By doing so, it is possible to set prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 or to cancel the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 .

Further, the load imparting effect C is executed only when the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be released. In other words, the load imparting effect C is not executed at all when the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set. On the other hand, a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged inside the effect button 63 and capable of emitting multicolor light are driven in accordance with the progress of the effect regardless of whether the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be released. Then, the effect button 63 can be made to have a predetermined light emission mode suggesting the degree of expectation of winning. For example, in FIGS. 104(B) to 104(F), the number of vibrations of the production button 63 gradually increases regardless of whether the prohibition of operation of the production button 63 is set to be released (the number of vibrations increases by one). Purple blinking is provided as a light emission mode corresponding to the fourth specific time load application mode in which vibration is applied. As a result, although there are players who like the actuation of the effect button 63 and there are players who dislike the actuation of the effect button 63, the degree of expectation for winning can be suggested by the effect button 63 having a predetermined light emission mode. Therefore, even if the prohibition of operation of the performance button 63 is set and the execution of the load giving performance C is blocked by the player, the performance button 63 can be set to a predetermined light emission mode. is now possible.

Predetermined light emission modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow lighting. White lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting. →Golden color (yellow) lighting →Rainbow color lighting (rich hit), so that the expectation of winning increases in the order. In addition to lighting in each color, there are also flashing in each color, including white flashing, blue flashing, green flashing, red flashing, purple flashing, golden (yellow) flashing, and rainbow flashing. White flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → Red flashing → purple flashing → golden color (yellow) flashing → rainbow color flashing (rich win) is designed to increase the expectation of winning. It should be noted that, compared to lighting in each color, blinking in each color is basically more expected to win. For example, blinking white has a higher chance of winning than lighting white, but it has a lower chance of winning than blue lighting, which has the next highest expectation of winning after white lighting, and rainbow color blinking is the same as rainbow color lighting. The same is true for blinking of other colors, except that it has a degree of expectation of winning (deep hit).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the load imparting effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a predetermined load is given to the player based on the progress of the effects in the load application effect A of FIG. 102, the load effect B of FIG. 103, and the load effect C of FIG. B mode excluding A mode (specific production mode) among production modes (a plurality of production modes) composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode, which has a possible production button 63 (load means), A single load (first load ) is given, and the production button 63 (load means) is operated in the A mode (specific production mode) to perform single tightening vibration, triple tightening vibration, which is different from a single load (first load) for the player. , 337 time signature vibration, vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases one by one), and long vibration that gives multiple loads (second load). 102 (E) in A, FIGS. 103 (B) to (D) in load imparting effect B, and FIGS. 104 (B) to (F) in load imparting effect C). According to this configuration, unlike a single load (first load) applied only in A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode, a plurality of (second load) is applied to the player by the operation of the production button 63 (load means), so that the production button 63 (load means) is operated in B mode, C mode and D mode However, by giving variations to the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) only in A mode, the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in A mode can be changed to B mode, It can be an operation that does not exist at all in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the C mode and D mode. In other words, the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the A mode is generated as a so-called "back mode" operation that does not exist in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the B, C and D modes. As a result, it is possible to make the player momentarily unaware of what has happened (that is, by having an unexpected event occur), so that the player can be surprised and delighted. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load imparting effect A of FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B of FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C of FIG. There is only one type of load (second load), and the multiple loads (second load) are single tightening vibration, triple tightening vibration, 337 time signature vibration, vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by one), and long There are multiple types of vibration. According to this configuration, a plurality of loads (second loads) can provide variations to the actuation of the effect button 63 (load means), unlike a single load (first load). As a result, in the B mode, C mode, and D mode, where only a single load (first load) exists, the player emphasizes the monotony of the operation of the effect button 63 (load means), and a plurality of loads is applied. In the A mode in which the (second load) exists, it is possible to make it difficult to feel monotonous in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means). In addition, the A mode in which multiple loads (second loads) exist differs from the B, C and D modes in which only a single load (first load) exists. (second load) can be enjoyed as a so-called "back mode".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect button 63 (load means) is pressed against the palm of the player in the load imparting effect A of FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B of FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C of FIG. A single load (first load) or multiple loads (second load) can be applied. According to this configuration, when the effect button 63 (load means) is actuated, the load by the effect button 63 (load means) is applied to the player's palm. A single load (first load) or a plurality of loads (second load) from the effect button 63 (load means) is more likely to be transmitted to the player than the back of the hand.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect in the load imparting effect A of FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B of FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C of FIG. It can be executed in a state where the prohibition of operation is set to be released. Some players like the operation of the effect button 63 (load means), and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63 (load means). Alternatively, if the player can set the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 (load means) to be released, the first effect is to cancel the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 (load means). Can only be executed in the set state.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load imparting effect A of FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B of FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C of FIG. A second method in which an LED (light emitting means) is set to a predetermined light emission mode and light emission decoration is performed by a production button 63 (load means) regardless of whether or not the prohibition of operation of the production button 63 (load means) is set by the player. It is designed to be able to execute a production. Some players like the operation of the effect button 63 (load means), and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63 (load means). Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning, it is assumed that the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 (load means) is set and the execution of the first effect is prevented by the player. Also, the effect button 63 (load means) can be set to a predetermined light emission mode.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of load provision production|presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
102, the load imparting effect B of FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C of FIG. In other words, it was performed in the so-called right-handed game state (specific game state different from the normal game state). However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called left-handed game state (normal game state).

[Modification 2]
In the load application effect A of FIG. 102, the load application effect B of FIG. 103, and the load application effect C of FIG. had been adopted. However, the frame movable body 69 may be used. As described above, the frame movable body 69 normally rests at the retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and approaches each other toward the handle 60 from the retracted position. , and can rest at a position where it touches the handle 60 . When the frame movable body 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60. The manner of touching can be varied. Therefore, an effect equivalent to that obtained by operating the effect button 63 can be obtained by operating the frame movable body 69 as well.

[Modification 3]
In the load imparting effect A of FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B of FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C of FIG. had been adopted. However, the wind may be blown forward from the handle 60 . For example, a speaker may be provided inside the steering wheel 60, and the cone paper of the speaker may be vibrated to send the wind forward of the steering wheel 60 and hit the right hand (palm) of the player who operates the steering wheel 60. By providing a plurality of modes for vibrating the cone paper of the speaker, the mode for touching the player's right hand (palm) can be varied. Therefore, an effect equivalent to the effect obtained by operating the performance button 63 can be obtained by the wind (blowing) inside the handle 60 caused by the vibration of the cone paper of the speaker. The cone paper of the speaker is driven by the sound control board 106 under the control of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91).

[Modification 4]
In the load application effect A of FIG. 102, the load application effect B of FIG. 103, and the load application effect C of FIG. had been adopted. However, a blower may be provided at a predetermined position inside the front frame 53 (for example, one of the upper, right, and left positions) to blow air toward the player's face. By providing a plurality of modes of the wind blown from the blower, the mode of the wind hitting the player's face can be varied. Therefore, an effect equivalent to the effect obtained by operating the effect button 63 can be obtained by blowing air (ventilation) from a blowing device provided at a predetermined position inside the front frame 53 . The blower may blow air forward by rotating a propeller fan, or may blow air forward by vibrating cone paper of a speaker. Further, the air blower is driven by the sound control board 106 under the control of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91).

[Modification 5]
In the load imparting effect B in FIGS. 103B to 103D, before imparting 337 beat vibration to the effect button 63, the effect button 63 is pressed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, 337 beat vibration is imparted As a light emission mode corresponding to the third specific time load application mode to be applied, yellow (gold) blinking) was maintained until the vibration of the production button 63 was completed. This is because the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has a predetermined degree of hit expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned yellow (gold) star icon, so this star icon This was because it was the same color as the colored yellow (gold). 103(D), the production button 63 is flashing white in FIG. 103(B), and the production button 63 is flashing in red in FIG. 103(C). 103(D), the effect button 63 may blink in yellow (gold). 103(B), the production button 63 is made to flash white, in FIG. 103(C), the production button 63 is made to flash white, and in FIG. 103(D), the production button 63 is made to flash yellow (gold). 103(B), the production button 63 is made to blink red, and in FIG. 103(C), the production button 63 is made to blink red. In FIG. 103(D), the effect button 63 may flash in yellow (gold), or the color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in the direction of increasing the expectation of winning, or in FIG. 103 ( In B), the production button 63 is made to flash white, in FIG. 103C, the production button 63 is made to flash in yellow (gold), and in FIG. The color of the light emission mode of 63 may be changed in the direction of increasing the expectation of winning.

[Modification 6]
104B to 104F, in the load application effect C, the effect button 63 is pressed in a predetermined light emission mode before the effect button 63 is given a vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by one). (Here, the light emission mode corresponding to the fourth specific time load application mode in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases one by one) is given, and the lighting mode is blinking purple), and the vibration of the production button 63 ends. I kept it until This is because the fourth specific time load application mode (vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases one by one)) has a predetermined hit expectation that corresponds to the purple spherical icon described above. , is the same color as the purple color of this spherical icon. However, finally, the production button 63 is made to flash purple in FIG. 104(F), for example, the production button 63 is made to flash white in FIG. 104(B) and the production button 63 is made to flash blue in FIG. 104(C). 104(D), the production button 63 is flashing green, the production button 63 is flashing red in FIG. 104(E), and the production button 63 is flashing purple in FIG. 104(F). The color of the lighting mode may be changed in the direction of increasing the expectation of winning. In FIG. 104(B), the effect button 63 is blinking white, in FIG. 104(C), the effect button 63 is blinking white, in FIG. 104(D), the effect button 63 is blinking green, and in FIG. 104(E), the effect button 104(F), the effect button 63 may be made to blink in red, and the color of the lighting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in the direction in which the degree of expectation for winning is increased so that the effect button 63 blinks in purple in FIG. In 104 (B), the effect button 63 is made to blink blue, in FIG. 104 (C), the effect button 63 is made to blink in blue, in (D), the effect button 63 is made to blink in green, and in FIG. 104 (E), the effect button 63 is flashing in red, and the effect button 63 is flashing in purple in FIG. 104(F). In (B), the production button 63 is flashing in white, in FIG. 104(C), the production button 63 is flashing in blue, in (D), the production button 63 is flashing in green, and in FIG. 104(E), the production button 63 is flashing. The color of the lighting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in the direction of increasing the expectation of winning so that the effect button 63 blinks purple in FIG. 104(F).

[Modification 7]
102, the load imparting effect B of FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C of FIG. Arrangement of these numbers by the number of the first special figure reservation (blue number) based on the entry ball and the number of the second special figure reservation (red number) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 An effect mode selection section SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed above. However, the effect mode selection part SEL is displayed on the display screen 7a only during a predetermined period from the occurrence of the big win game state to the end, and only during this predetermined period, the A mode, B mode, and C mode are displayed. , and D modes, the player may operate (press) the effect button 63 to select one of them. In other words, the effect mode may be changed only during a predetermined period from the occurrence of the big win game state to the end of the game state. The period during which the production mode can be selected is, as described above, in addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the production mode is selected by operating (pressing) the production button 63 along with the start of variation of the decorative patterns. A message "Mode change with effect button" telling that the change is possible is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It had become a period to be placed in the display. Therefore, by making it possible to select the production mode only in a predetermined period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state to the end, the production mode selection unit SEL can be selected in a period other than the predetermined period. Since nothing is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R in addition to the display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R are used in addition to the display screen 7a. Various productions can be performed without SEL becoming an eyesore at all.

[Modification 8]
102, the load application effect B of FIG. 103, and the load application effect C of FIG. 104 are performed in the game state of hitting to the right, but may be performed in the game state of hitting to the left. . By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 9]
102, the load-imparting effect B of FIG. 103, and the load-imparting effect C of FIG. 104, some of the effects described above may not be provided, and other effects may be added. .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine comprising load means capable of imparting a predetermined load to a player based on the progress of an effect,
By activating the load means in a plurality of performance modes other than a specific performance mode to apply a first load to the player, and by activating the load means in the specific performance mode. It is possible to execute a first effect that gives a second load different from the first load to the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
there is only one type of the first load,
A plurality of types of the second load exist,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2,
The load means applies the first load or the second load to the player's palm;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3,
The first effect can be executed in a state in which the prohibition of operation of the load means is set to be canceled by the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
It is possible to execute a second effect in which the light-emitting means provided in the load means is set to a predetermined light-emitting mode and the light-emitting decoration by the load means is performed regardless of whether or not the prohibition of operation of the load means is canceled by the player. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

105 to 107, the game state continuation suggestion effects A to C will be described below. This game state continuation suggesting production is executed during the special symbol fluctuation production. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a game state continuation suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).
In the game state in the game state continuation suggestion production A to C shown below, "probability variable state" means "high probability high base state", "time saving state" means "low probability high base state", "Normal state" means "low probability low base state".

[Play state continuation suggestion effect A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect A. FIG. The game state continuation suggestion performance A is performed when the game state changes from the probability variable state to the normal state, and is performed over a plurality of variations of the special symbols. Specifically, the variable probability game state effect and the result effect A, which will be described later, are performed in the variable probability state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbols. Also, the result performance B and the normal game state performance are performed in the normal state, and these performances are performed during one variation of the special symbols.

In the game state continuation suggestion production A, as shown in FIG. 105(A), first, the variable probability game state production is performed. In this probability variation game state production, the probability variation background image XEA is used as a background image, and the variation production of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, the probability variation state suggestion display XE1, the right hitting suggestion display XE2, and the probability variation state end. Suggestion display XE3A is performed. The variable probability state suggestion display XE1 is a display indicating that the game state is the variable probability state, and is indicated by characters "variable probability mode" in the drawing. The right-hand hitting suggestion display XE2 is a display for prompting the player to hit right. The probability-variable state end suggestion display XE3A is a display suggesting that the probability-variable state ends, and the character "LAST" is shown in the figure. The probability variant background image XEA is cross-hatched in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), result effect A is performed. In this result effect A, a result background image XEB with a door as a motif is used as a background image, and a right-handed suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display showing the game result information, and shows the number of consecutive wins (the number of jackpots during consecutive wins) in the time-saving state, the variable probability state, etc., and the acquired balls obtained during the consecutive wins. information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the game result information display XE4 indicates that the number of consecutive wins is 10 consecutive wins and the number of winning balls is 15,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), result effect B is performed. In this result effect B, the result background image XEB and the right-handed hitting indication XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous gaming state continuation indication XE5 is displayed. This advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display suggesting that a gaming state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player continues. and the characters "Continue!" The result background image XEB is indicated by hatching including a square pattern in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a normal game state effect is performed. In this normal game state production, the normal background image XEC is used as a background image, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are varied, and the normal state suggestion display XE6 is carried out. In addition, in the normal game state production, a production is performed in which the friend character CRA fights against the enemy character CRB. The normal state suggesting display XE6 is a display indicating that the game state is the normal state, and is indicated by characters "normal mode" in the drawing. The normal background image XEC is indicated by predetermined hatching in the drawing.

[Play state continuation suggestion effect B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect B. FIG. The game state continuation suggestion performance B is performed when the game state changes from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, and is performed over a plurality of variations of the special symbols. Specifically, a time-saving game state effect and a result effect A, which will be described later, are performed in the time-saving state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbols. Also, the result performance B and the normal game state performance are performed in the normal state, and these performances are performed during one variation of the special symbols.

In the game state continuation suggestive effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a time-saving game state effect is performed. In this time-saving game state production, the background image XED for time-saving is used as a background image, and the variable production of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and the time-saving state suggestion display XE7, the right-hand hitting suggestion display XE2, and the time-saving state end. Suggestion display XE3B is performed. The time-saving state suggestion display XE7 is a display indicating that the game state is the time-saving state, and is indicated by characters "time-saving mode" in the drawing. The right-hand hitting indication XE2 is a display for prompting the player to hit right. The time-saving state end suggestion display XE3B is a display that suggests that the time-saving state ends, and the character "LAST" is shown in the drawing. The time-saving background image XED is indicated by predetermined hatching in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a result effect A is performed. In this result effect A, a result background image XEB with a door as a motif is used as a background image, and a right-handed suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display showing the game result information, and shows the number of consecutive wins (the number of jackpots during consecutive wins) in the time-saving state, the variable probability state, etc., and the acquired balls obtained during the consecutive wins. information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the game result information display XE4 indicates that the number of consecutive wins is 10 consecutive wins and the number of winning balls is 15,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), result effect B is performed. In this result effect B, the result background image XEB and the right-handed hitting indication XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous gaming state continuation indication XE5 is displayed. This advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display suggesting that the gaming state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player continues. and the characters "Continue!" The result background image XEB is indicated by hatching including a square pattern in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a normal game state effect is performed. In this normal game state effect, the normal background image XEC is used as a background image, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed, and further, the normal state suggestive display XE6 is performed. In addition, in the normal game state production, a production is performed in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. The normal state suggesting display XE6 is a display indicating that the game state is the normal state, and is indicated by characters "normal mode" in the figure. The normal background image XEC is indicated by predetermined hatching in the figure.

[Game State Continuation Suggestion Effect C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect C. FIG. The game state continuation suggestion performance C is performed when the game state changes from the probability variable game state to the time reduction game state, and is an effect performed over a plurality of variations of the special symbol. Specifically, the variable probability game state effect and the result effect A, which will be described later, are performed in the variable probability state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbols. Also, the result performance B and the time-saving game state performance are performed in the time-saving state, and these performances are performed during one variation of the special symbols.

In the game state continuation suggesting effect C, as shown in FIG. 107(A), first, the variable probability game state effect is performed. In this probability variation game state production, the probability variation background image XEA is used as a background image, and the variation production of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, the probability variation state suggestion display XE1, the right hitting suggestion display XE2, and the probability variation state end. Suggestion display XE3A is performed. The variable probability state suggestion display XE1 is a display indicating that the game state is the variable probability state, and is indicated by characters "variable probability mode" in the drawing. The right-hand hitting suggestion display XE2 is a display for prompting the player to hit right. The variable probability state end suggestion display XE3A is a display suggesting that the variable probability state ends, and the character "LAST" is shown in the figure. The probability variant background image XEA is cross-hatched in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), result effect A is performed. In this result effect A, a result background image XEB with a door as a motif is used as a background image, and a right-handed suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display showing the game result information, and shows the number of consecutive wins (the number of jackpots during consecutive wins) in the time-saving state, the variable probability state, etc., and the acquired balls obtained during the consecutive wins. information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the game result information display XE4 indicates that the number of consecutive wins is 10 consecutive wins and the number of winning balls is 15,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), result effect B is performed. In this result effect B, the result background image XEB and the right-handed hitting indication XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous gaming state continuation indication XE5 is displayed. This advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display suggesting that a gaming state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player continues. and the characters "Continue!" The result background image XEB is indicated by hatching including a square pattern in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a time-saving game state effect is performed. In this time-saving game state production, the background image XED for time-saving is used as a background image, the variable production of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, and further, the time-saving state suggestion display XE7 is performed. In addition, in the time-saving game state production, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight with each other, and the right-hand hitting suggestion display XE2 is continuously displayed. The time-saving state suggestion display XE7 is a display indicating that the game state is the time-saving state, and is indicated by characters "time-saving mode" in the drawing. The time-saving background image XED is indicated by predetermined hatching in the figure.

In the game state continuation suggestion effects A to C, the probability variation state suggestion display XE1, the right hitting suggestion display XE2, the probability variation state end suggestion display XE3A, the time saving state end suggestion display XE3B, the game result information display XE4, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion Display XE5, normal state suggestive display XE6, time saving state suggestive display XE7, ally character CRA, and enemy character CRB are background images (positive variable background image XEA, result background image XEB, normal background image XEC, time saving background image XED).
Further, in the game state continuation suggestive effects A and B, when the result effect B is shifted to the normal game state effect, the door of the result background image XEB of the result effect B is opened and the normal background image XEC is displayed. , and in front of them, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a normal state suggestion display XE6, an ally character CRA, an enemy character CRB, and the like are displayed.
In the game state continuation suggestion performance C, when the result performance B is shifted to the normal game state performance, the door of the result background image XEB of the result performance B is opened, and the time-saving background image XED is displayed in front of it. , decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, time-saving state suggestion display XE7, ally character CRA, enemy character CRB, right-hand hitting suggestion display XE2, and the like are displayed.

[Modification]
In the game state continuation suggesting effect A, the variable probability game state effect and the result effect A are performed when the variable probability state, and the result effect B and the normal game state effect are performed when the normal state. However, the variable probability game state performance, the result performance A, and the result performance B may be performed in the variable probability state, and the normal game state performance may be performed in the normal state.
In addition, in the game state continuation suggestive effect B, the time-saving game state effect and the result effect A are performed in the time-saving state, and the result effect B and the normal game state effect are performed in the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state performance, the result performance A, and the result performance B may be performed in the time-saving state, and the normal game state performance may be performed in the normal state.
Further, in the game state continuation suggesting performance C, the variable probability game state performance and the result performance A are performed when the variable probability state is performed, and the result performance B and the time saving game state performance are performed when the time saving state. However, it is not limited to this, and the variable probability game state performance, the result performance A, and the result performance B may be performed in the variable probability state, and the time saving game state performance may be performed in the time saving state.

In the game state continuation suggestion effects A to C, the game result information display XE4 is not displayed at the time of the result effect B in which the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. During the result effect B in which the display XE5 is displayed, the game result information display XE4 may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the game state continuation suggestion effect A, when the variable probability state is relatively advantageous to the player, a variable probability game state effect is performed to perform a variable probability state suggestion display XE1 representing the variable probability state, and then from the variable probability state. , Result production to perform an advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 suggesting that the game state (variable probability state) advantageous to the player continues despite the shift to a normal state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state. B is performed. According to this configuration, despite the transition from the probability variable state to the normal state, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is daringly performed, so even if the normal state is entered, the player is prompted to move to the next probability variable state. A sense of expectation can be imparted, and the player's desire to continue playing can be suppressed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggesting effect A, when the probability variable state is comparatively advantageous to the player, the probability variable game state effect is performed to perform the probability variable state suggestion display XE1 representing the probability variable state, and then the game result information. A result effect A is performed to display the game result information display XE4. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the game result information in the variable probability state, and it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to aim for the variable probability state. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggestive effect A, the result effect A for performing the game result information display XE4 representing the game result information is performed when the variable probability state, and indicates that the game state (variable probability state) advantageous to the player continues. The result performance B for performing the suggested advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is performed in the normal state. According to this configuration, by performing the result presentation A for performing the game result information display XE4 representing the game result information in the probability variable state, the player's motivation to aim for the probability variable state can be improved. By daring to perform the result production B that performs the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 suggesting that the game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the continuation continues in the normal state, the player has a feeling of expectation for the next probability state. can be given, and it is possible to suppress the player from losing the desire to continue playing the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggesting effect A, the advantageous game state continuation suggesting display XE5 in the result effect B is performed after the game result information display XE4 in the result effect A disappears. According to this configuration, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 can be emphasized, and even in the normal state, the player can be given a feeling of expectation for the next probability change state, and the player can continue the game. It is possible to suppress the loss of motivation of As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggesting effect A, the advantageous game state continuation suggesting display XE5 in the result effect B includes a button image representing the effect button 63 . According to this configuration, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 can be emphasized to the player, and even in the normal state, the player can be given a feeling of expectation for the next variable probability state. can be suppressed from impairing the desire to continue playing. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect for performing a first game state suggestion display indicating that the game state is the first game state when the game state is a first game state that is relatively advantageous to the player,
The game state is advantageous to the player despite the transition from the first game state to the second game state more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state with the second display effect. is a display effect that performs an advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display that suggests that the
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the third display effect is a display effect for displaying game result information representing game result information;
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed in the first game state, and the second display effect is performed in the second game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
In the combination effect, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display in the second display effect is performed after the game result information display in the third display effect disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
In the combination effect, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display in the second display effect includes an operation means image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the low probability state (including the low probability low base state and normal state), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 500 times (When the ceiling counter reaches 0), it shifts to idle time (low probability high base state, time saving state). In other words, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches 500 times after the last big hit, the game shifts to the play time (low-probability-high base state, time-saving state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the game state in the game mode change effects A ~ C shown below, "probability variable state" means "high probability high base state", "time saving state" means "low probability high base state", "Normal state" means "low probability low base state".

In-game mode change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This in-game mode change effect is a effect that is performed when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a game mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a and the sub-display screen 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) are caused to display an image for effecting mode change during gaming.

[In-game mode change effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the in-game mode change effect A. FIG. In the in-game mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as a background image, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed and displayed stationary. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the game state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of variations of the special symbols reaches 500 times, as shown in FIG. In the ceiling reaching performance, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and the ceiling reaching suggesting display XF1, the time saving state entry suggesting display XF2, the right hitting start suggesting display XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1 is a display that suggests that the number of variations of the special symbols has reached 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is written as "Ceiling reaching!!". The time-saving state rush suggestion display XF2 is a display that suggests that the number of times the special pattern has changed is 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) and the transition to play time (time-saving state) is performed. ” is written. The right-handed start suggestion display XF3 is a display for prompting the player to start right-handed, and is written as "right-handed start" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), a time saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display effect, the background image is changed to the background image XFA for time-saving, and a time-saving state suggestion display XF4, a right-handed hitting display XF5, and a time-saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 are displayed. The time-saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display that suggests that the game state is the time-saving state, and is described as "time-saving" in the figure. The right-handed hitting display XF5 is a display for prompting the player to hit right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed" in the figure. The time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 is a display representing the remaining number of times of the time saving state (play time) (corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol), and is described as "350 more times" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestive display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggesting display XF4, the right hitting suggesting display XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggesting display XF6, and the ally character CRA is continued, and the mode suggesting display XF7. is added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among a plurality of game modes (display modes) during the play time (during the time saving state). In this in-game mode change effect, when the player reaches the ceiling and shifts to play time (time saving state), mode A is automatically selected from a plurality of game modes at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), a player mode change image display effect is performed. This player mode change image display effect is an effect performed after the special symbol has changed 50 times from the mode suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 108(D). In this player mode change image display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hitting suggestion display XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA continues. and the mode change display XF8 is displayed. Since the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 has changed by 50 from the time of the mode suggestion display performance, it is written as "300 more times" in the figure.
This mode change display XF8 is displayed on the display screen 7a by the player operating the production button 63 and the select button 68 while the special symbols are changing or waiting for a customer (while the special symbols are stopping changing). pops up. The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A and a mode selection promotion display XF8B. Mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection prompting display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and characters "Choose the mode with!" is displayed.
The player can select one mode display XF8A from three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8 by operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63 . In the following, it is assumed that the player has selected the mode display XF8A representing mode B among the three mode displays XF8A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(F), a mode change completion display presentation is performed. In this mode change completion display effect, the notation of the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B". In addition, in the mode change completion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hitting indication XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA are continued, and the mode change display XF8. is erased.

[In-game mode change effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the in-game mode change effect B. FIG. In the in-game mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109(A), the normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as a background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed and displayed stationary. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the game state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of variations of the special symbols reaches 500 times, as shown in FIG. 109(B), a ceiling reaching effect is performed. In the ceiling reaching performance, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and the ceiling reaching suggesting display XF1, the time saving state entry suggesting display XF2, the right hitting start suggesting display XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1 is a display that suggests that the number of variations of the special symbols has reached 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is written as "Ceiling reaching!!". The time-saving state rush suggestion display XF2 is a display that suggests that the number of times the special pattern has changed is 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) and the transition to play time (time-saving state) is performed. ” is written. The right-handed start suggestion display XF3 is a display for prompting the player to start right-handed, and is written as "right-handed start" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), a time saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display performance, the background image is changed to the background image XFA for time-saving, and a time-saving state suggestive display XF4, a right-handed hitting display XF5, and a time-saving state continuation period suggestive display XF6 are displayed. The time-saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display that suggests that the game state is the time-saving state, and is described as “time-saving” in the figure. The right-handed hitting display XF5 is a display for prompting the player to hit right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed" in the figure. The time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 is a display representing the remaining number of times of the time saving state (play time) (corresponding to the number of times of variation of the special symbol), and is described as "350 more times" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestive display effect, the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestive display XF4, the right-handed hitting display XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggestive display XF6, and the ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode suggestive display XF7. is added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among a plurality of game modes (display modes) during the play time (during the time saving state). In this in-game mode change effect, when the player reaches the ceiling and shifts to play time (time saving state), mode A is automatically selected from a plurality of game modes at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), an automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In this automatic mode change image display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hitting suggestion display XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA are continued. , the mode change display XF8 is automatically popped up. Since the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 has changed by 50 from the time of the mode suggestion display performance, it is written as "300 more times" in the figure.
The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A and a mode selection promotion display XF8B. Mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection promotion display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and the characters "Choose the mode with!" adjacent to the button image. is displayed to promote to the player.
The player can select one mode display XF8A out of three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8 by operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63 . In the following, it is assumed that the player has selected the mode display XF8A representing mode B among the three mode displays XF8A.

In this automatic mode change image display effect, the special design fluctuates 500 times counting from the previous jackpot and enters the play time (time saving state), and the special pattern fluctuates 50 times (mode shown in FIG. This is an effect that is performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 50 times from the suggestive display effect. In other words, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 550 times since the last big win. Further, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol without straddling a plurality of variations of the special symbol.
That is, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed on the condition that the special symbol has changed 550 times counting from the previous big hit during one variation of the special symbol without crossing over a plurality of variations of the special symbol. automatically without human intervention.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), a mode change completion display presentation is performed. In this mode change completion display effect, the notation of the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B". In addition, in the mode change completion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hitting indication XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA are continued, and the mode change display XF8. is erased.

[In-game mode change effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the in-game mode change effect C. FIG. In the in-game mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as a background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed and displayed stationary. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the game state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500 times, as shown in FIG. In the ceiling reaching performance, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and the ceiling reaching suggesting display XF1, the time saving state entry suggesting display XF2, the right hitting start suggesting display XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1 is a display that suggests that the number of variations of the special symbols has reached 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is written as "Ceiling reaching!!". The time-saving state rush suggestion display XF2 is a display that suggests that the number of times the special pattern has changed is 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) and the transition to play time (time-saving state) is performed. ” is written. The right-handed start suggestion display XF3 is a display for prompting the player to start right-handed, and is written as "right-handed start" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(C), a time saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display performance, the background image is changed to the background image XFA for time-saving, and a time-saving state suggestive display XF4, a right-handed hitting display XF5, and a time-saving state continuation period suggestive display XF6 are displayed. The time-saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display that suggests that the game state is the time-saving state, and is described as “time-saving” in the figure. The right-handed hitting display XF5 is a display for prompting the player to hit right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed" in the figure. The time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 is a display representing the remaining number of times of the time saving state (play time) (corresponding to the number of times of variation of the special symbol), and is described as "350 more times" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestive display effect, the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestive display XF4, the right-handed hitting display XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggestive display XF6, and the ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode suggestive display XF7. is added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among a plurality of game modes (display modes) during the play time (during the time saving state). In this in-game mode change effect, when the player reaches the ceiling and shifts to play time (time saving state), mode A is automatically selected from a plurality of game modes at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(E), an automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In this automatic mode change image display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hitting suggestion display XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA are continued. , the mode change display XF8 is automatically popped up. Since the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 has changed by 50 from the time of the mode suggestion display performance, it is written as "300 more times" in the figure.
The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A, a mode selection promotion display XF8B, and a mode selection time suggestion display XF8C. Mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection promotion display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and the characters "Choose the mode with!" adjacent to the button image. is displayed to promote to the player. The mode selection time suggesting display XF8C is a display suggesting the time in which the mode can be changed, and is written as "five seconds left" in the figure. In this example, the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C performs a countdown display to indicate the remaining time during which the mode can be changed. Note that the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C is not limited to this, and the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C is displayed by counting up until a predetermined number of seconds has elapsed since the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C is displayed so as to indicate the time during which the mode can be changed. good too. Note that the button image of the mode selection promotion display XF8B and the countdown display (timer display) of the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C are displayed in association with each other.
The player can select one mode display XF8A from three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8 by operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63 . In the following, it is assumed that the player has selected the mode display XF8A representing mode B among the three mode displays XF8A.

In this automatic mode change image display effect, the special pattern fluctuates 500 times counting from the previous jackpot and enters the play time (time saving state), and the special pattern fluctuates 50 times (mode shown in FIG. 110 (D) This is an effect that is performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 50 times from the suggestive display effect. In other words, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 550 times counting from the previous big win. In addition, this automatic mode change image display performance is performed during one variation of the special symbols without straddling a plurality of variations of the special symbols.
That is, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed on the condition that the special symbol has changed 550 times counting from the previous big hit during one variation of the special symbol without crossing over a plurality of variations of the special symbol. automatically without human intervention.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(F), a mode change completion display presentation is performed. In this mode change completion display effect, the notation of the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B". In addition, in the mode change completion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hitting indication XF5, the time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA are continued, and the mode change display XF8. is erased.

In the in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode change display XF8 is displayed on the display screen 7a in the variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed due to the previous change or the change. It has become.
In addition, in the game mode change effects B and C, after the mode is changed by the automatic mode change image display effect, the mode cannot be changed again until the play time (time saving state) ends or a big win is achieved. ing. Not limited to this, even after the mode is changed by the automatic mode change image display effect, the predetermined condition as described above (for example, the special pattern has changed 700 times counting from the previous jackpot) was established. In this case, the automatic mode change image display effect may be performed again.
Further, in the game mode change effects B and C, the automatic mode change image display effect is performed by one variation of the special symbol, but the special symbol variation time in the variation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed is The length is configured to be longer than the length of the variation time of the special symbols in the variation before the variation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed. Also, the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbols in the variation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed is longer than the length of the special symbol variation time in the variation after the variation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed. It is configured.

[Modification]
In the in-game mode change effects B and C, the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed on the condition that the number of times the special symbols have changed has reached 550 times since the last big win. Alternatively, the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed under the condition that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number counted after the previous big win. Also, even if the number of variations of the special symbol does not reach the predetermined number counted after the previous big win, the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed based on other conditions. For example, even if the number of variations of the special symbol does not reach the predetermined number after the last big win, the predetermined points have been accumulated, or the predetermined effect (premium effect, etc.) has appeared in the change, or The mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed based on, for example, winning a predetermined lottery.

In the in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode display XF8A is displayed while the special symbols are changing, and the mode can be selected. A configuration in which the mode display XF8A is displayed and the mode can be selected may be employed.

In the game mode change effects A to C, the mode display XF8A is displayed and the mode can be selected during one change of special symbols without crossing over a plurality of changes of special symbols. The configuration is not limited to this, and the mode display XF8A may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the special symbols so that the mode can be selected.

[Effect example]
In the game mode change effects A to C, the time saving state suggestion display XF4 indicating that the time saving state is relatively advantageous to the player, and one game mode out of a plurality of game modes performed in the time saving state. is performed, and then a predetermined condition is established (for example, the number of times the special pattern has changed after entering the ceiling has reached 50 times, and the special pattern has changed 550 times since the last big hit). A mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one game mode (for example, mode B) out of a plurality of modes is performed. According to this configuration, in the time-saving state advantageous to the player, the mode can be changed by satisfying a predetermined condition, so that the player can enjoy the time-saving state in a plurality of modes, and the interest in the time-saving state is improved. can be made As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game mode change effects A to C, the mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one game mode (for example, mode B) out of a plurality of modes is the number of special symbols counted after the previous big win. This is done on the condition that the number of times of change reaches a predetermined number (550 times).
According to this configuration, the player can see the mode change display XF8 when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number even if the big win does not come after the previous big win. An opportunity for a change of pace can be provided. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one game mode (for example, mode B) out of a plurality of modes while the special symbols are fluctuating is the last big hit. This is done on the condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols has reached a predetermined number of THX counted later.
According to this configuration, even if the player does not get a big win after the previous big win, if the number of times the special symbols fluctuate reaches the predetermined number of times THX, even during the special symbols fluctuating, the mode change display XF8 is displayed. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to appropriately give the player an opportunity to refresh himself by changing the mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game mode change effects A to C, one game mode (for example, mode B) from mode A to a plurality of modes during one change of special symbols without straddling a plurality of variations of special symbols The mode change display XF8 for changing is performed on the condition that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number THX counted after the last big win.
According to this configuration, even if a big win does not come after the previous big win, if the number of variations of the special symbols reaches the predetermined number of times THX, the player can perform one special symbol without crossing over a plurality of variations of the special symbols. Since the mode change display XF8 can be displayed during the change of , it is possible to smoothly provide the player with an opportunity for a change of mood by changing the mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game mode change effects A to C, one game mode (for example, mode B) from mode A to a plurality of modes during a single variation of special symbols without crossing over multiple variations of special symbols A mode change display XF8 for changing is automatically performed without the player's operation on the condition that the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times THX counted after the last big win.
According to this configuration, even if a big win does not come after the previous big win, if the number of times of variation of the special symbols reaches the predetermined number of times THX, the player can perform one special symbol without straddling a plurality of variations of the special symbols. Since the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed on the display screen 7a during the change of , the player can be smoothly given an opportunity for a change of mood due to the mode change, and the player can determine the timing of the mode change. can be suppressed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect for displaying a first game state suggestive image representing a first game state relatively advantageous to the player,
The second display effect is a display effect for performing a first game mode display representing a first game mode, which is one of a plurality of game modes performed in the first game state,
The third display effect is a mode change display for changing from the first game mode to a second game mode, which is one of a plurality of game modes, based on establishment of a predetermined condition. It is a display performance to be performed,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the mode change display is performed on the condition that the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a predetermined number of times counted after the previous big win.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the mode change display is performed on the condition that the number of times the special symbols have changed has reached a predetermined number of times counted after the previous big win during the variation of the special symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, during one variation of the special symbols without straddling a plurality of variations of the special symbols, the number of times of variation of the special symbols counted after the previous big win reaches a predetermined number. On the condition that the mode change display is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, during one variation of the special symbols without straddling a plurality of variations of the special symbols, the number of times of variation of the special symbols counted after the previous big win reaches a predetermined number. On the condition that the mode change display is automatically performed without the player's operation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The group announcement effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. FIG. This group forewarning effect is executed, for example, during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the group announcement effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Group preview effect A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining group announcement effect A. FIG. In the group announcement effect of the present embodiment, there are cases where a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases where a special image together with the plurality of specific images frame in and out of the frame. In the group announcement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 111(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state. Also, here, the display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 111(A), as shown in FIG. A moving effect is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face (smiley mark), but may be any shape representing a specific object. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. A plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and cover the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward on the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 111(C), the special image SG may be framed in mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglass face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. A specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111(C), there are cases where the special image SG is mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) and a case where the special image SG is not mixed with the plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks). mark) may be framed in. When the special image SG enters the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation for the big win in the variation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, the expectation of a big win is 50% when the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG, and the expectation of a big win is 30% when the special image SG is not framed. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from among a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks), which can improve interest compared to the monotonous group notice. Note that even when only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are framed without being mixed with the special images SG, compared to a case where the plurality of specific images TGs (smiley marks) are not framed, the big win in the variation expectations are higher.

FIG. 111(D) shows another embodiment different from FIG. 111(C). In the above description, the special image SG has been described as an arbitrary shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may represent the same target as the specific image TG as long as it is an image different from the specific image TG. In FIG. 111D, the special image SG is the same smiley mark as the specific image TG, but has a different color from the specific image TG. Even in this case, the player can identify the presence or absence of the special image SG among the plurality of specific images TG.

FIG. 111(E) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG and special images SG are framed out from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific images TG and the special image SG are framed out of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R covered with the plurality of specific images TG become visible in a stopped state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot of "333".

Figure 111 (G) ~ (L) is a production during special figure variation different from Figure 111 (A) ~ (F). In FIG. 111(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "3" during the special figure fluctuation, and the ready-to-win state is reached. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(H), the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped at "2", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are at "323" and are lost. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(I), an effect is executed in which a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward. A plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the stop display of "323" of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R and cover the stop displays of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward on the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 111(J), the special image SG may be framed in mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglass face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. A specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111(J), a case where the special image SG is mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) and a case where the special image SG is not mixed with the plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks). mark) may be framed in. When the special image SG enters the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG, the degree of expectation that the resurrection effect will be executed is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation becomes high. For example, the expectation of a big win is 70% when the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG, and the expectation of a big win is 50% when the special image SG is not framed. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG among a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks), and can improve interest compared to the monotonous group notice. Note that even when only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are framed without being mixed with the special image SG, the resurrection effect is executed more than when the plurality of specific images TGs (smiley marks) are not framed. Expectations are higher.

In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the difference in the start timing of the group announcement effect. 111(A) to (F), the group notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative patterns as shown in FIGS. 111(G) to (L). The degree of expectation for a big win is different between the case where 8L, 8C, and 8R are lost and the group announcement effect is executed during stop display.

FIG. 111(K) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG and special images SG are framed out from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific images TG and the special image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered with the plurality of specific images TG change from the stop display of the missing state of "323" to "333". The effect displayed in the state of being switched to the stop display of the jackpot mode is executed. It should be noted that there is a case where the stop display of the losing mode is displayed without switching to the stop display of the winning mode.

[Group notice effect B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining group announcement effect B. FIG. In the group announcement effect of the present embodiment, there are cases in which a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases in which a special image together with a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the frame. In the group announcement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state. Also, here, the display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112A, as shown in FIG. A production to move to is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face (smiley mark), but may be any shape representing a specific object. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. A plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R and cover the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) enter the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a and move toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a becomes the specific image TG as shown in FIG. (smiley).

FIG. 112(D) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG are framed out from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific images TG are framed out of the display screen 7a, the special image SG may be framed in following the plurality of specific images TG. Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglass face). The special image SG can be any shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. A specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112(D), a special image SG follows a plurality of specific images TG (smiley mark) and a special image SG follows a plurality of specific images TG (smiley mark). There are cases where only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) enter the frame without the image SG continuing. When the special image SG enters the frame after the plurality of specific images TG, the expectation of the big win in the variation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, the expectation of a big win is 60% when the special image SG comes in following a plurality of specific images TG, and the expectation of a big win is 40% when the special image SG does not come in. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the special image SG follows a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks), which can improve interest compared to the monotonous group notice. Even if the special images SG do not continue and only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are framed in, compared to the case where the plurality of specific images TGs (smiley marks) are not framed in, the big win in the variation expectations are higher.

When the plurality of specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered with the plurality of specific images TG become visible in a stopped state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in the form of a jackpot of "333". The special image SG has a slower moving speed in the left direction than the plurality of specific images TG, and moves slowly to be out of the frame. Therefore, the plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period even after being framed out from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 112(F), the special image SG is framed out from the left side of the display screen 7a, and only the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

Figure 112 (G) ~ (L) is a production during special figure variation different from Figure 112 (A) ~ (F). In FIG. 112(G), the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. During this variable display, as shown in FIG. 112(H), an effect is executed in which a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward. A plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and cover the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward on the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112(I), the special image SG may be framed in mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglass face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. A specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112(I), a case where the special image SG is mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) and a case where the special image SG is not mixed with the plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks). mark) may be framed in. When the special image SG enters the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation for the big win in the variation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, the expectation of a big win is 50% when the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG, and the expectation of a big win is 30% when the special image SG is not framed. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from among a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks), which can improve interest compared to the monotonous group notice. Note that even when only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are framed without being mixed with the special images SG, compared to a case where the plurality of specific images TGs (smiley marks) are not framed, the big win in the variation expectations are higher.

In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the difference in the moving direction of the group announcement effect. 112A to 112F, a plurality of specific images TG and special images SG move leftward, and a plurality of specific images TG and SG move to the left as shown in FIGS. The degree of expectation for a big win differs between when the special image SG moves downward and when it moves downward.

FIG. 112(J) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG and special images SG are framed out from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific images TG and special image SG are framed out of the display screen 7a, nothing is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 112(K). After that, when a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 112(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a stopped state. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R suddenly appear in the form of a jackpot of "333".

[Group notice effect C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the group announcement effect C. FIG. In the group announcement effect of the present embodiment, there are cases where a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases where a special image together with the plurality of specific images frame in and out of the frame. In the group announcement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state. Also, here, the display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 113A, as shown in FIG. A production to move to is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face (smiley mark), but may be any shape representing a specific object. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. A plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and cover the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. When a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) frame from the right side of the display screen 7a and move toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley marks).

FIG. 113C shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG are framed out from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, when the plurality of specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, the special image SG may frame in following the specific images TG. Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglass face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. A specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a special image SG follows a plurality of specific images TG (smiley mark) and a special image SG follows a plurality of specific images TG (smiley mark). There are cases where only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) enter the frame without the image SG continuing. When the special image SG enters the frame after the plurality of specific images TG, the expectation for the big win in the variation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, the expectation of a big win is 60% when the special image SG comes in following a plurality of specific images TG, and the expectation of a big win is 40% when the special image SG does not come in. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the special image SG follows a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks), which can improve interest compared to the monotonous group notice. Even if the special images SG do not continue and only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are framed in, compared to the case where the plurality of specific images TGs (smiley marks) are not framed in, the big win in the variation expectations are higher.

When the plurality of specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific images TG become visible in a stopped state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of "323" being lost. The special image SG is framed out after the plurality of specific images TG. After that, as shown in FIG. 113(D), the plurality of specific images TG and special images SG are framed out, and only the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a are displayed. After that, a pseudo-continuation suggestion image consisting of a character image of "One more time!" is displayed. By displaying this pseudo-repeated suggestive image, it is reported that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed as the missing symbols will change again. In this way, when a plurality of specific images TG frame in the display screen 7a, the degree of expectation rises, and when a plurality of specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed and then the pseudo continuous re-fluctuation occurs as shown in FIG. 113(D), the losing symbols may be stopped and displayed.

After the pseudo-representative image is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, as shown in FIG. 113(E). During the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in FIG. 113(F), an effect is executed in which a plurality of specific images TG frame in from above the display screen 7a and move downward. That is, in one variation, the second group announcement effect is executed. This further increases the odds of winning. Here, the expectation level is 60% due to the first group notice effect (with special image SG) in FIGS. 113(B) to (C), and the second group notice effect ( With special image SG), the degree of expectation rises to 80%. A plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R and cover the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward on the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 113(G), the special image SG may be framed in mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks). The special image SG here is the same image as the special image SG displayed in the first group announcement effect in FIG. 113(C), but it may be an image with different contents.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(G), in the second group preview effect, the special image SG is mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) and the special image SG is framed in, and the special image SG is mixed. First, only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) may be framed in. When the special image SG enters the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation for the big win in the variation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, the expectation of a big win is 80% when the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG, and the expectation of a big win is 70% when the special image SG is not framed. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG among a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks), and can improve interest compared to the monotonous group notice. Note that even when only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are framed in without the special image SG being mixed, the degree of expectation for the big win in the variation is higher than when the second group announcement effect is not executed. get higher

As shown in FIG. 113(H), when the plurality of specific images TG are framed out of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific images TG can be visually recognized in a stopped state. become. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in the mode of losing "565". When the plurality of specific images TG frame in the display screen 7a for the second time, the degree of expectation rises, and when the plurality of specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, hits as shown in FIGS. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. When the resurrection effect is executed after being displayed, the lost pattern may be stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113(I), an effect is executed in which a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward. That is, in one variation, the third group announcement effect is executed. This further increases the odds of winning. Here, the expectation level is 60% due to the first group notice effect (with special image SG) shown in FIGS. 113(B) to (C), and the second group notice effect ( With the special image SG), the expectation rises to 80%, and with the third group announcement effect (without the special image SG) in FIGS. 113(I) to (K), the expectation rises to 90%. Incidentally, when the third group notice effect includes the special image SG, the degree of expectation rises to 99%. A plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the stop display of "565" of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R and cover the stop displays of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward on the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley marks). At this time, the special image SG may enter the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks), but here the special image SG is not mixed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113(I) to 113(K), in the third group notice effect, a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are not mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) and a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are not mixed with the special image SG. In some cases, only the special image SG (smiley mark) is framed in, and in other cases, the special image SG is mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks). When the special image SG enters the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG, the degree of expectation that the resurrection effect will be executed is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation becomes high. For example, the expectation of a big win is 99% when the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG, and the expectation of a big win is 90% when the special image SG is not framed. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG among a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks), and can improve interest compared to the monotonous group notice. Note that even when only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley marks) are framed in without being mixed with the special image SG, the degree of expectation that the resurrection effect will be executed is higher than the case where the third group notice effect is not executed. becomes higher.

As shown in FIGS. 113(K) and (K), when the plurality of specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered with the plurality of specific images TG are stopped and displayed. becomes visible in the Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in the form of a jackpot of "555".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the group announcement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, during the special figure fluctuation, the special image SG does not enter the frame, and after the plurality of specific images TG enter the frame, the first effect is performed. Then, during the special figure variation, after the special image SG in addition to the plurality of specific images TG enters the frame, it is possible to execute the second effect of out of the frame. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 112 and 113 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the second effect (the special image SG is The expectation of winning is higher when the mixed effect) is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 112 and 113 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the second effect (effect in which the special image SG is mixed), the special image SG is framed in after the plurality of specific images TG are framed in. and after the plurality of specific images TG are out of the frame. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111A to 111F, the second effect (effect in which the special image SG is mixed) displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a variable manner. As shown in FIGS. 111(G) to 111(L), there are cases where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode, and the second effect is executed. If it is executed after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed in the losing mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may change to the winning-mode stop display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 112 and 113 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the second effect (effect in which the special image SG is mixed) is that the plurality of specific images TG and the special image SG are arranged in the first direction. There are cases where the frame is moved in from one side and framed out from the other side, and there are cases in which the frame is moved in from one side in the second direction and framed out from the other side. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. After being displayed on one of the display screens, it is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after being displayed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed on the other of the sub-display screens. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the group announcement effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the group announcement effects A to C, the special image SG is produced such that only one is mixed in the plurality of specific images TG. However, a plurality of special images SG may be mixed in a plurality of specific images TG. Further, in the group announcement effects A to C, the special image SG is assumed to be one type of image. However, the special image SG may have a different image for each group announcement effect, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the content of the image. In the group announcement effects A to C, the special image SG is represented as an image having the same size as the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may differ in size from the specific image TG. For example, the special image SG may be an image larger or smaller than the specific image TG. The special image SG may move at the same speed as the plurality of specific images TG, or may have different speeds. That is, the special image SG may move slower or faster than the plurality of specific images TG. In the group announcement effects A to C, the special image SG moves in the same direction as the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may move in a direction different from that of the specific image TG. After entering the frame, the special image SG may stop while the specific image TG is moving. The special image SG may be framed in after the plurality of specific images TG are framed in and moved at a different timing.

[Modification 2]
In the group forewarning effects shown in group forewarning effects A to C, the effect in which the special image SG is mixed in the plurality of specific images TG is the effect in which the special image SG is not mixed in the plurality of specific images TG. may be executed. Whether or not to execute the group announcement effect and whether or not to mix the special image SG in the plurality of specific images TG are assigned so that each appears with a predetermined probability.

[Modification 3]
In the group advance notice effects A to C, after the group advance notice effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a stopped state may be other effects. For example, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed after the group announcement effect, and then the stop display may be performed. Alternatively, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may not be displayed after the group announcement effect, and then the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may appear.

[Modification 4]
111(A) to (F) and the expectation of the big win in FIGS. 111(G) to (L) are assumed to be different. That is, it is assumed that the degree of expectation for the big win changes depending on the appearance timing of the group announcement effect. However, the degree of expectation due to the appearance of the group announcement effect may be constant regardless of the timing.

[Modification 5]
The group forewarning effects A to C may be appropriately combined. For example, after the effects of FIGS. 111(G) to (L), the effects of FIGS. 112(G) to (L) may be executed.

[Modification 6]
In the group announcement effects A to C, only the effects on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are shown. However, the group announcement effects of the group announcement effects A to C are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as well as the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U). may also be displayed on For example, in the renderings of FIGS. 111B to 111D and 111I to 111K, before the plurality of specific images TG frame in from above the display screen 7a, they are framed in the upper sub-display screen 64U. After frame-out from the upper sub-display screen 64U, frame-in may be performed from above the display screen 7a. Further, when the plurality of specific images TG frame in from above the display screen 7a, they may also frame in from above in each of the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. 112 and 113 are the same. 112(B) to (D) and FIGS. 113(B) to (C), after the plurality of specific images TG frame in from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R, frame out from the left side, After that, the frame may be framed in from the right side of the display screen 7a and framed out from the left side, and then framed in from the right side of the left sub-display screen 64L and framed out from the left side. Also, the plurality of specific images TG may move from the right sub-display screen 64R to the upper sub-display screen 64U and then move to the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
A first effect of frame-out after the plurality of first images frame-in during special figure fluctuation;
During the special figure fluctuation, after the second image in addition to the plurality of first images frames in, a second effect that frames out can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The expectation of winning is higher in the case where the second production is executed than in the case where the first production is executed during the special figure fluctuation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the second effect, the second image is framed in after the plurality of first images are framed in, and is framed out after the plurality of first images is framed out.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing the propriety,
The second effect may be executed when the set of decorative symbols are variably displayed, or may be executed after the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a losing mode,
When the second effect is executed after the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a losing mode, the set of decorative patterns may change to a winning mode in a stopped display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The second effect includes a case where the plurality of first images and the second image move in from one side of the first direction and out of the frame from the other side, and move in the second direction. may move frame-in on one side and frame-out on the other side,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
the display means includes main display means and two sub-display means;
In the second effect, the plurality of first images are displayed on one of the sub-display means, then displayed on the main display means, and after being displayed on the main display means, on the sub-display means. displayed on the other side of the
A gaming machine characterized by:

The game state transition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. This game state transition effect can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the game state transition effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[Game state transition effect A]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the game state transition effect A. FIG. The game state transition effect A is executed in a high probability high base state (so-called ST). It is assumed that the V passage scheduled jackpot includes a jackpot A in which both the variable probability counter and the short time counter are set to ``100'' and a jackpot B in which the variable probability counter is set to ``100'' and the short time counter is set to ``220''. continue the explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 114(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "96 more times" is displayed, which indicates how many more times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The operation section image SG is composed of a button image BG and a meter image MG. A needle image NG extending from the vicinity of the center of the button image BG is displayed in the meter image MG, and the needle image NG points to the memory M1. This needle image NG indicates the degree of expectation for transition to an advantageous game state, and the degree of expectation increases as the needle image NG moves clockwise and moves to the right. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. In the following effects, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. However, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "0" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol and is fixed and stopped. Again, the character image "96 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M1. It is assumed that the remaining number of times of ST becomes 20 by repeating such variable start effect and fixed stop effect (loss).

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "20 more times" is displayed to indicate how many times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the needle image NG points to the memory M1. This needle image NG indicates the degree of expectation for transition to an advantageous game state, and the degree of expectation increases as the needle image NG moves clockwise and moves to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), an item get effect is executed. The item get effect is a effect of getting a predetermined item. More specifically, when the message image "press the button" is first displayed and the player presses the effect button 63, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without the effect button 63 being pressed, Display item images. Here, an item image IG written as "OIL" is displayed. At this time, the operating portion image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and an animation is displayed in which the needle image NG rotates clockwise. Accordingly, the needle image NG points to the memory M2. In addition, a character image of "20 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "5" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "3" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at "9" symbol. Here, too, the character image "20 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M2. After that, the variation start effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) are repeated, and the final variation of the ST is assumed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "4" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "7" symbol. Here, a character image of "Last" indicating the final change is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), a pressing promotion effect is executed. The pressing promotion effect is an effect for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . Here, the operation unit image SG is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the needle image NG points to the memory M2. In addition, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed below the operation unit image SG. Here, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without the effect button 63 being pressed, the next effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(H), the state transition announcement effect is executed. The state transition announcement effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game state will shift to an advantageous game state. Here, a message image MSG of "sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, ST (high probability high base state) ends, it can be seen that the transition to the normal state (low probability low base state). That is, in this case, it can be seen that the jackpot A, in which both the variable probability counter and the short working hours counter are set to "100", has been won.

[Game state transition effect B]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the game state transition effect B. FIG. The game state transition effect B is executed in a high probability high base state (so-called ST). It is assumed that the V passage scheduled jackpot includes a jackpot A in which both the variable probability counter and the short time counter are set to ``100'' and a jackpot B in which the variable probability counter is set to ``100'' and the short time counter is set to ``220''. continue the explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "96 more times" indicating how many times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue is displayed. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The operation section image SG is composed of a button image BG and a meter image MG. A needle image NG extending from the vicinity of the center of the button image BG is displayed in the meter image MG, and the needle image NG points to the memory M1. This needle image NG indicates the degree of expectation for transition to an advantageous game state, and the degree of expectation increases as the needle image NG rotates clockwise and moves to the right. In addition, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. In the following effects, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. However, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "0" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol. Again, the character image "96 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M1. It is assumed that the remaining number of times of ST becomes 20 by repeating such variable start effect and fixed stop effect (loss).

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "20 more times" is displayed to indicate how many times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the needle image NG points to the memory M1. The needle image NG indicates the degree of expectation for transition to an advantageous game state, and the degree of expectation increases as the needle image NG moves clockwise and moves to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), an item get effect is executed. The item get effect is a effect of getting a predetermined item. More specifically, when the message image "press the button" is first displayed and the player presses the effect button 63, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without the effect button 63 being pressed, Display item images. Here, an item image IG written as "OIL" is displayed. At this time, the operating portion image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and an animation is displayed in which the needle image NG rotates clockwise. Accordingly, the needle image NG points to the memory M3. Further, a character image of "20 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "5" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "3" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at "9" symbol. Here, too, the character image "20 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M3. After that, the variation start effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) are repeated, and the final variation of the ST is assumed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "4" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "7" symbol. Here, a character image of "Last" indicating the final change is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), a pressing promotion effect is executed. The pressing promotion effect is an effect for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . Here, the operation unit image SG is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the needle image NG points to the memory M3. In addition, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed below the operation unit image SG. Here, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without the effect button 63 being pressed, the next effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), the state transition announcement effect is executed. The state transition announcement effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game state will shift to an advantageous game state. Here, a message image MSG reading "120 chance times" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that ST (high-probability-high base state) ends and shifts to a time-saving state (low-probability-high base state) that is advantageous to the player. In other words, in this case, it can be seen that the jackpot B, in which the variable probability counter is set to "100" and the time reduction counter is set to "220", has been won.

Further, in the game state transition effect A, the needle image NG finally points to the memory M2, but in the game state transition effect B, the needle image NG points to the memory M3 larger than M2. As a result, the expectation of the transition to the time-saving state (low-probability base state) increases. Needless to say, when the needle image NG is M2, it shifts to a time-saving state (low-probability-high base state), and when it is M3, it may shift to a normal state (low-probability-low base state).

[Game state transition effect C]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the game state transition effect C. FIG. The game state transition effect C is executed in a high certainty high base state (so-called ST). It is assumed that the V passage scheduled jackpot includes a jackpot A in which both the variable probability counter and the short time counter are set to ``100'' and a jackpot B in which the variable probability counter is set to ``100'' and the short time counter is set to ``220''. continue the explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "96 more times" is displayed, which indicates how many more times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The operation section image SG is composed of a button image BG and a meter image MG. A needle image NG extending from the vicinity of the center of the button image BG is displayed in the meter image MG, and the needle image NG points to the memory M1. The needle image NG indicates the degree of expectation for transition to an advantageous game state, and the degree of expectation increases as the needle image NG rotates clockwise and moves to the right. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. In the following effects, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. However, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(B), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "0" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol. Again, the character image "96 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M1. It is assumed that the remaining number of times of ST becomes 20 by repeating such variable start effect and fixed stop effect (loss).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "20 more times" is displayed to indicate how many times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the needle image NG points to the memory M1. This needle image NG indicates the degree of expectation for transition to an advantageous game state, and the degree of expectation increases as the needle image NG moves clockwise and moves to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(D), an item get effect is executed. The item get effect is a effect of getting a predetermined item. More specifically, when the message image "press the button" is first displayed and the player presses the effect button 63, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without the effect button 63 being pressed, Display item images. Here, an item image IG written as "OIL" is displayed. At this time, the operating portion image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and an animation is displayed in which the needle image NG rotates clockwise. Accordingly, the needle image NG points to the memory M2. Here, in particular, the upper surface R of the button image BG becomes rainbow-colored in accordance with the display of the item image IG. This means determination of transition to an advantageous game state (time saving state). In addition, a character image of "20 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(E), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "5" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "3" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at "9" symbol. Here, too, the character image "20 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M2. Also, the upper surface R of the button image BG is rainbow colored. After that, the variation start effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) are repeated, and the final variation of the ST is assumed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(F), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "4" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "7" symbol. Here, a character image of "Last" indicating the final change is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. Further, an operation section image SG is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The needle image NG points to the memory M2. Also, the upper surface R of the button image BG is rainbow colored.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(G), a pressing promotion effect is executed. The pressing promotion effect is an effect for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . Here, the operation unit image SG is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the needle image NG points to the memory M2. Also, the upper surface R of the button image BG is rainbow colored. Further, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed below the operation unit image SG. Here, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without the effect button 63 being pressed, the next effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the state transition announcement effect is executed. The state transition announcement effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game state will shift to an advantageous game state. Here, a message image MSG reading "120 chance times" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that ST (high-probability-high base state) ends and shifts to a time-saving state (low-probability-high base state) that is advantageous to the player. In other words, in this case, it can be seen that the jackpot B, in which the variable probability counter is set to "100" and the time reduction counter is set to "220", has been won.

Also, in the game state transition effect C, the needle image NG finally points to the memory M2. By doing so, the transition to an advantageous game state (time saving state) is determined.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the game state transition effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display of the operation unit image SG is continued in the high-definition-high base state (so-called ST) (FIGS. 114 (A) to (F), FIGS. 115 (A) to (F), Figures 116 (A) to (F)). The operation part image SG suggests the expectation degree of transition to a low probability high base state (what is called a time saving state) by the memory position which the needle|hook image NG which comprises the meter image MG points out. Then, in the final variation of the high-probability-high base state, to execute the operation promoting effect to promote the operation of the production button 63, then low probability-high base state (so-called time-saving state) or low-probability low base state (so-called normal state) (Fig. 114(G), Fig. 115(G), Fig. 116(G)). According to this configuration, since the operating portion image SG suggests the degree of expectation for transition to an advantageous game state, the player can have a sense of expectation and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, the high probability high base state (so-called ST) corresponds to the "first game state", the low probability high base state (so-called time saving state) corresponds to the "second game state", the low probability low base state (so-called normal state) corresponds to the "third game state". The effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation part", the operation part image SG corresponds to the "operation part image", and the pressing promotion effect (FIGS. 114(G), 115(G), and 116(G)) corresponds to " It corresponds to "operation promotion effect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the memory position pointed to by the needle image NG is changed in accordance with the progress of ST, so that the operation unit image SG changes its mode to suggest the degree of expectation (see FIG. 114 ( D), FIG. 115(D), FIG. 116(D)). According to this configuration, since the degree of expectation changes according to the progress of the ST, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation and improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the memory position pointed to by the needle image NG in the operation portion image SG is changed in response to a specific effect (FIGS. 114(D), 115(D), and 116(D)). ). According to this configuration, since the degree of expectation changes when the specific effect is executed, the change in degree of expectation indicated by the operation unit image SG becomes easy to understand, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the change of the memory position pointed to by the needle image NG in the operation portion image SG is triggered by the item get effect (FIGS. 114(D), 115(D), 116(D) )). According to this configuration, since the degree of expectation changes when the item is obtained, the change in the degree of expectation suggested by the operation unit image SG becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the item get effect, the message image "press the button" is first displayed, and the player presses the effect button 63, or the effect button 63 is not pressed. When the valid operation period of the effect button 63 ends, the item image IG is displayed (Fig. 114(D), Fig. 115(D), Fig. 116(D)). According to this configuration, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the item image IG is displayed and the degree of expectation changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the item get effect, the upper surface R of the button image BG is changed to a rainbow color in accordance with the display of the item image IG, and the determination of the transition to the low probability base state (time saving state) is notified. It is possible (Fig. 116(D)). According to this configuration, since the transition to the low-probability-high base state is confirmed, the player can be surprised and have a sense of superiority, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the item get effect (Fig. 116(D)) corresponds to the "fixed effect".

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the pressing promotion effect, the operation unit image SG displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a is enlarged and displayed (Fig. 114 (G), Fig. 115 (G), Fig. 116 ( G)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the relationship between the operation part image SG in the depression promotion effect and the operation part image SG displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the game state transition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the degree of expectation changes (the memory position pointed to by the needle image NG changes) by getting the item (FIGS. 114(D), 115(D), and 116(D)). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation is changed (the memory position pointed to by the needle image NG is changed) regardless of whether the item is obtained. For example, the degree of expectation is changed every 10 fluctuations.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the item image IG written as "OIL" is displayed, but the types of items may be increased. Of course, the change in the degree of expectation (the change in the memory position pointed to by the needle image NG) may increase according to the item that is obtained.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the item get effect is executed only once (Fig. 114 (D), Fig. 115 (D), Fig. 116 (D)). It is generally executed twice.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect button 63 is used as the operation unit, but the sword member 65 may be used as the operation unit.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the upper surface R of the button image BG is colored in rainbow in the item get effect. On the other hand, the confirmation effect of making the upper surface R of the button image BG a rainbow color may be performed at a different timing. For example, when the degree of expectation does not rise easily (the memory position pointed to by the needle image NG does not increase), it is conceivable to perform a fixed effect with a change close to the final change.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the item is always obtained in the item obtaining effect, but there may be a case where the item cannot be obtained. Also, in the item get effect, an effect prompting the pressing of the effect button 63 is performed, but the effect prompting the pressing of the effect button 63 may not be performed.

[Modification 7]
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration was mentioned about the transition from the high probability high base state (so-called ST) to the low probability high base state (so-called time saving state) or the low probability low base state (so-called normal state). On the other hand, the transition from the jackpot gaming state to the variable probability state (high probability high base state) or the non-variable probability state (low probability high base state) can be configured in the same way.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F1-1]
Equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
A gaming machine having a first game state, a second game state advantageous to the player, and a third game state disadvantageous to the player compared to the second game state,
In the first game state, continuing to display an operation unit image which is an image simulating the operation unit and suggests an expectation level of transition to the second game state;
At the end of the first game state, an operation prompt effect is executed to promote the operation of the operation portion using the operation portion image, and thereafter the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state. Or to shift to the third game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
It should be noted that "continuing to display the operation unit image" means that it is displayed over a plurality of changes in the first game state, and includes the case where it is temporarily hidden during one change. . The “image imitating the operation unit” refers to an image that allows the player to recognize the operation unit when viewing the image.

[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
The operation unit image displayed in the first game state changes its mode according to the progress of the first game state to suggest the degree of expectation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2,
The operation unit image changes its mode in response to a specific effect executed in accordance with the progress of the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-3,
The specific effect is a effect in which a predetermined item is given,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-3 or aspect F1-4,
The specific effect includes a effect prompting the operation of the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-2 to F1-5,
In the specific effect, there is a case to execute a confirmed effect that confirms the transition to the second game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-6,
In the operation promotion effect, the continuously displayed operation unit image is enlarged and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Background voice effects A, B and voice setting effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119. FIG. The background voice effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the background voice effect is included, the corresponding image data etc. are read out from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Background voice effects, in particular, output voices and sound effects using acoustic data including voices. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the speaker 67 to output voice, music, effect sound, etc. through the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Also, the voice setting effect can be executed while the gaming machine 1 is on standby.

[Background voice effect A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the background voice effect A. FIG. The background voice effect A is executed in a low probability low base state (so-called normal state). Of course, it is also possible to execute in other game states (high probability high base state, low probability high base state, high probability low base state).

First, as shown in FIG. 117(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. In the following effects, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are hidden. Of course, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) forming the left and right performance symbols are the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "4" patterns. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a pressing promotion effect is executed. The pressing promotion effect is an effect for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . Here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed below the button image BG. At this time, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without pressing the effect button 63, the next effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a zone entry effect is executed. The zone entry effect is an effect for notifying that the player has entered the zone. Here, a message image MSG of "entering the oro zone" is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. In the oaro zone, music corresponding to the oaro zone is output. Apart from this song, the voice "Oaro" is intermittently output in the Oaro Zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, it will be a big win. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. In addition, the sound "Oaro" is intermittently output along with the music.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(F), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing informing effect is an effect for informing whether the ally character CRA has won or been defeated by the enemy character CRB. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the victory of the teammate character CRA is announced. The background image RB of the display screen 7a is composed of rainbow colors. At this time as well, the sound "Oaro" is intermittently output along with the music.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. Winning/losing notification effect is a effect for notifying winning or losing of a jackpot lottery. In the case of winning, the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) constituting the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same). On the other hand, in the case of losing, the production design is temporarily stopped in the mode of losing. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "4". Then, at the timing just before the transition to the next symbol promotion effect, the sound "Oarro" is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(H), a symbol promotion effect is executed. The symbol promotion performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stopped in the jackpot mode are promoted. Winning to a more advantageous jackpot game is informed by promotion of the performance pattern. Specifically, for example, "444" corresponds to "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and "777" corresponds to "16RV passing scheduled jackpot".

[Background voice effect B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining background voice effect B. FIG. The background voice effect B is executed in a low probability low base state (so-called normal state). Of course, it is also possible to execute in other game states (high probability high base state, low probability high base state, high probability low base state).

First, as shown in FIG. 118(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. In the following effects, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are hidden. Of course, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) forming the left and right performance symbols are the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "4" patterns. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a pressing promotion effect is executed. The pressing promotion effect is an effect for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . Here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed below the button image BG. At this time, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without pressing the effect button 63, the next effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(D), a zone entry failure effect is executed. The zone entry failure effect is an effect for notifying that entry into the zone has failed. In this case, a message image MSG of "failure to enter" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. Winning/losing notification effect is a effect for notifying winning or losing of a jackpot lottery. In the case of winning, the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) constituting the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same). On the other hand, in the case of losing, the production design is temporarily stopped in the mode of losing. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "4" patterns, and the middle effect pattern 8C is "5" patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and stopped at "4" pattern, and the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern.

[Voice setting effect]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the voice setting effect. The voice setting effect is executed while waiting for customers.
First, as shown in FIG. 119(A), a standby effect is executed. The waiting effect is a effect that is executed when a customer waiting standby command is transmitted from the main control board 80 . Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Above the button image BG, a downward arrow image YG is displayed, and above the arrow image YG, a message image MSG reading "Press button to customize" is displayed. Here, when the player presses the production button 63, the next production is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(B), a major item display effect is executed. The major item display effect is an effect of displaying the major items of the menu. Here, a menu panel BP is displayed in the center of the display screen. The menu panel consists of "music customization", "brightness customization", "sound effect customization", and "return" from the top. "Music customization" is a menu for selecting music used in productions. "Brightness customization" is a menu for adjusting the brightness of the display screen 7a. "Sound effect customization" is a menu for selecting sound effects used for the background voice production described above. "Return" is a menu for returning to the standby effect. A button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG1 of "Confirm" is displayed to the left of the button image BG. A select button image SG modeled after the select button 68 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG2 of "Select" is displayed to the left of the select button image SG. The player operates the up and down keys of the select button 68 to select an item, and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm. Here, it is assumed that the "sound effect customization" menu has been selected and determined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a sub-item display effect is executed. The minor item display effect is an effect for displaying the minor items of the "sound effect customization" menu. Here, a menu panel BP is displayed in the center of the display screen. The menu panel BP has, from the top, "character voice", "casual sound effect", "violent sound effect", and "special sound effect". “Chara Voice” is a sound effect of the voice “Oaro”. The "casual sound effect" is a sound effect that does not remain in our ears, such as an environmental sound (the sound of water or the sound of the wind). A "violent sound effect" is, for example, a noise-like sound effect such as a horn or a siren. A "special sound effect" is a sound effect that is released as the game progresses. Here, too, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG1 of "determine" is displayed to the left of the button image BG. A select button image SG modeled after the select button 68 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG2 of "Select" is displayed to the left of the select button image SG. The player operates the up and down keys of the select button 68 to select an item, and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm. Here, it is assumed that the "character voice" menu has been selected and determined. Data of sound effects that can be selected here are stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . When a sound effect is selected, the selected sound effect is read out in a predetermined presentation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a major item display effect is executed. The major item display effect is an effect of displaying the major items of the menu. Here, a menu panel BP is displayed in the center of the display screen. The menu panel consists of "music customization", "brightness customization", "sound effect customization", and "return" from the top. A button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG1 of "Confirm" is displayed to the left of the button image BG. A select button image SG modeled after the select button 68 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG2 of "Select" is displayed to the left of the select button image SG. The player operates the up and down keys of the select button 68 to select an item, and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm. Here, it is assumed that the "return" menu has been selected and determined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), a standby effect is executed. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Above the button image BG, a downward arrow image YG is displayed, and above the arrow image YG, a message image MSG reading "Press button to customize" is displayed. Here, the player starts the game, and by entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the like, the next performance is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern.

Since "Chara Voice" is selected here, the voice of "Oaro" is intermittently output in the production of the Oaro Zone. For example, when "casual sound effect" is selected, the sound of water, for example, is intermittently output in the production of the oro zone. Here, especially when a sound effect different from the selected sound effect is output, a big win is decided. In this case, when a jackpot is won, a sound effect different from the selected sound effect may be read with a predetermined probability.

[Effect example]
Examples of background voice effects and voice setting effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when entering the oralo zone, a sound effect such as "oralo" is repeatedly and intermittently output separately from the output of the music corresponding to the oralo zone (FIGS. 117(D) to (G)). . According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player excited by the output of the effect sound, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the audio control board 106 and the speaker 67 correspond to the "sound output means", and the output of sound effects in the zone entry effect, the battle effect, the victory/loss notification effect, and the win/lose notification effect corresponds to the "sound effect effect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to set a sound effect from among a plurality of types of prepared sound effects (Fig. 119(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to output sound effects that the player likes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, sound effects are set via the select button 68 and the production button 63 (FIG. 119(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to set the effect sound relatively easily, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the select button 68 and the effect button 63 correspond to the "operation section".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the item of the menu panel BP includes "special sound effect", and the "special sound effect" is a sound effect that is released as the game progresses (Fig. 119 (C )). According to this configuration, since new sound effects are released as the game progresses, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the winning/losing notification effect in the OARO zone, a sound effect "OALO" is output at the timing immediately before the transition to the symbol promotion effect (Fig. 117 (G)). According to this configuration, since the effect sound is output at the timing that becomes a point during the presentation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a sound effect different from the selected sound effect is output, a big win is confirmed. According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and have a sense of superiority, thereby improving the interest of the game. Incidentally, the jackpot gaming state corresponds to the "specific gaming state".

[Modification]
Modified examples of the background voice effect and the voice setting effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
The above embodiment has a configuration in which sound effects are set while the gaming machine 1 is on standby (FIG. 119). On the other hand, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the sound effect can be changed by pressing the select button 68 during the variable presentation.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, "special sound effect" can be selected.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect sound is output in the oar zone triggered by the pressing promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that it outputs a sound effect during a predetermined presentation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F2-1]
A gaming machine comprising sound output means for outputting at least music,
During a predetermined effect, a sound effect effect can be executed in which a set sound effect is intermittently output by the sound output means separately from the output of the music corresponding to the predetermined effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F2-1,
A plurality of types of the sound effect are prepared, and the sound effect used for the sound effect production can be set from among the plurality of types of the sound effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F2-2,
Further comprising an operation unit that can be operated by the player,
The setting of the sound effect is performed through the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F2-2 or aspect F2-3,
As the game progresses, the types of sound effects that can be set increase.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F2-1 to F2-4,
The sound effect production includes production of outputting the sound effect by the sound output means in accordance with a specific timing in the specific production in the specific production in the predetermined production,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F2-1 to F2-5,
In the sound effect production, when a sound effect different from the set sound effect is output, a transition to a specific game state is confirmed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

120 to 122, character effect sound output presentations A and B, and music selection presentation will be described below. The character effect sound output presentation can be executed during the variation presentation of the presentation pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the character effect sound output effect, reads out the corresponding image data and the like from the ROM 103. to display an image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Especially in the character effect sound output performance, the music is output using the sound data. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs music and the like from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106. FIG. Acoustic data is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . This acoustic data is composed of music data and sound effect data. Further, the sub ROM 93 stores data on the motion pattern of the second movable accessory 15 . Here, for each piece of music data, data on the movement pattern of the second movable accessory 15 and sound effect data corresponding to the movement of the second movable accessory 15 are prepared in accordance with the rhythm of the song. That is, music data, data related to motion patterns, and sound effect data are set. Note that the motion of the second movable accessory 15 includes a lighting motion of lighting the characters "OARO". Also, the music selection effect can be executed while the gaming machine 1 is on standby.

[Character object sound effect output production A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the character effect sound output presentation A. FIG. The character effect sound output presentation A is executed in a low probability/low base state (so-called normal state). Of course, it is also possible to execute in other game states (high probability high base state, low probability high base state, high probability low base state).

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. In the following effects, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are hidden. Of course, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) forming the left and right performance symbols are the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "4" patterns. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), a pressing promotion effect is executed. The pressing promotion effect is an effect for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . Here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed below the button image BG. At this time, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without pressing the effect button 63, the next effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(D), a zone entry effect is executed. The zone entry effect is an effect for notifying that the player has entered the zone. Here, a message image MSG of "Entering the battle zone" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In the zone entry effect and the battle zone (battle effect, win/loss notification effect), preset music is output. In the battle zone, the second movable accessory 15 is operated in accordance with the rhythm of the output music. Also, a sound effect corresponding to the motion of the second movable accessory 15 is output. In this zone entry effect, only music is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(E), a battle effect (first half) is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Then, when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. In the battle production (first half), the enemy character CRB is attacking the ally character CRA side. In this case, the music "romantic battle" is output, and the lyric image KG "romantic battle" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 stops so as to cover the upper part of the display screen 7a, and lights up the characters "OARO" in sequence in accordance with the rhythm of the music of "Romantic Battle". In accordance with the lighting of the characters "OARO", a sound effect of "knocking" of swords colliding is output. Here, "O" on the left side is illuminated (indicated by hatching), and a sound effect "kang" is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(F), a battle effect (second half) is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Then, when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. In the battle production (second half), the ally character CRA is attacking the enemy character CRB. Here, a musical piece "Romantic Battle" is output, and a lyric image KG "Let's have a battle" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 stops so as to cover the upper part of the display screen 7a, and lights up the characters "OARO" in sequence in accordance with the rhythm of the music of "Romantic Battle". In accordance with the lighting of the letters "OARO", a sound effect of "knocking" of a sword colliding is output. Here, "O" on the right side is lit (indicated by hatching), and a sound effect "kang" is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing informing effect is an effect for informing whether the ally character CRA has won or been defeated by the enemy character CRB. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the victory of the teammate character CRA is announced. Also, here, a song "Romantic Battle" is output with an increased tempo, and a lyric image KG "Successful sake is romantic" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 stops so as to cover the upper part of the display screen 7a, and lights up the characters "OARO" in sequence in accordance with the rhythm of the music of "Romantic Battle". In accordance with the lighting of the letters "OARO", a sound effect of "knocking" of a sword colliding is output. Here, "O" on the left side is illuminated (indicated by hatching), and a sound effect "kang" is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) constituting the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same). Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "4".

[Character object sound effect output B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the character effect sound output presentation B. FIG. The character effect sound output presentation B is executed in a low probability/low base state (so-called normal state). Of course, it is also possible to execute in other game states (high probability high base state, low probability high base state, high probability low base state).

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. In the following effects, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are hidden. Of course, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) forming the left and right performance symbols are the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "4" patterns. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), a pressing promotion effect is executed. The pressing promotion effect is an effect for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . Here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed below the button image BG. At this time, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, or when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 ends without pressing the effect button 63, the next effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), a zone entry effect is executed. The zone entry effect is an effect for notifying that the player has entered the zone. Here, a message image MSG of "Entering the battle zone" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In the zone entry effect and the battle zone (battle effect, win/loss notification effect), preset music is output. In the battle zone, the second movable accessory 15 is operated in accordance with the rhythm of the output music. Also, a sound effect corresponding to the motion of the second movable accessory 15 is output. In this zone entry effect, only music is output. Also, here, a message image MG reading "select music with arrow keys" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a select button image SG imitating the select button 68 is displayed to the left of the message image MG. there is The player can select and change music by pressing the left and right keys of the select button 68 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(E), a battle effect (first half) is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Then, when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. In the battle production (first half), the enemy character CRB is attacking the ally character CRA side. In this case, the music "romantic battle" is output, and the lyric image KG "romantic battle" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 stops so as to cover the upper part of the display screen 7a, and lights up the characters "OARO" in sequence in accordance with the rhythm of the music of "Romantic Battle". In accordance with the lighting of the letters "OARO", a sound effect of "knocking" of a sword colliding is output. Here, "O" on the left side is illuminated (indicated by hatching), and a sound effect "kang" is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(F), a battle effect (second half) is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Then, when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. In the battle production (second half), the ally character CRA is attacking the enemy character CRB. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the left and right keys of the select button 68 have been pressed to change the music. Here, a musical piece "Stoic Waltz" is output, and a lyric image KG "Stoic Waltz" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 rotates clockwise (right) when viewed from the front or counterclockwise (left) when viewed from the front, in a position covering the upper part of the display screen 7a, in accordance with the rhythm of the song "Stoic Waltz". Rotate. In accordance with the rotating motion of the second movable accessory 15, a sound effect of a sword colliding is output. Here, the second movable accessory 15 is rotating clockwise (clockwise) when viewed from the front, and a sound effect "Kang" is output. Note that the song is changed during the period when the select button image SG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing informing effect is an effect for informing whether the ally character CRA has won or been defeated by the enemy character CRB. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the victory of the teammate character CRA is announced. Also, here, a song "Stoic Waltz" is output with an increased tempo, and a lyric image KG "Let's dance waltz quietly" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 rotates clockwise (right) when viewed from the front or counterclockwise (left) when viewed from the front, in a position covering the upper part of the display screen 7a, in accordance with the rhythm of the song "Stoic Waltz". Rotate. In accordance with the rotating motion of the second movable accessory 15, a sound effect of a sword colliding is output. Here, the second movable accessory 15 is rotating counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, and a sound effect "Kang" is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) constituting the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same). Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "4".

[Music selection performance]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the song selection effect. The musical piece selection effect is executed while waiting for customers.
First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), a standby effect is executed. The waiting effect is a effect that is executed when a customer waiting standby command is transmitted from the main control board 80 . Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Above the button image BG, a downward arrow image YG is displayed, and above the arrow image YG, a message image MSG reading "Press button to customize" is displayed. Here, when the player presses the production button 63, the next production is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), a major item display effect is executed. The major item display effect is an effect of displaying the major items of the menu. Here, a menu panel BP is displayed in the center of the display screen. The menu panel consists of "music customization", "brightness customization", "sound effect customization", and "return" from the top. "Music customization" is a menu for selecting music used for the above-described character effect sound output presentation. "Brightness customization" is a menu for adjusting the brightness of the display screen 7a. "Sound effect customization" is a menu for selecting sound effects used for production or the like. "Return" is a menu for returning to the standby effect. A button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG1 of "Confirm" is displayed to the left of the button image BG. A select button image SG modeled after the select button 68 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG2 of "Select" is displayed to the left of the select button image SG. The player operates the up and down keys of the select button 68 to select an item, and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm. Here, it is assumed that the "music customization" menu has been selected and determined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), a sub-item display effect is executed. The minor item display effect is an effect of displaying the minor items of the “music customization” menu. Here, a menu panel BP is displayed in the center of the display screen. The menu panel BP shows the song titles, which are "romantic battle", "stoic waltz", "oaro's theme", and "when the cherry blossoms bloom" from the top. Here, too, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG1 of "determine" is displayed to the left of the button image BG. A select button image SG modeled after the select button 68 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG2 of "Select" is displayed to the left of the select button image SG. The player operates the up and down keys of the select button 68 to select an item, and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm. Here, it is assumed that the "romantic battle" menu has been selected and determined. Acoustic data of songs that can be selected here are stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . When a piece of music is selected, the selected sound data is read in a predetermined effect. It should be noted that the number of songs listed as minor items increases as the game progresses. Specifically, the songs stored from the beginning are released as the game progresses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a major item display effect is executed. The major item display effect is an effect of displaying the major items of the menu. Here, a menu panel BP is displayed in the center of the display screen. The menu panel consists of "music customization", "brightness customization", "sound effect customization", and "return" from the top. A button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG1 of "OK" is displayed to the left of the button image BG. A select button image SG modeled after the select button 68 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG2 of "Select" is displayed to the left of the select button image SG. The player operates the up and down keys of the select button 68 to select an item, and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm. Here, it is assumed that the "return" menu has been selected and determined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), a standby effect is executed. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Above the button image BG, a downward arrow image YG is displayed, and above the arrow image YG, a message image MSG reading "Press button to customize" is displayed. Here, the player starts the game, and by entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the like, the next performance is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(F), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of the character effect sound output effect and the music selection effect are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the zone entry effect and the battle zone (battle effect, win/loss notification effect) following the zone entry effect, preset music is output (Fig. 120 (D) to (G) , FIGS. 121(D)-(G)). Especially in the battle zone, the second movable role object 15 is moved in time with the rhythm of the music, and sound effects corresponding to the motion of the second movable role object 15 are output (FIGS. 120(E) to (G), FIG. 121(E)-(G)). According to this configuration, in addition to the music, the motion of the second movable role object 15 and the corresponding sound effect are output. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the second movable accessory 15 corresponds to the "movable accessory", the audio control board 106 and the speaker 67 correspond to the "sound output means", and the effect of entering the zone and the battle zone (battle effect, winning/losing notification effect) ) corresponds to the “predetermined effect”, the effect of entering the zone and the effect of outputting music in the battle zone correspond to the “music output effect”, and the battle zone (battle effect, win/loss notification effect) corresponds to the “specific effect , and the performance of operating the second movable accessory 15 in the battle zone and outputting the sound effect corresponds to the “accessory sound effect presentation”.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the player can select a song to be output in a predetermined effect from predetermined candidate songs (Fig. 122(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to play the game with the music that the player likes, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to select a song during the variable effect (FIGS. 121(C) to (F)). Specifically, a song can be selected during the period (permissible period) during which the select button image SG is displayed. According to this configuration, the music can be changed even in the middle of the variable performance, and the motion of the second movable accessory 15 and the sound effect corresponding to the motion are changed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a song can be selected during the period (permissible period) during which the select button image SG is displayed. It overlaps with the rush production ~ win-loss notification production). According to this configuration, the music can be changed while the music is being output, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the number of candidate songs that are candidates for song selection increases as the game progresses. According to this configuration, the enjoyment of playing the game increases, and there is a high possibility that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the music, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the music is output at an uptempo in the winning/losing notification effect. According to this configuration, as the music increases in tempo, the movement of the second movable accessory 15 and the sound effects corresponding to the movement are changed in accordance with the rhythm of the music with the increased tempo. It becomes a certain production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Modifications of the character effect sound output presentation and music selection presentation are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the output of music is started in the effect of entering the zone, and in the battle zone, the action of the second movable accessory 15 and the sound effect corresponding to the action are added. On the other hand, for example, in the reach formation effect, music is output as the reach is formed, and by entering the zone, the action of the second movable accessory 15 and the sound effect corresponding to the action may be added. good.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the sound effect is described as outputting the sound of swords colliding with each other. Sound may be used. For example, if the character represents a cannon, the sound of the cannon being fired can be used as a sound effect. Also, for example, if the character represents a ship, the sound of the ship's whistle may be used as the sound effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the sound of swords colliding is output for all songs, but the sound effect may be different depending on the song. In this case, sound effects may be selected according to the image of the music.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, songs selected from the candidate songs are output. On the other hand, if a song is selected from the candidate songs and no song is output, it may have a special meaning that a big win is confirmed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F3-1]
a movable object,
A gaming machine comprising at least sound output means for outputting music,
It is possible to execute a music output effect for outputting the music using the sound output means in a predetermined effect,
In a specific performance in the predetermined performance, the movable role is operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music in the music output performance, and sound effects corresponding to the motion of the movable role are output. It is possible to execute a character sound effect production output using means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

It should be noted that the "motion of the movable accessory" includes not only the movement and rotation of the accessory, but also the lighting and extinguishing of the accessory.

[Aspect F3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F3-1,
The player can select the song in the song output effect from predetermined candidate songs,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F3-2,
Selection of the song from among the candidate songs is possible during a predetermined allowable period during the game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F3-3,
The permissible period is a period that at least partially overlaps with the execution period of the music output effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F3-2 to F3-4,
The number of candidate songs increases as the game progresses.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F3-1 to F3-5,
The tempo of the song may be increased during the specific performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

State transition variation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. This state transition variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the state transition variation performance is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[State transition change effect A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the state transition variation effect A. FIG. The state transition variation effect A is executed in a high-probability-high base state (so-called ST). It is assumed that the V passage scheduled jackpot includes a jackpot A in which both the variable probability counter and the short time counter are set to ``100'' and a jackpot B in which the variable probability counter is set to ``100'' and the short time counter is set to ``220''. continue the explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "96 more times" is displayed, which indicates how many more times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. In the following effects, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. However, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C may be displayed. In addition, a dedicated background image (shown with hatching) is provided so that it is easy to understand that it is in the high-precision high-base state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "0" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol. Here, too, the character image "96 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the final variation of ST is reached by repeating such a variation start effect and a fixed stop effect (loss).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, a character image of "Last" indicating the final change is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), a temporary stop effect (loss) is executed. The temporary stop effect (losing) is a effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a losing mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "4" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "7" symbol. Also here, a character image of "Last" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), a result display effect is executed. The result display effect is a effect of displaying an information display image accompanying the transition of the game state. In the result display effect, a message image MSG saying "Special time is over" is displayed. Here, the number of times of big hits (number of consecutive games), the total number of winning balls, and the like may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), a background change effect is executed. The background change effect is a effect of changing the background image from a dedicated background image in ST (high probability high base state) to a dedicated background image in normal time (low probability low base state). A dedicated background image for normal operation is shown without hatching. Here, in particular, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R temporarily stopped and displayed are changed at high speed again. The high-speed fluctuation start timing may be at the same time as the background image is changed, after the background image is changed, or before the background image is changed. However, from the point of view of creating a smooth flow, it is desirable to have a configuration in which high-speed fluctuation is already occurring at the start of the background change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (losing) is a production in which the re-varied production pattern is fixed and stopped in a losing mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "4" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "7" symbol. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same as the performance symbols for the temporary stop performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(H), a state transition effect is executed. The state transition effect is an effect performed immediately after the state transitions. Here, a message image MSG saying "Please return to left-handed hitting" is displayed. As a result, the player starts playing a game with a left hand. In addition, it can be seen that the jackpot A, which is set to "100" for both the variable probability counter and the short time counter, has been won.

[State transition variation effect B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining state transition variation effect B. FIG. The state transition variation effect B is executed in a high-probability-high base state (so-called ST). It is assumed that the V passage scheduled jackpot includes a jackpot A in which both the variable probability counter and the short time counter are set to ``100'' and a jackpot B in which the variable probability counter is set to ``100'' and the short time counter is set to ``220''. continue the explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 124(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "96 more times" is displayed, which indicates how many more times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. In the following effects, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. However, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C may be displayed. In addition, a dedicated background image (shown with hatching) is provided so that it is easy to understand that it is in the high-precision high-base state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "0" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol and is fixed and stopped. Again, the character image "96 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the final variation of ST is reached by repeating such a variation start effect and a fixed stop effect (loss).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, a character image of "Last" indicating the final change is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), a temporary stop effect (loss) is executed. The temporary stop effect (losing) is a effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a losing mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is at "4" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is at "7" symbol. Also here, a character image of "Last" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), a result display effect is executed. The result display effect is a effect of displaying an information display image accompanying the transition of the game state. In the result display effect, a message image MSG saying "Special time is over" is displayed. Here, the number of times of big hits (number of consecutive games), the total number of winning balls, and the like may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(F), a background change effect is executed. The background change effect is a effect of changing the background image from a dedicated background image in ST (high-probability-high base state) to a dedicated background image in chance time (low-probability-high base state). The dedicated background image for the chance time is hatched. Here, in particular, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R temporarily stopped and displayed are changed at high speed again. The high-speed fluctuation start timing may be at the same time as the background image is changed, after the background image is changed, or before the background image is changed. However, from the point of view of creating a smooth flow, it is desirable to have a configuration in which high-speed fluctuation is already occurring at the start of the background change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(G), a shift announcement effect is executed. In the transition notice effect, a message image MSG reading "Chance time 120 times" is displayed. As a result, it can be seen that the jackpot B in which the variable probability counter is set to "100" and the short time counter is set to "220" has been won.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (losing) is a production in which the re-varied production pattern is fixed and stopped in a losing mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "4" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "7" symbol. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same as the performance symbols for the temporary stop performance.

[State transition change effect C]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the state transition variation effect C. FIG. The state transition variation effect C is executed in a high-probability-high base state (so-called ST). It is assumed that the V passage scheduled jackpot includes a jackpot A in which both the variable probability counter and the short time counter are set to ``100'' and a jackpot B in which the variable probability counter is set to ``100'' and the short time counter is set to ``220''. continue the explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a character image of "96 more times" indicating how many times (how many fluctuations) the ST (high-accuracy-high base state) will continue is displayed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. In the following effects, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. However, the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C may be displayed. In addition, a dedicated background image (shown with hatching) is provided so that it is easy to understand that it is in the high-precision high-base state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "0" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "2" symbol and is fixed and stopped. Again, the character image "96 more times" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the final variation of ST is reached by repeating such a variation start effect and a fixed stop effect (loss).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, a character image of "Last" indicating the final change is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), a temporary stop effect (loss) is executed. The temporary stop effect (losing) is a effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the mode of losing. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is at "4" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is at "7" symbol. Also here, a character image of "Last" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(E), a result display effect is executed. The result display effect is a effect of displaying an information display image accompanying the transition of the game state. In the result display effect, a message image MSG saying "Special time is over" is displayed. Here, the number of times of big hits (number of consecutive games), the total number of winning balls, and the like may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(F), a background change effect is executed. The background change effect is a effect of changing the background image from a dedicated background image in ST (high probability high base state) to a dedicated background image in normal time (low probability low base state). A dedicated background image for normal operation is shown without hatching. Here, in particular, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R temporarily stopped and displayed are changed at high speed again. The high-speed fluctuation may be started at the same time as the background image is changed, after the background image is changed, or before the background image is changed. However, from the point of view of creating a smooth flow, it is desirable to have a configuration in which high-speed fluctuation is already occurring at the start of the background change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(G), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect of temporarily stopping the re-varying effect pattern in the mode of losing. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is "6" symbol. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different from the performance symbols at the time of temporary stop performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), a revival notification effect is executed. The revival notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern temporarily stopped in the mode of losing is changed to the mode of a big win. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) constituting the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same). Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7" patterns. After that, the fixed stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is performed. At this time, it is a case where the final variation of ST (high probability and high base state) is a big hit.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the state transition variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the result of the lottery is a loss in the final variation of ST (high probability base state), the temporary stop display of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed in a loss mode (Fig. 123 (D), FIG. 124 (D), FIG. 125 (D)), then change to the background image showing the normal time (low probability low base state) and temporarily stop the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at high speed Vary (Fig. 123(F), Fig. 124(F), Fig. 125(F)). According to this configuration, compared to the configuration of changing the background image while leaving the temporarily stopped production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R as they are, the disappointment that ST (high accuracy high base state) has ended is reduced, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the high probability high base state (so-called ST) corresponds to the "first game state", the low probability low base state (so-called normal state), and the low probability high base state (so-called time saving state) is the "second game state. The temporary stop effect (failure) (Fig. 123(D), Fig. 124(D), Fig. 125(D)) corresponds to the "first effect", and the background change effect ((Fig. 123(F), Fig. 124(F) ), and FIG. 125(F)) corresponds to the “second effect”.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the background change effect (Fig. 123(F), Fig. 124(F), Fig. 125(F)), the confirmation stop display in the mode of losing the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. is performed (FIGS. 123(G) and 124(H)). According to this configuration, after the background image is changed, the effect symbols that have been variably displayed are again fixed and stopped, so that the feeling of disappointment that the ST (high accuracy high base state) has ended is reduced, and the game is played. can improve the interest of

Note that the fixed stop effect (losing) (FIGS. 123(G) and 124(H)) corresponds to the "third effect".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a loss, the mode of loss in the fixed stop effect (loss) (FIGS. 123(G) and 124(H)) is a temporary stop effect (loss) ( 123(D) and FIG. 124(D)). According to this configuration, it becomes clear that the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the final variation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, temporary stop effect (losing) (Fig. 123(D), Fig. 124(D), Fig. 125(D)) and background change effect (Fig. 123(F), Fig. 124(F) , FIG. 125(F)) and a result display effect is executed (FIGS. 123(E), 124(E), and 125(E)). According to this configuration, since the information associated with the transition of the game state is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the result display effects (FIGS. 123(E), 124(E), and 125(E)) correspond to the "fourth effect".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the result of the lottery is winning in the final variation in ST (high accuracy base state), after the background change effect (FIG. 125 (F)), the effect pattern is a winning mode to display the fixed stop (FIG. 125(H)). According to this configuration, the re-fluctuation in the background change effect (FIG. 125(F)) is natural, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Incidentally, the resurrection notification effect (Fig. 125(F)) corresponds to the "fifth effect".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the final variation in ST (high probability base state), if the result of the lottery is winning, after the background change effect (FIG. 125 (F)), the effect patterns 8L, 8C, Temporary stop display is performed in the mode of losing 8R (FIG. 125(G)), and then final stop display is performed in the mode of winning performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R (FIG. 125(H)). According to this configuration, the re-fluctuation in the background change effect (FIG. 125(F)) is natural and surprises the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Incidentally, the temporary stop effect (FIG. 125(G)) and the revival notification effect (FIG. 125(H)) correspond to the "sixth effect".

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the result of the lottery is winning, the mode of losing in the temporary stop effect (FIG. 125(G)) is the same as the mode of losing in the temporary stop effect (loss) (FIG. 125(D)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be given an irregular feeling in the final variation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the state transition variation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, temporary stop effect (Fig. 123(D), Fig. 124(D), Fig. 125(D)) and background change effect (Fig. 123(F), Fig. 124(F), Fig. 125(F)) , the result display effect (Fig. 123(E), Fig. 124(E), Fig. 125(E)) was executed. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the result display effect is not executed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the final variation in ST (high probability base state), if the result of the lottery is winning, after the background change effect (Fig. 125 (F)), the loss of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R 125(G)), and then the fixed stop display is performed in the form of winning the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (FIG. 125(H)). On the other hand, immediately after the background change effect (FIG. 125(F)), the fixed stop display may be performed in the mode of winning the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. This configuration can also surprise the player and improve the amusement of the game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F4-1]
A gaming machine that executes an advantageous game by winning a predetermined lottery,
In the transition from the first game state to the second game state, in the final variation in the first game state, if the result of the lottery is a loss, a temporary stop display is performed in the form of a lost symbol. and, after the first effect, a second effect of changing to a background image showing the second game state and rapidly changing the symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the losing mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
It should be noted that when the player recognizes the start of re-fluctuation when reaching the high-speed fluctuation in the second effect, there is a possibility that the player will feel multiple fluctuations. Therefore, it is desirable to have a configuration that does not display the start of re-fluctuation of the symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the lost mode.

[Aspect F4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F4-1,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect of performing a fixed stop display in the form of a failure of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F4-2,
The mode of failure of the pattern in the third effect is the mode of failure of the pattern in the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F4-1 to F4-3,
Between the first effect and the second effect, a fourth effect is executed in which the temporarily stopped symbol is hidden and an information display image accompanying the transition of the game state is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F4-1 to F4-4,
In the final variation in the first game state, if the result of the lottery is winning, after the second effect, a fifth effect of performing a fixed stop display in the winning mode of the symbol is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F4-1 to F4-4,
In the final variation in the first game state, if the result of the lottery is winning, after the second effect, a temporary stop display is performed in the form of losing the pattern, and then in the form of winning the pattern. Execute the sixth effect that displays the fixed stop of
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F4-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect F4-6,
The mode of losing the pattern in the sixth production is a mode different from the mode of losing the pattern in the first production,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Icon change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. FIG. This icon change effect can be executed during the change effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the icon change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

[Icon change effect A]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the icon change effect A. FIG. The icon change effect A is executed in a high-precision high-base state (so-called ST). Of course, other game states, ie, low probability high base state (so-called time saving state), low probability low base state (so-called normal state), high probability low base state (so-called latent probability variable state) may be executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 126(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. Below, the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first suspended icon 9B", the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as the "second suspended icon 9B", and the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. 9B is also called the "third pending icon 9B", and the pending icon 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area is also called the "fourth pending icon 9B".

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(B), icon image rendering is executed. The icon image effect is a effect of changing the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B to participant images representing participants in a predetermined competition. Participant images include not only humans but also non-human animals, vehicles, and inanimate objects. The icon image effect is executed at the timing of increasing the pending storage (the timing of increasing the pending icon 9B). Of course, it is not necessary to limit the timing of the increase of the reserved memory. Here, at the timing when the fourth pending icon 9B is displayed due to the entry of the game ball, the variation icon 9C and the four pending icons 9B are changed to images of race cars. Note that the variation icon 9C is subject to pending change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(C), the race effect (early stage) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. In the race effect, the background image is displayed so as to scroll from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the race cars 9CC, 9B1 to 9B4 are displayed as if they are running at high speed toward the right side of the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the mode (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C. Specifically, five circular images are arranged side by side, and are white, blue, green, red, and gold from the left. These images show display colors in which the variable icon 9C can change. Below these images, a character image of "reliability" is displayed, and a character image of "LOW" is displayed on the left side and "HIGH" is displayed on the right side. That is, the closer to white, the lower the reliability, and the closer to gold, the higher the reliability. The degree of reliability is the degree of expectation of transition to the jackpot game. Here, the arrow image YG points to a white circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(D), a race effect (mid-term) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the mode (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C. Here, race car 9CC has passed race car 9B1. As a result, the arrow image YG moves to the right by one and points to the blue circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be blue. In this way, every time the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon 9C overtakes the race cars 9B1 to 9B4 corresponding to the holding icon 9B, an advance notice of the state (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C is made. The display changes to a display color with high reliability (expectation).

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(E), a race effect (late stage) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the mode (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C. Here, race car 9CC passes race cars 9B2 and 9B3 and then crosses the finish line GL. As a result, the arrow image YG moves to the right by two points and points to the red circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be red. Also, when the race car 9CC crosses the finish line GL, the race car 9CC also turns red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(F), a pending change effect is executed. The pending change effect is an effect in which the display color of the variation icon 9C changes. Specifically, the race car 9CC moves to the variable area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C changes. Here, the red race car 9CC moves as indicated by the arrow Y and collides with the variable icon 9C, causing the white variable icon 9C to become red. In this case, the race car 9CC collides with the variable icon 9C. However, if the variable icon 9C changes to the race car 9CC and moves around, the race car 9CC is displayed in the variable area where nothing is displayed. 9CC may be moved and displayed, and the red race car 9CC may be changed to the red variation icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) forming the left and right performance symbols are the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "3" patterns. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a red variable icon 9C and four pending icons 9B are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in a winning mode. The winning mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) constituting the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same). Here, all of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are "3" patterns. Four pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Icon change effect B]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining icon change effect B. FIG. The icon change effect B is executed in a high-precision high-base state (so-called ST). Of course, other game states, ie, low probability high base state (so-called time saving state), low probability low base state (so-called normal state), high probability low base state (so-called latent probability variable state) may be executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. Below, the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first suspended icon 9B", the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as the "second suspended icon 9B", and the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. 9B is also called the "third pending icon 9B", and the pending icon 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area is also called the "fourth pending icon 9B". In particular, the first suspension icon 9B is changed to suspension, and its display color is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(B), icon image rendering is executed. The icon image effect is a effect of changing the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B to participant images representing participants in a predetermined competition. Participant images include not only humans but also non-human animals, vehicles, and inanimate objects. The icon image effect is executed at the timing of increasing the pending storage (the timing of increasing the pending icon 9B). Of course, it is not necessary to limit the timing of the increase of the reserved memory. Here, at the timing when the fourth pending icon 9B is displayed due to the entry of the game ball, the variable icon 9C and the four pending icons 9B are changed to images of race cars. Note that the variation icon 9C is subject to pending change. In addition, since the first suspension icon 9B has been changed to suspension and has become green, the race car also becomes green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(C), the race effect (early stage) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. In the race effect, the background image is displayed so as to scroll from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the race cars 9CC, 9B1 to 9B4 are displayed as if they are running at high speed toward the right side of the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the state (display color) after the change icon 9C is changed. Specifically, five circular images are arranged side by side, and are white, blue, green, red, and gold from the left. These images show display colors in which the variable icon 9C can change. Below these images, a character image of "reliability" is displayed, and a character image of "LOW" is displayed on the left side and "HIGH" is displayed on the right side. That is, the closer to white, the lower the reliability, and the closer to gold, the higher the reliability. The degree of reliability is the degree of expectation of transition to the jackpot game. Here, the arrow image YG points to a white circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(D), a race effect (mid-term) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the mode (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C. Here, race car 9CC has passed race car 9B1. In particular, race car 9B1 is the green race car corresponding to hold icon 9B that has changed to hold. As a result, the arrow image YG moves two places to the right and points to the green circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be green. In this way, every time the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon 9C overtakes the race cars 9B1 to 9B4 corresponding to the holding icon 9B, an advance notice of the state (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C is made. The display changes to a display color with high reliability (expectation). Here, in particular, it is shown that the reliability (expectation) changes greatly by overtaking the race car corresponding to the hold icon 9B that has changed to hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(E), a race effect (late stage) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the mode (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C. Here, race car 9CC passes race cars 9B2 and 9B3 and then crosses the finish line GL. As a result, the arrow image YG moves two places to the right and points to the golden circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be gold. Also, when the race car 9CC crosses the finish line GL, the race car 9CC is also gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(F), a pending change effect is executed. The pending change effect is an effect in which the display color of the variation icon 9C changes. Specifically, the race car 9CC moves to the variable area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C changes. Here, the gold race car 9CC moves as indicated by the arrow Y and collides with the variable icon 9C, and the white variable icon 9C becomes gold. In this case, the race car 9CC collides with the variable icon 9C. However, if the variable icon 9C changes to the race car 9CC and moves around, the race car 9CC is displayed in the variable area where nothing is displayed. 9CC may be moved and displayed, and the gold race car 9CC may change to the gold variation icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) forming the left and right performance symbols are the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "3" patterns. A gold variable icon 9C and four pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in a winning mode. The winning mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) constituting the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same). Here, all of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are "3" patterns. Four pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Icon change effect C]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the icon change effect C. FIG. The icon change effect C is executed in a high-precision high-base state (so-called ST). Of course, other game states, ie, low probability high base state (so-called time saving state), low probability low base state (so-called normal state), high probability low base state (so-called latent probability variable state) may be executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 128(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. Below, the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first suspended icon 9B", the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as the "second suspended icon 9B", and the suspended icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. 9B is also called the "third pending icon 9B", and the pending icon 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area is also called the "fourth pending icon 9B".

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), icon image rendering is executed. The icon image effect is a effect of changing the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B to participant images representing participants in a predetermined competition. Participant images include not only humans but also non-human animals, vehicles, and inanimate objects. The icon image effect is executed at the timing of increasing the pending storage (the timing of increasing the pending icon 9B). Of course, it is not necessary to limit the timing of the increase of the reserved memory. Here, at the timing when the fourth pending icon 9B is displayed due to the entry of the game ball, the variation icon 9C and the four pending icons 9B are changed to images of race cars. Note that the variation icon 9C is subject to pending change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), the race effect (early stage) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. In the race effect, the background image is displayed so as to scroll from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the race cars 9CC, 9B1 to 9B4 are displayed as if they are running at high speed toward the right side of the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the mode (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C. Specifically, five circular images are arranged side by side, and are white, blue, green, red, and gold from the left. These images show display colors in which the variable icon 9C can change. Below these images, a character image of "reliability" is displayed, and a character image of "LOW" is displayed on the left side and "HIGH" is displayed on the right side. That is, the closer to white, the lower the reliability, and the closer to gold, the higher the reliability. The degree of reliability is the degree of expectation of transition to the jackpot game. Here, the race car 9CC runs ahead of the race cars 9B1 and 9B2 immediately after the start of the race, and the arrow image YG points to the green circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(D), a race effect (mid-term) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the mode (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C. Here, race car 9CC has overtaken race car 9B3. As a result, the arrow image YG moves one place to the right and points to the red circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be red. In this way, every time the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon 9C overtakes the race cars 9B1 to 9B4 corresponding to the holding icon 9B, an advance notice of the state (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C is made. The display changes to a display color with high reliability (expectation).

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(E), a race effect (late stage) is executed. The race effect is a effect in which the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon and the race cars 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 corresponding to the first to fourth hold icons 9B race. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an advance notice is displayed to give an advance notice of the mode (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C. Here, race car 9CC crosses the finish line GL after passing race car 9B4. As a result, the arrow image YG moves one place to the right and points to the golden circular image. This foretells that the display color of the variable icon 9C after the change will be gold. Also, when the race car 9CC crosses the finish line GL, the race car 9CC is also gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(F), a pending change effect is executed. The pending change effect is an effect in which the display color of the variation icon 9C changes. Specifically, the race car 9CC moves to the variable area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C changes. Here, the gold race car 9CC moves as indicated by the arrow Y and collides with the variable icon 9C, and the white variable icon 9C becomes gold. In this case, the race car 9CC collides with the variable icon 9C. However, if the variable icon 9C changes to the race car 9CC and moves around, the race car 9CC is displayed in the variable area where nothing is displayed. 9CC may be moved and displayed, and the gold race car 9CC may change to the gold variation icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is generally a mode in which the left and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) forming the left and right performance symbols are the same). Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "3" patterns. A gold variable icon 9C and four pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in a winning mode. The winning mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information (numbers) constituting the left, middle, and right performance symbols are the same). Here, all of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are "3" patterns. Four pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B are changed to images of race cars (FIGS. 126(B), 127(B), and 128(B)). Then, a race effect is executed, and the display color of the variation icon 9C is changed based on the results of the race car 9CC corresponding to the variation icon 9C (FIGS. 126(C)-(F), FIGS. 127(C)- (F), FIGS. 128(C)-(F)). According to this configuration, in the variation, the interest in the game can be improved by the performance using not only the variation icon 9C but also the hold icon 9B.

The image of the race car corresponds to the "participant image", and the race competition corresponds to the "predetermined competition".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the more the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon 9C overtakes the race cars 9B1 to 9B4 corresponding to the pending icon 9B, the more the display color of the variable icon 9C becomes more expected. (Figs. 126(C)-(F), Figs. 127(C)-(F), Figs. 128(C)-(F)). According to this configuration, the change in display color becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon 9C starts from the tail end (Fig. 126(C), Fig. 127(C)). According to this configuration, all of the race cars 9B1 to 9B4 corresponding to the hold icon 9B are targets for overtaking, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
It should be noted that the race presentation may be started from a state in which the race car 9CC has already overtaken some of the race cars 9B1 to 9B4 (Fig. 128(C)). In particular, when the race effect is started with the race car 9CC in the lead, the big win may be determined.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the race effect, an advance notice is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a to give advance notice of the state (display color) after the change of the variable icon 9C (Fig. 126(C) to (E), FIGS. 127(C)-(E), FIGS. 128(C)-(E)). According to this configuration, the change in display color becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, every time the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon 9C pulls past the race cars 9B1 to 9B4 corresponding to the holding icon 9B, the state after the change (display color) of the variable icon 9C ) changes to a display color with high reliability (expectation) (Figs. 126(D)(E), Figs. 127(D)(E), Figs. 128(D)(E)) . According to this configuration, the change in display color becomes easier to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B change to the image of the race car at the timing of the increase of the pending memory (timing of the increase of the pending icon 9B) (Fig. 126(B), Fig. 127(B), FIG. 128(B)). According to this configuration, the change to the race car image becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the icon change effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the display color is changed as a change in the aspect of the variable icon 9C. However, it is also possible to change other than the display color. For example, the size of the icon may be changed as a change in the aspect of the variable icon 9C. Further, for example, the result of a predetermined competition may be changed to an image (such as a trophy image) showing first, second, third, and so on.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the image of the race car is used as the participant image representing the participant in the predetermined competition. On the other hand, if the predetermined sport is short-distance running, long-distance running, ball games, or the like, a human image may be used. Images of animals other than humans may also be used.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the display color of the race car 9CC corresponding to the variable icon 9C is changed when the goal line is crossed (FIGS. 126(E), 127(E), and 128(E)). On the other hand, the display color of the race car 9CC may not be changed, and only the display color of the variable icon 9C may be changed in the pending change effect. On the other hand, the display color of the race car 9CC may be changed each time the race car 9CC overtakes the other race cars 9B1 to 9B4.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B change to the image of the race car at the timing of the increase of the pending memory (the timing of the increase of the pending icon 9B) (Fig. 126 (B), Fig. 127 ( B), FIG. 128(B)). On the other hand, the image of the race car may be changed at a timing that is not related to the timing of increase of the reserved memory. For example, the image is changed to a race car image triggered by a specific effect that notifies the start of a race.

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment, the reliability (expectation) is increased by two levels by passing the race car 9B1 corresponding to the pending icon 9B that has changed to pending (FIG. 127(D)). On the other hand, the reliability (expectation level) may be increased by three or more levels in accordance with the pending change of the pending icon 9B. For example, if the pending change of the pending icon 9B is blue, it is increased by two steps, and if the pending change of the pending icon 9B is green, it is increased by three steps. Further, for example, if the pending change of the pending icon 9B is a rainbow color, it may be configured such that the jackpot is determined when the icon 9B is pulled out.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the four pending icons 9B are race cars 9B1 to 9B4, but there are cases where three or less pending icons 9B are race cars. In other words, the number of race cars to be overtaken may be three or less.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F5-1]
A gaming machine capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state in the variation by the aspect of the variation icon corresponding to the variation,
In changing the aspect of the variable icon displayed in the variable area, the variable icon and the pending icon displayed in the pending area are changed to participant images indicating participants in a predetermined competition, and the participation the participant of the person image executes a competition effect in which the predetermined competition is performed, and the mode of the variation icon is changed based on the performance in the predetermined competition of the participant of the participant image corresponding to the variation icon;
A gaming machine characterized by:
The term "participant image indicating a participant" is meant to include not only human beings but also vehicles other than humans, animals, and all other units in which a predetermined competition is established.

[Aspect F5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-1,
The predetermined competition is a race competition for ranking,
In the competition production, the more the participant of the participant image corresponding to the variable icon overtakes the participant of the participant image corresponding to the holding icon, the more the variable icon is in the high expectation mode. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-2,
In the competition production, the participant of the participant image corresponding to the variable icon starts the race competition from the tail end.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-3,
In the competition effect, an advance notice display is performed to foretell the state after the change of the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-4,
The advance notice display can be updated according to the progress of the competition production,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-5,
At the timing when a predetermined number of the pending icons are displayed, the variable icon and the pending icon change to the participant image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-6,
Triggered by execution of a specific effect, the variable icon and the pending icon change to the participant image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as operation units to be operated by the player. , triggers, etc. may be used. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 includes a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a). The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (suspended icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 17 Large winning opening opening start opening 20 First start opening (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
64 Sub-display screen 69 Frame movable accessory 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Production control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state in the variation by the aspect of the variation icon corresponding to the variation,
In changing the aspect of the variable icon displayed in the variable area, the variable icon and the pending icon displayed in the pending area are changed to participant images indicating participants in a predetermined competition, and the participation perform a competition effect in which the participant of the person image performs the predetermined competition, and change the aspect of the variation icon based on the performance in the predetermined competition of the participant of the participant image corresponding to the variation icon ;
The predetermined competition is a race competition for ranking,
In the competition production, the degree of expectation indicated by the variable icon according to the number of times the participant of the participant image corresponding to the variable icon overtakes the participant of the participant image corresponding to the holding icon. The aspect of the variable icon changes so that the
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images